W27 History!

DeletedUser

Guest
W27 – A World Like No Other


To all those who called this world home

Foreword

This work comes dedicated to all those that played W27, as a means to commemorate the vicissitudes of a truly unique experience. It has been crafted as a tribute to the good people who made the experience what it was, so that their achievements might go down in history.

As the title suggests, I have sought to lay out a complete history of W27 from start to finish. Much of the early history I have pieced together from posts on the public forum and the memories of those who were around at the beginning. A great deal is also my own writing and explanation of the unique circumstances of the beginning. In later times, my predominant source work is my own Weekly which in turn is based on the statistics, and also files a great many interviews which add the scope of comment and opinion. I have also inserted relevant and contemporary forum posts, and to seek both current and retrospective comments and opinions throughout the course of my time here.

I have endeavoured to source my material if it comes from the public forum, and the many uses of my own Weekly merit that it always be classed as a source of information from its inception. At all times, I have sought to avoid plagiarism of any kind, and when a comment can have its progenitor named, I have done so. Frequently, I have factored the opinions of others into what I write and used the modal judgement at the time as the basis for my comments. Sources of information extend beyond written comments and retrospective analysis and discussion has yielded ideas that find their way in here. Therefore, it is best to see this as a compendium of all the knowledge I could find on the world, strung together with my narrative and structure. As a member of Shadow, the majority of the information I have concerns my tribe; information on the state of the rest of the world varied in its reliability and paucity. As such, speculation on other tribes is less accurate.

Material sourced from the forum or other players may subject to minimal editing for spelling and grammar where the meaning was difficult to discern or reading was painful, or indeed to keep the syntax like mine. However, I have sought not to edit works where possible. Full review of the primary source is always possible. If you would wish me to remove material that you yourself have provided, then please make yourself known.

The work itself is intended as a factual document as far as is possible and with what material I have. That being said, Tribal Wars is also a game, and this history, whilst lengthy and factual, is also intended as interesting, engrossing and entertaining. Although I realise that my own position in Shadow does inject a bias, I have endeavoured to be fair, and to offer as many sides as I can to any controversial points. Given that the rise of Shadow is the story of the world, that is the main theme of the document, though by no means its entire composition.

I hope that all enjoy it, and that my time writing it has not been in vain. It is testament to my enjoyment of this world that every name remembered and event captured brings a smile to my face. With the utmost gratitude, I thank all for their time here, for being a part of this experience. I thank too all those who have found their way here and appreciate a fine tale as much as me. Let us begin ...

The Early Days – Tribal Prisons

When this world was first announced and its settings realised, it was not disapproval, but curiosity that sparked attention in this world. W27 is unique in many ways, not least in its early settings. The idea of placing players into random tribes upon their arrival in the world and preventing them from leaving and joining others was perhaps interesting in theory, but the true nature of it could only be realised after the months had expired. It was an experiment in so many ways; but is that not often the only way one can truly see how such things play out? How many could predict what would transpire here?

The settings as they officially were:

[spoil]World 27 Settings:

World will open Thursday the 13th of November, between 15:00 and 17:00 ST

Server speed: 1.1x
Troop Speed: .9x
Packages, No Paladin, No archers
No Tribe Limit, No Leaving tribes or disbanding them.
Techs: 15
Beginner Protection: 5 days

Location is random, you can not support people outside your tribe.

When a player joins a server they will automatically be put in a random tribe.

You can not attack your tribe mates.

There will be 200 Tribes created for when the world begins. For the first 3 months you will not be able to disband or leave your tribe.

After Three months, you will be able to leave or disband any tribe or join any other tribe.

The duke will be elected by the tribe, within the tribes forums.

Once a tribe has 100 members, the tribe will have 4 days to do voting. After 4 days the duke will receive their title and be able to appoint their council. The person with majority vote will receive duke.


Source: Public Forum

[/spoil]

One could divide those who joined into two camps: those who didn’t have much of a clue about what the settings were, and those who were curious as to the workings of such a scheme. It is doubtful that any at all joined because they found the settings to be favourable. I, like others, was genuinely interested in seeing how this would work and the possibilities it would engender. I fancied that an inability to simply join the tribe of your neighbour to offer mutual protection would leave many areas, particularly the core, to be savage deathmatches, or else that it would test each player’s diplomatic and decision making skills in choosing which of their neighbours to work with and which to attack.

A brief outline of the settings is necessary to many here since the idea of preset tribes is foreign to many. Any player who joined from November 13 2008 to February 13 2009 was thrust into any one of 200 tribes, named creatively by the TW staff. Each player was assigned to a random tribe and a random location in the world. Hence, each tribe would grow all over the place, and each would be inter-mingled with the rest.

Once each tribe reached 100 members, voting would take place internally on the forums for a duke, which was its own game of posturing and elective rigmarole. The duke was endowed with the usual abilities for a tribe and had the honour of running that tribe. The tribe itself was then like any other; its name and profile could be changed, and privileges could be distributed, though no player could leave the tribe, nor could the tribe be disbanded. One could not attack tribemates (this rule was lifted after the Lock ended), but only tribemates could be supported (a rule which continued throughout the life of the world).

Those first few days were no doubt quite an experience for veteran and newb alike. Amid the incessant complaints haranguing the settings and the lamentations on the state of tribes, there were some players who were finding the settings to be a refreshing change. Indeed, the settings did significantly polarise opinion; on the one hand there were those who thought the idea to be ridiculous and that the game was unworkable, that it defied the concepts of the game and increased the reliance of success on good fortune by possessing such a glaring disparity between tribes.

On the other hand, the change was welcomed; players could no longer hide in their tribes and it forced an independence from them. It also was responsible for many new relationships between players who may never have got to know each other had it not happened. Crucially, it enabled prospective dukes to make the right decisions in the ensuing months about who was worth inviting and who was not.

Interestingly enough, we have a handy poll from the first few days:

[spoil]
Poll on World Settings: November 14

EarlyVote.jpg

Source: Public Forum

[/spoil]

I thought I would also include some opinion pieces from players in those early days. The following are in chronological order, with a few pieces from that week, and then some threads appraising the situation later on:

[spoil]
Super Awesome Player – You have to be kidding me! – Source: Public Forum
[spoil]You went and put me in some lame tribe, filled with lame members...[/spoil]

WindowWatcher – Strangest World Ever – Source: Public Forum
[spoil]Hello, W27 readers!

Now, I come to you today to state the obvious, but to also state some other facts that may be of interest.

W27 is the strangest world on TW. Ever. This cannot be debated. Already there is talk of premade tribes after 3 months, and in how many world can you laugh at n00bs asking how they got into a tribe?


But I come onto the forums to examine W27. For starters, I present :

Exhibit A : (21.|58 P) My Rank

I mean, come on?! This is probably the easiest start to a world I have ever had. I logged on, stayed on for about an hour, went out for 2 hours, then came back on again, and I find myself just outside the top 20, with no idea that I would be in the top 1000?

Is this just me pointwhoring? No. I have been using my usual start to a world. So then, has this world got no decent players whatsoever? Or at least, a lack of very skilled players? We shall see..

Yet, with only 200 tribes, will this world work? A lot of tribes already have a few members glued to the bottom with 26 points. No doubt they will auto delete after 2 weeks, but a lot of tribes will have weak players at the bottom, logging in once every week and upgrading their village HQ every so often.

Will this world prove to be a dumping ground for inactives, or the best school to ever develop on TW? We shall see.

WW[/spoil]

vpar2 - World 27: An initial evaluation, and thoughts for the future – Source: Public Forum
[spoil]World 27 must be praised as an excellent concept, regardless of how it turns out. So far, it appears to have been overshadowed by World 28, making World 27 extremely small. While this is doubtless interesting to the players, it indicates that the settings are not widely popular.

It is extremely early, I know, but I will attempt to evaluate the reasons for this, explain the current and future states of World 27 as I see them, and discuss how this concept can be tweaked in future worlds.

Rationale for the size of the World

People like to make decisions for themselves. Although many enjoy being placed in a tribe, others relish a sense of control. Regardless of how fun they may find the world after joining, this, coupled with the ability to only join W28 or W27, has doubtless sapped the interest of many in this world. Perhaps a world such as this should be offered on its own in the future, and not as a package alongside another. Worlds such as this are unique and interesting, but without member support, I doubt that tribalwars will see an incentive in continuing them.

The State of the World

The current state of W27 is, in my opinion, poor, although it has potential. While the concept of this world was excellent, namely players with all experience levels working together to forge strong tribes, the execution has not been the best. This is the first time this concept has been tried on tribalwars.net, so certain allowances must be made. Regardless of any critique I make of this world, creating it was a bold and inspired move, and must be praised.

In W27, tribes are widely spread out and all similar in member composition and numbers. Each tribe has a few players who desperately desire to be duke, a few players who are veterans, and thus believe that they should be duke, a few players who honestly don't care, and a few players who are inactive. I am unsure how voting will turn out, but this is not a good mix for a tribe. Some allowances must be made in terms of the forums or in terms of kicking players for this concept to truly function.

Currently, there are only 2 levels of forum privileges. Either you can read hidden forums, or you cannot. However, this poses a problem when you have known inactives and spies in your tribe. Typically, many tribes use hidden forums for aristocrats to discuss matters. In this world, they will see more and more use for typical tribal functions as leaders slowly learn to exclude the untrustworthy by means of revoking hidden forums access. A second level of hidden/privileged forum access would help in this world, if if could be implemented.

Second, although known inactives and spies can be dealt with using the hidden forum method, perhaps a script could be run on the world to kick all of those who have not grown for a predefined amount of time. This is a more controversial setting, as it would essentially strand them, tribeless, if they chose to return, but perhaps some facility to rejoin their original tribe could be implemented. Flesh this idea out, if you like, I have reached my limits with it.

Too Spread Out?

The spread out nature of tribes is also a significant issue. It has potential to greatly increase teamwork in terms of relocation and long range support, but it likely will not, as those require significant activity, something most tribalwars players lack. Due to this, it will be easy for more active players to gobble up isolated players, who can only get in-tribe support. This will lead to a few active players coming out on top in 3 months. The only real drama I foresee is active players attacking each other. There is hope for a well-led, well-coordinated tribe, but the majority will not be.

In order to fix this issue, I believe that tribes should be restricted to a certain number of continents in future worlds, if this is implemented again. 2 is a good number to me, but it is debatable. While still allowing for drama and ennoblement, due to the fact that this is not extremely closely packed(100-200 players over 2 continents is not a whole lot, especially with all the inactives, etc, that are in these tribes; do not think of these tribes in typical "elite/continent tribe" terms), it would also allow for tribemates to support each other. This would make the game far more interesting.

Returning the IRC link that once existed atop the tribalwars toolbar would also aid in this. In this world, quick defensive support and good coordination will be needed, which is easiest over Skype or IRC. As many cannot or will not download Skype, the ability to easily click a link and be taken to a java IRC client is sorely missed.

Choices, Choices

The process for application to be Duke also seems to be too informal. Although the voting has not begun, and I am unsure how it will be implemented, if this concept is carried to future worlds, some kind of in-forum application should be developed in which people can list their experience. This would place all applications in an easy place, and would keep threads uncluttered, allowing players to make a better choice.

A Duke that is elected 4 or 5 days into the world also may not last long, or may turn out to be a poor choice. Considering that the tribe is essentially stuck with the candidate for 3 months, I would suggest a second round of voting a few weeks in. In 3-4 weeks, players will know much more about each other and their leadership, and will be able to make a much better choice. Stranding players under a lame duck or inactive duke will only make them lose interest in this world. A Duke is necessary early on though, to set tribal direction and moderate the forums, so simply pushing the vote back that far is not a viable option.

The Future?

I currently see a lot of energy and enthusiam surrounding this world, both in game and on these forums, but I fear it will fade; I am already seeing signs of disillusionment. Although it is possible to forge good tribes on this world, the amount of work that it would take is considerable, and the early vote for Duke does not aid in finding the correct candidate.

Ultimately, I believe the true value of this world was in allowing players who do not ordinarily interact to do so, both forging bonds and bringing up the overall knowledge and player quality. However, many veterans do not enjoy the teaching aspect, and I fear that this world will lose its unique value.

Currently, this world consists of several similar, extremely spread out tribes. The only winners I foresee in this world currently are those who are active and slowly take on these tribes, which will fold, as the players will be too far apart to support each other. I foresee that we will see an abandonment of these random tribes in 3 months, and a shift, as the active players band together.

To me, this will mark a failure of this world, and I would not like to see this happen. Any change or concept that can perpetuate these early tribes and keep them going is a good one, to me at least.[/spoil]

antpi1e - Thank you TW team,thank you for this world :D Source: Public Forum
[spoil]Finally going with the name of "Tribal Wars" ..

Not "Tribal lets Ally and NAP every tribe in site"

I dont even care if I go down early,at least it will be fun.

I hate playing in worlds where point whores survive...



P.S. After feb 13 instead of letting people make their own tribes you should just reshuffle all of the remaining players into different tribes :([/spoil]

erect - You and your tribe – Source: Public Forum
[spoil]I'm curious. This one goes to those who say they will ignore their tribe completely, acting as if they were tribeless and afterwards, when the three months are over, screwing it over and leaving to form a premade..



Why the hell did you join this world?


I'm pretty sure the reason I joined is to see a top 20 in 2 months time that doesn't look like this:

1 CND 24.481.111 28.646.225 67 427.556 3106 9.223
2 C² 22.819.463 31.678.425 80 395.980 3457 9.164
3 =HRV= 20.347.703 24.775.488 76 325.993 2601 9.525
4 Plight 18.299.808 18.299.808 39 469.226 1916 9.551
5 ORC 16.622.824 22.279.775 78 285.638 2356 9.457
6 BANG! 15.735.736 20.861.218 75 278.150 2273 9.178
7 ~I~ 15.517.100 17.584.748 65 270.535 1908 9.216
8 GUNs 13.706.779 17.282.335 69 250.469 1891 9.139
9 ~LOD~ 7.192.984 7.917.478 72 109.965 949 8.343
10 Virus 6.846.350 7.268.845 54 134.608 851 8.542
11 HOT 5.797.890 6.149.521 73 84.240 748 8.221
12 |BFL| 5.103.053 5.741.474 64 89.711 733 7.833
13 ~LS~ 5.062.380 5.147.304 45 114.385 645 7.980
14 *MK* 3.432.958 3.432.958 7 490.423 366 9.380
15 MLTPP 3.152.550 3.940.745 77 51.179 593 6.645
16 KOTF+ 2.831.635 2.948.054 57 51.720 463 6.367
17 ~M~ 2.722.591 2.902.198 69 42.061 408 7.113
18 Alamo 2.697.638 2.697.638 9 299.738 328 8.225
19 ronDA 2.418.434 2.450.755 43 56.994 362 6.770
20 WLD 2.399.077 2.399.077 5 479.815 257 9.335



Do you note something? 22million points of difference between twenty places. This is an example of all worlds(correct me if im wrong). I was hoping to see something a bit different, a much more competitive world in which there was an actual top 20, not a top 5.

Maybe it could be a bit more entertaining to have threats all around you rather than having just a few tribes which could cause you any harm at all.[/spoil]

chucklefang - Something I like about this world – Source: Public Forum
[spoil]To me something I really like about this world is being widely over looked. It is my impression that it is being overlooked anyway, and my sincerest apologies if your view's as a reader do not match with my own personal views.

I really like the fact that each tribe only has 1, 2 or in some cases 3, and 4 p&p personalities. To me early in these new worlds the game can get bogged down a bit and almost make the world that much less desirable, due to a group or groups of people from tribes just taking the worlds forum they inhabit and having their cruel, sick, and nasty ways with it in various ways and positions. Who wants to see the same things over and over on here anyway? I sure don't, and seeing the same people post a lot of the same crap over and over gets old to me.

This is just an epiphany I had on the constantly changing aspects and ever rising(or for some decreasing) interest in the new elements that this worlds has brought along.

Carry on, carry on. :)[/spoil]

IloveTheRain - Players killing the most exciting world? – Source: Public Forum
[spoil]First of all, I would like to thank TW moderators for this world, which is absolutely different from all the others. I even wanted to leave TW at least for a while, because nothing new ever happened, but this world forced me to stay.

But what do our "great" players do? Do they adopt to the settings and try to play with their tribes? I know some tribes got a bit luckier than others, but in no other world you will find so many equally skilled tribes. They just use their friends from old worlds, and gang against others. (And I'm not talking about what few players tried to do against me, that probably was their only chance, so I don't blame them ).

Can we all just stop hugging and play a real world? Why do you even join world with these settings, if you are going to form 100 personal alliances with your friends, and will work together with them even if you are not in the same tribe?

If you want to play with them, you can do that in any other world, but this one is special, where you can play against players, you can't in other worlds.

Of course It is a lot easier to play ,when friends are clearing villages for you and lowering loyalty. but is that fun at all? I don't remember when was the last time I have had so much fun playing TW, like I did yesterday ,when 4 players from whom at least 2 are very good, were coordinating against me. I was ready to lose, but that just made it more interesting.

I would love to see a world, where players wouldn't be afraid to lose and would go against friends from other worlds. Don't you think that fighting someone you know, who is good, would be more fun, than coordinating with him against someone , who wont be able to defend?

And no, I don't say this because I'm getting rimmed, I actually got a new village today. And I don't care if someone will be mad at me and send me to the rim. I just want to have some fun before that.

But I guess everyone plays as he wants. Some fight for their villages, and some... not.[/spoil]

abdellah123 – What is your opinion of this world? – Source: Public Forum
[spoil]Well since this world is a little bit quiet, i think we should get people to post what they think. Obviously the world descriptions wont change, but we all want to hear what you think.

What i think, is that the description killed it, joinning automatically a tribe is a bit boring, :p but oh well.

What do you guys think?[/spoil]

[/spoil]

Here’s a little something to put the state of the tribes in context too:

[spoil]
Early Tribes Map: November 15

mapw27copyih1.jpg

Source: Public Forum

[/spoil]

The map certainly makes for quite a sight! There is little better way of conveying the early chaos than a display of the scattered nature of each tribe. When you consider the true multitude of 200 tribes all dispersed across the map, you realise that the early months of W27 were unlike anything else.

I think you can also see that there was a broad range of early opinion and one that possibly became more negative as time went on as the novelty wore off. Certainly an excavation of the forum reveals that many players had expected the world to be aggressive and fierce with a strong impetus on player survival. It was new, and different, but this sadly proved unable to hold the interest of a lot of players, particularly some well known faces.

There’s always going to be a novelty value in something like this, but once that faded and the reality of the world was realised, the world lost its sparkle. Once the intriguing part is lost, the machinations of the settings and the fact that it is such a small world anyway meant that it was probably not enticing enough to stay.

There was also a great deal of criticism from the supposedly more experienced players that the attitudes of the players themselves ruined it. Many suggested that the lack of tribal support meant that the solution was to horde PAs and de facto alliances with neighbours which did just as much to prevent any sort of early anarchy as would be seen from ‘hugging’ in other worlds. Much of the player base that went into the world looking forward to the settings was sadly disappointed and left as a consequence.

When one considers the actual point of the Tribe Lock, one has to believe that it was to eliminate one of the problems with the early game, and that is of course the formation of tribes themselves. We find a lot of problems with early tribes: a duke is tasked with a difficult position when choosing whom they wish to invite as they do not know who will survive the first months and become a strong player. They tend to err on the side of caution and mass recruit a considerable number of riff-raff who come and go from tribes very quickly. Indeed, early tribes can be messy and disorganised affairs before the core is established and the longevity of its members more greatly affirmed. I would posit that these settings were to combat this and allow the world to see who the strong players were before dukes started inviting. To an extent, this did actually succeed, but players were still burdened with messy early tribes which, with players so thinly spread, served little purpose other than being social areas .

Moreover, it also removed another spectre of the early world in that it denied a capacity for pre-made tribes. Now, whilst these tribes form a large component of those tribes successful in the earliest days of the world, it could be argued that an unfortunate disparity is created in the early world, and that the idea of prefabricating a tribe and putting it together is somewhat unfair. Perhaps the crux of this world’s inception was its adherence to ideas of fairness, or even the promotion of an egalitarian environment where each player was tested on the merits of their survival skill, rather than their connections.

Whatever the case, it did at least seem that the game was thrust to a greater degree into the hands of the players themselves. No tribes, no ‘assured’ allies, random positions; it was something of a deathmatch scenario which would determine who the fittest players were. It did build skills. It did take players’ games in new directions. It was a unique experience. It also brought together players from different sides of W27 and laid the foundations for enduring relationships as well as excuses for mercy later in the game. These goals were ostensibly accomplished, but not, it seems, without the mass exodus of a significant number of players.

Fondly do many remember their premade tribes, and such links continued after those early tribes were disbanded to become anything from a spy ring to a guarantee of mercy. Citation of the great players in one’s ‘Lock tribe’ was often a talking point or even a point of comparison among some players, as if a tenuous connection with some of the great early players would somehow endow kudos.

Certainly, many newer players missed the opportunity to ask the more experienced players for their wisdom, even if some larger players displayed a pleasing patience and helpfulness to the smaller members of the tribe. Indeed, it may even have been the wish of those who devised the world to see the experience and knowledge about the game spread around, even if such a thing was a scarcity.

This author recalls little tribal forum activity, an excess of immaturity, inactivity, and a rather dubious honour bestowed upon the duke. Although, the system did offer the opportunity to discuss the game with players whom one might not perhaps have met otherwise. The bottom line is that the entire experience was extremely variable between tribes, and some recall them fondly because they genuinely enjoyed the experience, whilst others merely remember the hilarity of the affair.

I have known quite a few players comment on the state of the early world, the proliferation of barbarian villages, and general lack of active players. Perhaps deservedly so, though, as many new players did not read the settings and it may well have put many off who were induced to quit. The lack of local tribal structure also left many players vulnerable to their neighbours and the eventual result was a stunted world, which never filled to anything like its capacity. Perhaps we should at least be grateful that barbs do not grow too much or we may never have had any wars!

The settings were probably always going to divide players, and it did indeed leave something of a dichotomy in the world. On the one hand, you have your veterans, who have fought off all comers to keep control of their little areas, bound together by de facto alliances; on the other, you have the masses of small players struggling along beside their neighbours, kept safe by excessive numbers of PAs or else mutual fear. No doubt venerable players were a little unsettled without old tribemates and being left truly on their own; a truer test of survival skill in the early period would be tough to find, and simply surviving that period was an achievement in itself.

Ideas such as support (since tribemates were too widely dispersed to be of realistic assistance) and local tribes (you were lucky to have a blue neighbour, even in a 15x15) were thrown out of the window. Success though was not all about martial prowess, and a careful player could use their diplomatic and social skills to put in place a protection of sorts, or even a means to gang up on other neighbours!

Perhaps the most interesting example of this was the infamous horsemen alliance:

[spoil]
Rough backdrop of The Horsemen of K45
A summary of an attempt to put a treatise into action

Dartship said:
Of all the time that World Twenty-Seven has existed, the most turbulent times by far were those directly preceding and following The Three Months. The end of the tribe-lock was greatly anticipated, and many shadow tribes and alliances grew up in lieu of that fact. And the most controversial of all shadow alliances was, without a doubt, the Horsemen of K45. And, until ATTACK and Shadow, no single unit of players has gained so much attention by the people of W27.

Many members of W27 do not know of the Horsemen. Dracaena, its founder, is found in few of the history books. But those of us who knew this alliance, remember the terror she aspired (and failed) to instill in all of W27. The total points of all members of the Horsemen Alliance was more than three times the points of any tribe, yet the Horsemen could not stand. Why, you may ask? Because the Horsemen’s members did not create a tribe, they created a treatise, but not one that could last. This treaty failed with the first true conflict of W27.

One of the locked tribes, Santa!, disregarded the alliance of the Horsemen. They attacked members mercilessly, yet Dracaena could put forward no successful effort to save her dying ambition. The Horsemen could not support its members, coordinate attacks. Inactivity was causing rack and ruin. Backstabbing plagued the alliance. In the end, Drac disbanded the alliance, and fell to rack and ruin. Over half of the actual alliance grew and thrived afterwards, and joined powerful tribes when the Lock was lifted.

While not a powerful tribe in its own right, this alliance caused a great stir on the W27 forums, and created controversy not seen again till the rise of ATTACK and Shadow. The pounding that Dracaena took as leader was mirrored by the pounding Shadow’s leaders took when they grew to encompass half the world. The beating that the members took from Trange and Brown Nose mirrors the fall of the enemies of ATTACK. Who can deny that this was the first major war of the world, the first to draw attention? No one who has lived through the time.

Horsemen Thread

Some of the fallout

[spoil]
Map of Horsemen Alliance: January 2

Untitled-2.jpg

Source: Public Forum

[/spoil]

Source: Dartship & Public Forum

[/spoil]

Novelty and innovation are always risky things, and it is a credit to those in charge that something different was tried. It was definitely commendable to try something outlandish at that; and as it stands, it was not perhaps something that was greeted with enthusiasm. But it was an experiment, and no one would really have predicted the outcome.

As a conclusion, I would posit that it was a brave move, and that there was scope, but that the settings were a little too outlandish to be likeable. Many offered the solution that players, whilst placed randomly, might have tribes limited only to a small number of continents, which might make the early tribes viable, and leave the possibility of wars. The period of 3 months and the idea itself was fun and I definitely think that it needs to be reconsidered which is perhaps the main thing that should come from this. Novelty attracts players, and that is something they will want to look at. Possibly the main criticism was poor advertisement and explanation of the settings, and releasing W28 alongside it at the same time; many players were attracted there instead.

I shall present a final look at some opinions on the matter, from players who came out the other side. It is compiled from W27 Weekly interviews, and from the Shadow forum:

[spoil]theSleepwalker - It was a cool idea of which I had no idea how to play with. That's probably why I was rimmed early in the game. The days leading up to 2/13/09 were some of the best times in this world, due to forum activity and rampant speculation.

ashiwwru12 - Just ok as a new experiment but not good for the world future because the tribe with good diplomacy and recruitment skill have a catwalk in this type of world.

maccano1 - A great experiment, which won't be repeated again. The idea was sound, but it just didn't realise the real aims of what it was meant to achieve. The best players rolled over the average/poor players, got bored and quit (as they didn't want to fight amongst them selves). This left a player vacum which has yet to be filled in my opinion.

Sinister Zero - At first it angered me, forced to stay in a tribe with people I didn’t respect or like but as time went on I began enjoy playing solo and gained experience from crushing everyone around me who were also forced to play solo without help from their tribes. I managed to go from playing tribal hugs to a strong offensive player as a result of the tribe lock.

olafSchlief - I think the idea behind the tribe lock was ok but it did not have the desired results. I feel they intended to get rid of premade tribes and force people to work with a new group of tribe mates. This might of had a chance if they did not start tribes with members all over the world maybe contained each tribe to one quadrant.

Deciphered - The tribe lock was an interesting concept and was theoretically strong. It allowed the more experienced players to dominate their surroundings and make respectable PAs. The days following February 13th were the most interesting and diplomatic times many players would ever have seen. Merges, NAPs, immediate declarations...you name it. However I do not think it will ever be repeated, not on .net worlds anyway. It has made a small world with a small bunch of active players, Innogame's turnover for W27 will be negligible. They are a business at the end of the day.

willettskillz - The tribe lock was odd and in my opinion very unsuccessful. Tribe lock was a good idea but never had a chance of working because in TW (as in most other online games) the best and brightest join together. Tribe lock made this an annoyance for the best and brightest, thus the mass quitting.

A positive (for me at least) was the ability to make friends in high places. I like to think that I’m an easy person to get along with so I felt no need to make enemies in the beginning. This was (as in Lord of Bones's words) "a way to gather information" later on in the game.

Carthon II - I believe tribelock was an enormous stroke of luck for me, it provided me time to learn the game. As the tribes were all spread out, it also forced players to be independent. My early tribemates were helpful in teaching me the finer points of the game and directing me to some of the terrific guides that are out there. That being said, I do believe the Tribe lock was too long and tribes should have been grouped closer together.

Samurai Kiwi - Interesting change, was a bit frustrating though.

sweeney2kaii8 - The tribe lock was a great idea, it allowed experienced player to teach new ones, though I can't see it happening again.

Silverwolf008 - For me the days of the tribe lock were excellent. I was in a tribe with two experienced players who knew what they were doing. Both of them took me under their respective "wings" and taught me rather a lot about the game. Especially the early stages of it. No one had ever extended such a courtesy to me before so I basically followed what I was told. Due to several unforeseeable factors both my teachers were nobled out and due primarily to luck I was not and still have not been on this world. This is a first for me.

It was also during this time that I first met Eph - although she was in a different, far more powerful tribe - and somehow got into her good graces and was very generously given a position in the now legendary "Shadow" which was ATTACK in those days.

Lord of Bones - For one I hate tribe hoppers (the policy of RIM in W6 was that if you join the your points stay in RIM, with or without you); I believed that the setting would create tribes where the more experienced would teach the new players and the tribes would be more active. I tried my best and ABS finished ranked 3rd at feb.13 and merged into ATTACK, so I must have done something right :p. I ‘gathered’ players and taught them to play better and helped as much as I can and today they are great (players like kfoo, dirtfish and some others).

metaldoc - I was surrounded by 2 enemy tribes I was doing really well but I couldn’t defend against 5 players. I was off to a rough start, lost all my villages in VEN and restarted in K25.

mrpickle99 - I was glad I had joined as the way I saw it, some of the best players in the world were stuck with me (Carthon II and OjibweMan both originated from *TKP*, at the time called LITE). I still thought of it as a bit dumb that we could not get rid of the players who had quit and they were just a bunch of dead weight, however if we could I would have never met two of the best friends I have had on this world.

Mande1992 - It actually was great. On the other worlds the big question was which tribe to join, a noob really has no way of knowing, or proving himself to be able to get into a good tribe. On W27 you were automatically in a tribe and some people knew how to play and shared their knowledge. I can't really remember anyone that was in the tribe but it did help to get me started to see how to learn from others, and to see how people react to each other.

Ephette - Was tribe lock fun? Yes and no. Yes it gave new challenges, kept you on your toes more so than if you were joining a regular pre made all in one area tribe. And for many of us the start of a world is the most fun, getting those buildings up, keeping a check on whose growing around you, trying to get those barbs farmed before someone else does, and seeing how many newbies around you can be convinced to restart elsewhere. My biggest gripe was that the lock was too long. Those 3 months took forever. On the other hand it eliminated a fair bit of competition. This world I think was very much an experiment for the admin staff. Something a little different to try. Would they do it again? Not to the scale this world was. The 3 months I think was generally accepted by most parties as being too long. Would I play another world with a locked tribe setting.

Oh yes :)

sparkosss - I didn’t know any better as it was my first world but looking at it now, it created a different way of developing.

tresorro - Since I was not familiar with any other settings, I did not think about it being good or bad. It just was the way things were.

winvarwen - I thought it was great. It allowed me free reign in the area without having to deal with tribal politics. Now I never even looked at the world settings so I had no idea it was even there until I started, and it took me a bit to figure out what a gift I was given.

Onyx Knight - I never cared for it. I think, in the long run, it neither helped balance the world, nor ruined it. Initially it kept a cap on things but after it was lifted tribes form the same way they do in any world.

Shaneanigans - I thought it was a great experience but my only problem is that everyone was way too far away. If they made the tribe lock with closer members it would have worked out great. If they did it this way I would give it another go.

foghorn66 - Got to admit I hated it.

SusieJean - It was an amazing idea. I loved it!

gmdobb - As for the tribe lock, it was good for me. As I was new to TW and didn't have lots of friends to form a tribe with, the lock put me on the same footing with everyone else. And with all your tribe members so far away you stood or fell alone. The thing I miss though is being able to support non-tribemates. There's nothing like stacking a barb that someone is trying to farm ;-)

CSLincoln - I could see that tribe lock would help players to form a decent alliance over distances not thought of before.

pallysrange - One of those great ideas but bad in practice things. Sure it may have taught a few players how to play better but for the most part it doomed players to one man army fighting while having a shared forum.

Zarin – I leave my own thoughts, written in the final Weekly of 2009; some bits I carried over into my history, so apologies for repeating myself:

I would hope that the entire community is familiar with the concept, so I shall pass over the explanation, but rather we must consider the event that leaves our world in the shape it did, what would have happened had it not been initiated, and therefore what if W27 were any other world.

It must first be said that the Tribe Lock was a new thing to ‘.net’. It had the same appeal as anything else new and different and immediately set this world apart. The theory of forcing a player into a randomly assigned tribe was an interesting one. The discussions on the settings of the world lie mostly forgotten, but let us consider why such a modus operandi could be successful.

One of the things that the tribe lock was designed to guard against was pre-made tribes in a two-fold scheme. Obviously those players seeking to establish themselves as a tribe immediately were not able to. Admittedly this point is somewhat moot, because an uncodified tribe could still have existed. However, the settings also dictated that tribe members could only support their own side, detracting from the ability of a de facto tribe, and there was also the small matter of random placement of players, scrambling attempts to band together.

Essentially therefore, the spectre of pre-made tribes was eliminated. It was an idea intended to make a world how it should be, as even a playing field as possible. Aside from this, one cannot see huge benefit in the Lock; it did allow some players to mix with more experienced ones whom they would not have had the chance to. It also tested leadership skills in many ways; players had to persuade 99 other complete strangers of their credentials. Not that being the leader amounted to much; it was more of a bureaucratic necessity than an imbuement of any actual authority.

What was most interesting however was the proposed liberation from the Lock 3 months down the line. Here we had an opportunity for leaders to no longer be burdened with the multitude of riff-raff that so infested early tribes, but rather to be able to select their members based upon the merits of 3 months’ growth. Essentially, the world only started for real and each player had to maintain a deposit of 3 months of play in order to actually reach the world proper. It proposed the effect of ‘starting’ the world already aware of who was good and who was not.

Overall, it paints a rather tidy picture. We have a new experiment, a world free of pre-made tribes or old friends ganging up with each other in the early game. It offered less experienced players the opportunity to mix some of the more experienced and provided a test of leadership ability. It also seemed to endow a real start to the world 3 months in, when it was clear who was staying and worthwhile in a tribe.

On the surface, with a bit of positive thought behind it, the Tribe Lock is an excellent idea. It is not difficult to see why some might join, though I think the intentions for the world and the reasons why people came are not the same. Despite its credentials, the endemic reason for joining seems to be a simple one: to give it a go. Many players simply saw these new interesting settings and decided that it would be worth a look. Well, I say that, some players neglected to even read the settings and then wondered what was going on. If you were new to TW, this could well have been quite surreal, considering what you had heard.

On the other hand, a significant number of highly experienced players joined in order to sample an experience that would be more natural, and unencumbered; a tabula rasa in which each player had to survive on their own, and where the weak would sink and the strong would swim.

It is plausible to divide those who joined into some rough groups: those who were not aware of the settings; those who were curious as to the workings of such a scheme; those who felt that it would be advantageous and indeed a good experience. Like the majority, I was mostly in the group who were here for the ride, though possibly I could see it as being beneficial. It was a nice speed too; what was the worst that could happen? I sensed that a lack of tribes and pre-made PAs would leave each player squarely on their own, turning many neighbourhoods into veritable deathmathces for supremacy, and a diplomatic and social scene that went beyond the usual people skills. You really could trust no one.

Looking at those first few days, it was clear that the world would be like no other. We had a deluge of complaint and disenchantment which induced a lot of players to quit and probably scared off a lot of the newest players to TW. Admittedly, there were some players who were finding the settings to be a refreshing change or who were at least lucky enough to have found their feet in the lottery of the start, while others were left hamstrung. It is not unreasonable to posit that the lock polarised much opinion; you either thought it was ridiculous, or you liked it. I do not feel that anyone had overly strong feelings towards it, but some were interpreting the state of affairs as unworkable and against the concepts of the game.

On the other hand, it did have the effect of thrusting a player into a Darwinian environment where independence was the only means of play, forcing players to be less reliant upon others, and requesting a consummate political and social game from them too. It is obvious at least that it forced players into new relationships and broadened the social scope for the game, even if it was not fully realised.

It was also the reason for many players leaving the world early, dissatisfied with this supposedly wonderful system, and accounts for the general lack of growth as its early expansion became inhibited after it had been so heavily criticised. From that point on, it simply did not attract the necessary amount of players, and its growth slowed considerably. The lack of local tribal structure also left many players vulnerable to their neighbours and the eventual result was a stunted world, which never filled to anything like its capacity

However, it did at least seem that the game was thrust to a greater degree into the hands of the players themselves. No tribes, no ‘assured’ allies, random positions; something of a deathmatch scenario which would determine who the fittest players were. It did build skills, it did take players’ games in new directions, and it was a unique experience. It also brought together players from different sides of W27 and laid the foundations for enduring relationships as well as excuses for mercy. These goals were ostensibly accomplished, but not it seems, without the mass exodus of a significant number of players.

Perhaps I should pause here and consider what the world would be like if Tribe Lock had been maintained. What if we had a world where the lock was permanent? Admittedly it might be a bit of a lottery, but it could certainly raise some interesting scenarios. Some changes could be made here and there, but what if we simply forced players to fight it out like that? Personal alliances would be rather less prolific than they were, and it would be a case of simply trying to work towards your allies, hoping that they are decent players. On balance, perhaps, it would be a little crazy, but interesting nonetheless.

But I digress. As the lock came to an end, the most astute leaders had their plans afoot, as if they have been allowed a glimpse 3 months into the future from the start of any other world to pick the players whom they knew to be worthwhile. This is key to understanding why the early tribes developed. ATTACK, more than anyone, was looking to pick up the best and brightest in all continents, as part of something that was almost global; the Lock allowed them to do that.

So were those 3 months well spent? Well the first question is perhaps one that I can answer for anyone else. It was certainly an interesting experience, and I think every player learned something if they stuck it out, much more so than if they had joined a local tribe in another world. It encouraged an independence that was valuable and shaped the world today. People would not be here if it had been an utterly terrible experience, so there was definitely substance.

Was it a useful experiment? Any experiment is useful, particularly one that has not been done before. The only real way to discern how this would turn out was to actually put it into practice, and the results speak for themselves. Whether it will be taken forward and similar settings proposed, I do not know.

How would it have turned out on a normal world? This is probably the most interesting question. Certainly the scope for ATTACK’s ambition was accommodated by the Lock, and such a thing is unlikely to have existed without the Lock. I think we’d probably see some of those pre-mades that were either split up or simply neglected to join having a say in things. It’s impossible to know, but interesting to flirt with.

Now if you had to ask me whether I would do a similar world, then I probably would, just for the nostalgia. However, they would probably consider changes. I think a shorter lock would be beneficial, as it still accomplishes its objectives, but helps to retain more players who were dissatisfied. The leadership selection probably needs a revision too, and players who knew what they were getting themselves in for would be nice. Grouping tribes more closely, in a small number of continents could augment the potential in the early period quite considerably, and allow some coordination, without a massive invitational neighbourhood hugfest as with most worlds, where all the local active players join together and stunt their own ambition.

I’d also love to witness a permanent lock, just to see what would happen and how players would adapt, particularly if the members were positioned closer together. Indeed, shaking up the membership every few months and reassigning tribes could also make for some added hilarity. Maybe these are more in the realm of a speed round, just for the sheer nature of the experiment.

Whatever the case, I have come to realise what the TW Team were attempting. I see a lot of positive thinking marred by an almost endemic ignorance of the settings, and a slightly misjudged execution. I definitely think that it should be tried again, and that slight revision should be made, as well as clear advertisement of what players are letting themselves in for. Accomplish all that, and there’s a lot of untapped potential left in the idea.

All in all, it was an interesting run; that cannot be denied. For better or worse, we are in the situations we are because of the lock and I think many took something from it. It may be unpopular, but it holds a unique place in our experience.[/spoil]

As the 3 month period began to come to an end, plans were already afoot by shrewd dukes and duchesses as to whom they were to invite. What better use for those first tribes than a recruiting base? Indeed, a waiting period of many weeks weeded out the weakest players and gave prospective leaders a clear view of who to invite and how they might build a tribe. Many connections were being made, and February 13 was certainly going to be an explosive day indeed.

February 13th – Eponymy and Ostraka

And what a day it proved to be, probably setting a record for the most tribe changes in a single day. Finally players were released from the yokes of their tribes and allowed free reign 3 months later than normal. Those leaders who had planned ahead put into action their schemes and brought in their potential recruits overnight. My memories of the following period of greatest change and influence to W27 are hazy, so I have compiled extracts from various forum threads to tell the story, with my commentary along the way. A massive thank you to the people who made these threads, future comers will be able to share in the W27 story because of the time you took.

Now without further ado, we look at the immense tribal upheaval on Feb.13. A congratulations should go to the reins behind the tribe Feb.13; it would have been rather fitting had you turned out the victors, but that’s the way these things happen I suppose. Below are some maps and stats; the top tribes you see here are the work of leaders who had planned this well in advance:

[spoil]Top 20 Tribes: February 13

01) ATTACK
02) PM
03) LA-G
04) Nstlk*
05) Feb.13
06) YGI?
07) LA
08) Santa!
09) K55
10) RB
11) *TKP*
12) Alone
13) EWO
14) RIM,
15) BAN
16) Dune
17) Nstlk~
18) UNMA
19) Autumn
20) Idk

Source: Public Forum

Top rankings with figures: February 13

1) ATTACK [81 members so far with 656 villages] 4.2mio
2) PM [35 members so far with 526 villages] 3.8mio
3) LA-G [55 members so far with 466 villages] 3mio
4) Nstlk* [48 members so far with 397 villages] 2.6mio
5) Feb.13 [20 members so far with 256 villages] 2mio
6) YGI? [11 members so far with 207 villages] 1.6mio
7) LA [20 members so far with 220 villages] 1.3mio

Source: Public Forum

Top 15 Players: February 19

01) albrew5 ATTACK 445.586 50 8912
02) ftw97 RB 431.777 50 8636
03) tgo0 LA-G 387.666 42 9230
04) OjibweMan ATTACK 386.843 39 9919
05) frombie ATTACK 350.077 39 8976
06) Carthon II ATTACK 326.044 41 7952
07) firatdinlerr40 Feb.13 295.956 33 8968
08) ornyto PM 293.677 33 8899
09) Floner ATTACK 279.520 32 8735
10) bojanm ATTACK 268.036 33 8122
11) Titan414 266.414 29 9187
12) weiliang89 Feb.13 263.891 29 9100
13) RobTheGreat ATTACK 262.361 32 8199
14) ChazGC ATTACK 250.682 34 7373
15) Calinor YGI? 246.945 29 8515

Source: Public Forum

[/spoil]

Thanks to maccano1 for this piece on some early evaluation of the tribes:

[spoil]
Map of Early Tribes: February 13

w27Feb13thfirstday.jpg

[spoil]1 ATTACK: Black
Lead by: Ephette & Robthegreat
Key K’s:
One of the largest tribes has managed to stick around, and has established its self as one of the largest tribes; a Feb 13th purge and subsequent recruitment have seen them firmly establish them at the top of the tribal listings. Have seemed to go with a liberal recruitment method which has players joining with all kinds of point totals from 1k to 166k.

Their problem may be the spread of their players means that they are vying for dominance of many K’s but it also means that they will be stretched everywhere and a conflict with a couple of tribes at the same time could see them crumble as they seemingly don’t have a specific core.

2 PM: Orange
Lead by: ornyto and alkalye333
Key K’s: 54/64
A tribe which has been in the public eye for quite some time due to alkalye333’s announcement of their existence a week ago, these guys have been working together on an external forum for a while now, so are likely to be more organised than most other tribes at this stage. They have a solid player base with some really good players, and unless there is a surprise I can see these guys dominating the SW easily, their only real challenge is Nstlk* who occupy k43 and k53

3 LA-G: Brown
Lead by: steve34cks and Crystalball
Key K’s: 44
Another existing tribe which has been able to survive and recruit a good set of members, these guys will have to fight for K44 initially because they have a number of other large tribes who could stop their dominance in that area, if they are able to get that K under control then they will have the pick of who they want to fight next, their expansion could go north, south, west or east. My only doubt would be them currently having players in K66 which is nowhere near their main cluster.

4 Nstlk*: Green
Lead by: ???
Key K’s: 43/53
They currently have a nice position on the rim which means that they don’t have as much worry with being surrounded, I imagine that they will quickly come into conflict with PM as they both share territory, which could be an interesting war, PM have some good members, but they will be fairly far from the front, and it would be a great test of their strength.

5 Feb.13: Turquoise
Lead by: ???
Key K’s: 45
In a similar position to LA-G, but I would say will have an easier time solidifying their position within their main K because other main tribes don’t have a significant proportion of the villages, however due to their spread they may quickly end up in a conflict with LA who are on the rim and may look to expand in their direction.

6 YGI?: White
Lead by: Shark79
Key K’s: 34/35
A small group of players based in K34 and K35, have already been working together on an informal level, while they lack numbers of the other tribes there members are mostly experienced players from the early worlds. Share a border with attack, which may see an early conflict if alliances/naps aren’t set up.

7 LA: Blue
Lead by: Deciphered
Key K’s: 46
Pretty much on the rim, they have almost complete control of the eastern part of K46 however will have to spread out to the rest of their K if they are wanting to gain true dominance, this will probably see them come into early conflict with Feb the 13th who have members in the western side of K46.

8 Santa!: Purple
Lead by: AllyDInDaHouse
Key K’s: None
A tribe which has survived Feb the 13th however looking at their player spread it will be hard for them to stay as a true contender as they have a number of small cores which are likely to get swiftly eaten up by the main K tribes in the area. However Ally is meant to be a good player, and they by far have the best tribal COA, so I hope they stick around!

9 RB: Pink
Lead by: ftw97
Key K’s: 44
A four man tribe against the world, you’ve got to respect that, I’m going to reserve judgement just at the moment because I’m sure they are either going to get a couple more members or move tribes quickly, as I don’t see 4 of them staying on their own.

10 K55: Grey
Lead by: Bob Sherly
Key K’s: 55 (who’d have guessed)
Well they get the award for least imaginative name so far, dragging their heels somewhat at 10th which I’m surprised at when you consider that it is a core K.[/spoil]

Source: Public Forum

[/spoil]

Here’s a better quality map courtesy of mattcurr (the tribe labelled Nstlk* is Feb.13):

[spoil]
Top Tribes: February 14

Untitled-1-17.jpg

Source: Public Forum

[/spoil]

It is perhaps testament to the fiery environment of that first week that some prospects were lost as quickly as they had come. PM was one such endeavour. Like other top tribes at the time, it had a large amount of very strong players who had been picked as the lock progressed and was thus armed with a strong membership. Many were expecting this tribe to punish the leaders of the time, ATTACK, with a superior membership. But as these things go, the tribe was lost within days, and one of the more interesting prospects of the time was snuffed out. Many members went to local tribes; in particular, ATTACK was furnished with quite a number of strong members who would provide a core for later conflicts and some who endure to this day.

It is also interesting to note that after ATTACK had established itself on the first day, it scarcely relinquished its position at the top of the leaderboards, something which must have been down to the immense planning of those in charge. Already we see the world forming as many will remember after that dizzy first week. In many ways, it is a good thing that the world took shape so quickly, it makes the history rather simple because the tribes formed here tended to last far longer than if we had done similar topics on a normal world. Three months to throw out the riff raff and Three months to plan proved useful.

Predictions at this point anybody? Well, a lot expected PM to do well, but they disbanded as quickly as the had come; ATTACK were dividing opinion around the issue of mass recruitment and a lack of a core area; YGI?, Nstlk*, LA-G – all were contenders. Congratulations were probably owed to the eponymous Feb.13 which was perfectly apt for the state of the world. It was one of those interesting times where things were still open; the vultures were watching to see whose plans would come to fruition and whose would be disappointed.

However, it was not just the unlock which was a key moment; my other reference in the title was to voting. With a tribe limit having not been agreed at the start of the world due to the settings (it was originally set to unlimited to accommodate so many players in only 200 tribes), it was in the hands of players to decide:

[spoil]Survey:

World 27 is coming to the point where random and forced tribes will be ending.
With that said, we will have a vote on what tribe limit the players prefer. Whichever choice has the most votes will go into affect when Tribe Lock is ended on February 13th.

40 414 33.09%

60 33 2.64%

80 12 0.96%

100 425 33.97%

150 7 0.56%

200 6 0.48%

250 6 0.48%

Unlimited 348 27.82%

Votes cast: 1251


Ensuing Discussion

Source: Internal Tribal Wars Survey

[/spoil]

It was by the smallest of margins that a limit of 100 beat 40. It’s one of those moments when one can reflect upon what might have happened had the limit only been 40. Speculations to that effect are here. As for the vote itself, it was a defining moment in W27 and set the score for the future of the world. The contemporary thoughts of influential players are thus.

As the dust settled from the first week we had the world taking shape. Those successful tribes were establishing themselves and beginning to iron out their internal machinations. It was, in so many ways, looking like a real world again. Indeed, my final act on this section is to offer some contemporary thoughts on the tribe lock, courtesy of the Weekly:

[spoil]_XsaphiraX - What do you think about the Tribe unlock?

Ephette - It came too late, this was an experimental world and hopefully they will implement the changes needed if they do decide to do this again.
eg Bring the lock down to 2 months duration.
Have a second vote for a tribe leader after perhaps another month - I think this caused most of the probs, a tribe being stuck with a tribe leader who had no interest in the tribe or this world.

stampcoin - What did i think about the tribe unlock. well... It was nice to finally get out of the old tribes that was for sure. Finally got the action in World 27 started, and finally we had Freedom!

Bob Sherly - The tribe unlock was just delaying the inevitable, even in our previous tribes that we got sorted into we could have had the same situation but we couldn't as we were spread too far apart. Other than that the tribe unlock was set for too long, even as an experiment, they should have put it as a trial at 1 month, then 2, etc.

waylander29 - the lock was silly, no good at all every1 just made alliances and had an other tribe that way.

shark79 - Tribe Unlock is an act, which benefits the cooperative players, who like the team playing. It tends to develop the social skills of people, which is one of the reasons this game exists.

ashiwwru12 - its great and their is excitement everywhere.everybody wanted to do things on their own way like previos worlds.this is the oppurtunity to learn for new players and exp players will make their own tribe and invite all the strong player to lead the tribe..

TheLastDragon - As for the tribe unlock i dont think having it locked in the first place really accomplished anything other than wasting alot of important time. The unlocking simply made it possible for the same veteran players to all leave and team up together again. Beyond that i cant honestly say its had any effect on the world at all.


Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

Let’s leave with a flourish and a very colourful map from just before the end of February, when peace was reining in W27:

[spoil]
Top Tribes: February 19

Feb19thW27worldpic.jpg

Source: Public Forum

[/spoil]

February/March – An End to Peace

We enter now the grittier times of W27, a time where peace slides into obscurity, and players who have been dormant for so long have a chance to unleash themselves. Where would TW be without a war to round things off? We look of course to the first major tribal conflict of W27, and that is between ATTACK and LA-G. We only had to wait 10 days.


[spoil]
Top Tribes: February 22

w2722febtop5copy.jpg

Source: Public Forum

[/spoil]

It was something of a disappointment in a lot of ways; the fight was awfully one sided, and the PnP was a little lacklustre. It wasn’t a war in the strictest sense of things, more of a cleansing operation at the expense of LA-G. It was a swift and crushing defeat, but before ATTACK could finish what they had started, an event occurred that forever tarnished the reputation of another tribe, and did for a moment, threaten to bring about an unexpected change to the W27 order.

I think, however, some context is necessary. We face a situation in W27 where a tribe is threatening to become too large for any single rival, but not large enough so as to merit the forces of all other tribes combined - the threat that grows but is never dealt with. This is what ATTACK was becoming at the time; it was steadily improving its membership and making its diplomatic deals, forging a strong position. When it brushed aside LA-G early on, it no doubt sent a message to other tribes about the strength of ATTACK. They were outgrowing their rivals, and something had to be done.

It was thus that Feb.13 took it upon themselves to fight ATTACK in what could well have been a war to decide the dominant force of the world. Feb.13 had of course taken in much of LA (which was led by Deciphered who shared the reins in the new tribe), significantly augmenting its strength. Although ATTACK was larger, it was already fighting a war and there were rumours at the time that YGI? would be lending a hand against ATTACK too.


It aroused great controversy at the time. On the one hand, it was seen as a necessary move to counter the behemoth of ATTACK, while others claimed it was a dishonourable move in the way that Feb.13 surprised ATTACK. This reputation, with ATTACK having emerged as the victors, seems to have stuck. Despite early gains due to the surprise element from Feb.13, things evened out and then turned against them. With LA-G left largely alone for the moment, ATTACK focused on this war and the superior numbers began to tell. With no help forthcoming from other tribes, Feb.13’s gambit backfired and they were outnumbered. Even so, it was a slow war above all, and dragged on for over a month without massive gains.

Let’s have a brief look at the rankings and some thoughts from players at the time:

[spoil]
maccano1 said:
1) ATTACK - Still by far the top dog, with some experienced players have begun to turn their attentions towards Feb.13 and are now giving a good account of themselves, if they are able to keep it up they may be able to dominated the eastern side of the world with less than 100 players

2) Feb.13 - Their players took the early stats as a good sign, but clearing your K will always give this type of gain; until you come up against a solid front and have to fight trench war fare you can never see how good a tribe is. They have yet to pass this test in my mind.

3) YGI? - As of yet not thrown their lot in with either Feb or Attack, and have yet to declare a public war. And remain somewhat of an elusive enigma of W27 for those who don't keep abreast of the forum sound bites that are released and check twstats.

4) Nstlk* - Nicely destroyed a weaker tribe. They are in a nice position to fight any number of tribes, so will likely be a tribe to keep a watch on.

5) LA-G - It’s always sad to see a tribe fall from grace, and LA-G have done this spectacularly. Players are getting picked off left right and centre, someone should do them a favour and press the disband button.

6) ~AOW~ - Have gained a good K dominance, but really only have two avenues of expansion K53 which may see them fight Nstlk*or K74 and fight J1g$@w (and maybe attack eventually). My bet would be K74.

7) RB - It'd be harsh to call them a one horse tribe, but have a lack of high pointed players. I can't say I know the skill levels of their players, but if I were looking at RB as a tribe to war I'd certainly see them as good opportunity. I may be completely wrong and they may be all good and active, but I would say that the top 10 are probably carrying the rest. As for their war, their stats aren't as impressive as I'd have hoped, other tribes have got more caps against BAN whilst not being at 'war'.

8) T-GR - Still haven't cemented their own K, I imagine that any good players will be picked up by the winner of ATTACK and FEB13 and the rest shall be duly rimmed.

9) J1g$@w - Deserve a mention for breaking into the top 10. I actually think these players are in a great position. Attack won't fight them because they are pre-occupied, leaving them to take on other rim tribes. If they take out the small RIM cluster they could fight either ~AOW~ or T-GR. If I was their leader I'd hit T-GR hard and try to take their territory which would give them at least a building block.

10) BAN - A failed experiment by a caring farther figure, who just wanted to give the 'little ones' a fighting chance; or just the token mass recruiting tribe which is made on every world which fails. I'll leave it up to you to decide.......
Ok I'm lying these guys suck really really really badly!

Source: Public Forum

stampcoin said:
1). ATTACK: I think ATTACK so far has done well. They've managed to keep strong while fighting two of the larger tribes, as well as have K dominance in a lot of continents. Don't see them going down any time soon

2). Feb.13: Feb.13 have a strong center, their only problem is being surrounded. If they can survive ATTACK, then they could have a nice future ahead of them.

3). YGI?: YGI? have a nice strong control over the Northern part of the war. Their small member count also means that they can most likely get alot done without having to many mix-ups, as well as a lot closer of a group. Will be watching them.

4). Nstlk* : Nstlk* seem to have a strong hold on the north-western side of the World. As long as they don't get in to many fights at a time they could last for a long time.

5). ~AOW~: Won't be saying anything

6). LA-G LA-G had what looked to be a possibly good beginning but then things just went down-hill. Their mass-recruitment didn't help, as well as bad leadership. Since ATTACK started their offensive things have just gone further downhill for them. Just waiting for them to disband

7). RB Squashed in the middle of Nstlk* FEb.13 YGI? and ATTACK. Unless they can get an alliance with at least one of those tribes, i doubt they'll be able to go far, as there's no where to go

8). T-GR Had a dimmer future before, but now that Tgo0 joined them too, looks like they've got a good hold of the SouthEast. Almost a direct copy of ~AOW~ if you look on the self updating maps.

9). J1g$@w Have a nice spot on the very far south border, where there only possible threat is ~AOW~ or T-GR, so long as ATTACK keeps busy with Feb.13 and LA-G. Could spend some time growing down there

10). K55: I am surprised they've lasted this long right there in the middle of Feb.13 and ATTACK. Either they've got an alliance or NAP with one of them or else there just plain lucky.

Source: Public Forum

Lord of Bones said:
1). ATTACK: My tribe so I will stay quiet about predictions but I still want to congratulate Ephette for the wonderful leadership that makes us all proud of the tribe.

2). Feb.13: Strong tribe, good players, great cluster and a potent foe. Their only downfall would be their leadership...

3). YGI?: For now they are "sitting pretty", but they are an interesting tribe that controls the north; they have great potential if they will play their cards well.

4). Nstlk* : I think that a conflict with ~AOW~ is inevitable at the end of the day, as they share the area. But they have a good area dominance, so I believe that they will last for a while.

5). ~AOW~: Impressed me thus far; I can just hope that they will keep it up and will keep working as a tribe. They can climb the ladder slowly.

6). LA-G: Fail...

7). RB: No room to expand so I don’t see a long term future for this tribe.

8). T-GR: Good area dominance, they just have to prove themselves.

9). J1g$@w - I don’t see a bright future for them either; if the world won’t expand soon they are kinda trapped. They will be squashed by ~AOW~ if they try to expand west or north; south there is a void and to the east is ATTACK...

10). K55: Will slowly dissolve into other tribes; in K55 they are the 3rd tribe (kind of sad for a continent tribe).

Source: Public Forum

[/spoil]

Here’s a map midway into the war:

[spoil]
Top Tribes: March 11

w2711marcopy.jpg

Source: Public Forum

[/spoil]

After just over a month, Feb 13 disbanded and was followed by the amnesty mail forum post made by albrew5. With Feb.13 brushed aside, we have an interesting world forming, with a dominant tribe threatening to remain so, whilst their rivals neglect this seemingly obvious fact. The remnants of Feb.13 split into several smaller tribes, mainly C46 and 4Fun, each with varying intentions against ATTACK. Other members joined ATTACK or else chose to remain tribeless for the moment. Many of these remnants continued for quite some time before going to war again down the road. Most importantly, the spectre of a unified Feb.13 was gone. As ATTACK celebrated its victory over Feb.13, its next closest rivals – Nstlk* and YGI? – went to war with each other.


A map just before Feb.13 was disbanded:

[spoil]
Top Tribes: March 25

w27to1025mar2.jpg

Source: Public Forum

[/spoil]

Despite the mouth-watering prospect of these two tribes at war, this proved to be a most disappointing affair. Whilst many were keen to see YGI? tested out, they were yet another hot prospect destined to come to nothing. Following a war lasting less than a fortnight, the YGI? leadership fell apart and the remaining tribe merged with Nstlk*.

Elsewhere in the world, two smaller tribes were engaged in a war of their own – RB and BAN as well as BAN’s motley crew of allies. RB took the lead in that one, mostly down to them having ftw97 who was the largest player on the server at the time:

[spoil]

RB vs. BAN, BAN-A, LA-G, *TKP*, VSB: February 26 - March 5

Side 1: 19
Side 2: 1
Difference: 18

chart

Source: Public Forum

[/spoil]

One or two other smaller wars surfaced: ~AOW~ defeated –W- and Nstlk* defeated ~APE~ in what were only ever going to be formalities.

[spoil]

~AOW~ vs. -W-: March 6 - March 8

Side 1: 17
Side 2: 0
Difference: 17

chart

Source: Public Forum

Nstlk* vs. ~APE~: February 27 - March 6

Side 1: 21
Side 2: 2
Difference: 19

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

As they did so, a monumental period came to an end. Feb.13 and LA-G were gone as major forces while ATTACK and Nstlk* began to square off against each other. The world had tasted its first wars, and with the dust having scarcely settled from the rapid formation of tribes, so too had some engaged in wars. The events of the intense early period are neatly summarised in a timeline.

Out in front, ATTACK now crucially had a better quality of members, and had gone some way to building a solid reputation. It had been battled tested in places, even if there had been little blood. However, whilst it was out in front, its poor positioning in places meant that Feb.13 remnants could still be a threat, and it lacked the unified position of its opponents. War on several fronts would surely weaken it, and there seemed to be no shortage of usurpers waiting in the wings. Consolidating their position was the name of the game, and shrewd diplomacy seemed more likely than continued warfare to put them firmly on top.

Following it in the rankings was Nstlk*, now on a more even footing with new members from YGI?. Little had been seen of them in combat, but they had enough strong and experienced members to be a cause for concern themselves. In many ways, their position was safer than that of ATTACK, since their only major threat was in ATTACK itself, whilst ATTACK had everyone to consider. With the numbers against them, and expansion a difficult affair (since attacking anyone except ATTACK left them wide open, but engaging ATTACK was a risky move indeed), careful planning would be needed to see out this period intact.

After them, other tribes lurked in T-GR and ~AOW~. Both of these were large enough to significantly tip the scales in conflicts of the above tribes in either direction, and this made them priorities for Nstlk* and ATTACK who would be rushing to court them for support. Alone, they were no match for their superiors, but an intelligent merge or simply waiting out the inevitable clash of the titans could serve them well. Ironically enough, a war with each other seemed the most likely outcome.

For a short time, peace descended on the larger tribes; but the stage was set for the greatest war yet to come.
 
Last edited by a moderator:

DeletedUser

Guest
April – Stalking the Shadows

[spoil]
Top Tribes: April 4

04apw271copy.jpg

Source: Public Forum

[/spoil]

It is quite a picture, the world at this time. We have our two major players, ATTACK and Nstlk*, growing tense in an uneasy peace. While ATTACK is eager to move on the Feb.13 remnants, it knows that to do so would be to invite the enmity of Nstlk*, and thus for the second time, an enemy escapes annihilation. On the other side, Nstlk* are thinking of how to win the war against ATTACK, should it come, and looking to the two undecided elements who could tip the balance. I talk, of course, about ~AOW~ and T-GR.

As it stands, ATTACK, as powerful as it is, cannot hope to take on the entire world. Just as it isolated Feb.13, so too does it need to be sure of a solo conflict without usurpers. Recently invigorated with members of RB, it has lost its buffer zone in K44 and shares a long and tense border with Nstlk*. ~AOW~, and to a lesser extent T-GR, have it within their power to tip the balance either way; the triple alliance of Nstlk*, ATTACK and ~AOW~ which was been wrought in the early peace of the world is beginning to become tense.

All it took was one spark, and it was quite something when it came. The largest war yet in W27 history was about to unfold.


So it was that Nstlk* and ATTACK went to war. Again the excuses came from ATTACK about dishonourable conduct, but the element of surprise certainly gave Nstlk* the early edge. Indeed, it was looking propitious for Nstlk* in those early days, and ATTACK were punished for a lack of forward planning. Yet even then, the war was hanging in the balance, and both tribes held their breath as they looked to see what the other tribes would do.

[spoil]sweeney2kaii8 - Why did Nstlk* declare on ATTACK?

olafSchlief - At the time of Nstlk* declaration on ATTACK? they were the biggest tribe in the world and the gap was expanding, So when they dropped our alliance we felt we had no choice but to declare before they declared on us. Now Nstlk* had plenty of opportunities earlier on in the world before we even had an alliance with ATTACK to join the other tribes and go to war with ATTACK. When feb13 declared their were talks asking for Nstlk* to join them and YGI in a war on ATTACK we declined as the nightstalker council did not believe in gang bangs and thats what it would have been at the time.

Source: sweeney2kaii8 interview with OlafSchlief

Zarin - How were things going diplomatically with Nstlk*?

Ephette - There were a lot of discussions behind the scenes going on between ourselves, Nstlk* and ~AOW~. The big question mark was hanging over AOW; if things turned sour which side would they join? Ourselves and Nstlk* had an East/ West split with ~AOW~ to our South. To be perfectly honest, I don't remember all the reasons why things started to go wrong between the tribes – a lot of discussion was taking place on skype, but as I no longer have these people on my contacts lists I can't bring up the conversations.

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

~AOW~ was the first to declare its allegiance on the side of ATTACK, honouring that alliance. Although perhaps a less experienced tribe, the numbers were now significantly against Nstlk*, and with their advantages surrendered, they would face a tough war. Positioned south of Nstlk*, the addition of ~AOW~ lengthened the front significantly in an area where Nstlk* were making early gains. It brought large players from both sides right onto the frontline, and the fighting now would be more frenzied than ever.


[spoil]sweeney2kaii8 - What did you think of ~AOW~ and ATTACK's merge?

olafSchlief - ~AOW~ merge with ATTACK is what killed the last chance of w27 being an enjoyable world to play on for most players. when one tribe is that much bigger than all the rest with the settings on that world its not a contest of skill anymore just a matter of time.

A lot of players I have talked to agreed with this point even quite a few of ATTACK own players.


Source: sweeney2kaii8 interview with OlafSchlief

Zarin - How confident were you that ~AOW~ could be relied upon?

Ephette - As to which side they would join: I had some inside info about someone in ~AOW~ who was related to someone in this tribe. Due to their influential positions in both tribes, there wasn't really all that much of a choice. I did find out about this info quite late in the whole alliance business, or I'm sure things would have happened a lot more quickly. I was actually eyeing up AOW as a target before this information came to light :)

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

This left T-GR, who had in fact been squaring off against ~AOW~ in the past. Following persuasion from Nstlk*, some members of T-GR joined them against ~AOW~ and ATTACK. We had then, our two sides, and a war to decide the dominant tribes in the world.

[spoil]
Top Tribes: April 25

w2725thapril.png

-ATTACK + ~AOW~
-Nstlk*
-Rest of the World


Source: Public Forum

[/spoil]

As we neared the end of April, the war was blossoming into full swing. With the two sides clearly defined, and with support readied to the frontlines, the conflict once again slowed. Members of T-GR were brought into Nstlk*, but their isolated position meant that they were more of a hindrance to the stats on their side, even if they defended admirably, and even moved to other areas so that they could continue to fight. Indeed, ATTACK's early plans centered on the removal of these players as well as other isolated pockets before moving on the main portion of Nstlk* territory.

It seems to be the case that ATTACK got the better choice out of ~AOW~ and T-GR, since much of T-GR seemed reluctant to participate, and their largest member, one of the highest ranked players, did not help. With the impetus of ~AOW~ for ATTACK, the conquers had been more or less evened, and the lack of reliable war stats from the time makes further commentary difficult. Most seem to recall a largely static front, with slow and sporadic conquers on the isolated players of each side.

As we were lapsing into May, we witnessed what would be the most momentous event in W27 yet as ~AOW~ and ATTACK agreed to reinforce their alliance and merge to form Shadow (the name change actually occurred part way into May, but I shall call it Shadow from now on). The following is my announcement at the time:

[spoil]
Zarin said:
I seem merely to offer news on this board and now is no different.

I shall keep things a little briefer than my last foray and tell you only this: ~AOW~ and ATTACK are merging into one new elite tribe.

I am sure that you will realise that when such remarkable cohesion is found between two tribes, there seems little point in remaining two distinct entities; indeed such an epitome of mutual benefit is only logical and serves only to strengthen our bond.

The tribe's name is still being discussed and voted upon, suffice to say it was simpler to use an existing tribe as a starting point.

To all of our belligerents, I am sure that you will realise the futility of your resistance and I offer only my condolences.

Your harbinger of doom,
Zarin

Source: Public Forum

[/spoil]

Shadow against the world was fast becoming the thought on everyone’s mind as Nstlk* began to relent, and the omnipresent spectre of inactivity and RL began to claw at them. An end was not in sight, but Shadow was beginning to seek an advantage, and with T-GR remnants mopped up in the South, it was just the North-West to be decided.

I’ll offer a selection of statistics and miscellaneous maps for April. Some of these sources are worth perusing for additional sets of war statistics and for judging the feeling of the world at the time:

[spoil]

~AOW~, ATTACK vs. Dstlk, Nstlk*: April 15 - April 22

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 100
Side 2: 63
Difference: 37

chart

Source: Public Forum

ATTACK vs. Dstlk, Nstlk*: April 13 - April 30

Side 1: 157
Side 2: 148
Difference: 9

chart

Source: Public Forum

[/spoil]

[spoil]
Conquers Map: April 13 - April 17

map17apw27conq.jpg

Source: Public Forum

Conquers map: April 3 - May 3

ShadowvStalkers1month.png

Source: Public Forum

Top Tribes: April 25

w2725thapril2.png

-ATTACK + ~AOW~
-Nstlk*
-C46
-TK
-LA-G (North, Central and South East)
-4Fun
-T-GR
-K25PG
-Sorry! (North East)


Source: Public Forum

[/spoil]

Despite any early gains on the part of Nstlk*, as the end of April approached, the war was beginning to slide against them. Many note the inclusion of ~AOW~ into the ranks of Shadow as a move that ended the world there and then. Certainly Nstlk* were feeling the pressure of a much greater numerical disparity. For them, their new allies had failed.

On the other hand, let us not forget the other tribes that were lying in wait. Whilst Shadow may have had a solid position at the top of the rankings, it had old enemies that could not be trusted to remain peaceful, just waiting to strike. Their inability to remove these tribes presented an unwelcome thorn to Shadow, even if one or two of C46 found their way into the tribe.

Other enigmatic tribes had risen to prominence and Shadow’s tendrils now extended far and wide in the world - far and wide enough to contact opportunistic tribes. The war needed to be won quickly lest the world recognise the danger and act.

[spoil]Top 20: April 28

Top 20 Tribes
01 ATTACK (post merge, but name not yet changed)
02 Nstlk*
03 C46
04 TK
05 LA-G
06 4Fun
07 T-GR
08 K25PG
09 -AA-
10 *TKP*
11 SORRY!
12 Dstlk
13 ~AOW~ (the inactive remnants of the tribe after the merge)
14 ~TSS~
15 ~VEN~
16. Feb.13
17 *Epic
18 BOA
19 TLF
20 TKRT

Maccano1 said:
1. ATTACK - A solid tribe that has just got a lot better thanks to the players of AOW, some very talented players Mande, Ftw, Floner...etc. Success in the Nstlk* war will effectively win this world for them.

2. Nstlk* - The pretenders to the throne? Fighting against the odds against a tribe twice their size, have some talented players, but will probably need help to defeat ATTACK in the purest sense, although if activity can be held at a high level are in a position to grind out a stale mate.

3. C46 - If I'm correct these players formed the bulk of Feb13. So a solid core of players, although low in number. My question is why aren’t they still actively fighting ATTACK (as Attack said they'd hunt down the Feb 13 players)? Players such as Grim and Filp are a fixture in the world’s top 20 and their tribe could go on to play a pivotal role in the ATTACK/Nstlk* war by choosing one of the sides.

4. TK - Eastern Rim tribe, I can't say I know much about them, so its hard to comment. They do lack any real recognisable names. However have a good number of players in the 150-300 bracket, which may grow at a quick rate to make them a challenger.

5. LA-G - Are still around somehow; I'm not sure how exactly but have defied the odds to be around and kicking. Have made a home of the Border of 34/24 (I assume recruiting some RIM players?) Still have players scattered around though. They are riddled with inactive players, and not a force in the world that they really should be for a 5th ranked tribe.

6. 4Fun - The rest of the players from Feb13 if I'm not mistaken. Same comments really apply to them as C46 although on a lesser scale. They could prove to be a thorn in the side of either ATTACK or Nstlk* if they choose to enter the war. Is there any bad blood between them and C46? As I would imagine a merge between these two tribes would put them as a really strong third tribe which could stand on their own (although would be lacking in numbers - but I think everyone knows that’s my preference).

7. T-GR - A tribe I thought would do better than it is. However their position isn't really conducive to growth. Bar declaring on ATTACK or -AA- I can't see a ready expansion route. I expect them to fight a small tribe or merge into some one.

8. K25PG - North/North West rim tribe, lacking any real quality other than Synister Zero, have a couple of inactives in their top 20 which also doesn't help them. Maybe a merge with another rim tribe's better players would prove more fruitful, and allow them to progress.

9. -AA- - Small tribe which, although lacks stand out names, nonetheless has a solid top 10-15. However, it is plagued by inactives down their lower order so would suffer heavily if war came to them.

10. *TKP* - As same with –AA-; they have a very solid and stable top half, however have a good number of inactives in the lower end of the scale. The home of one of W27's more notorious lovers of cuddly avatars is probably their biggest claim to fame.

11. SORRY! - Although a small tribe, they seem to be doing well with keeping everyone active (although have recently lost a few players if I'm right). If they can keep the activity going in the lower orders, they may become a respectable tribe.

12. Dstlk - As people may or may not know, I'm a bit of a closet Free-eekist, and personally hate the idea of having an academy on this world. Although they have some good players (and most notably one of World 9's most famous spammers), they have too many players that are just there because they know someone.

13. ~AOW~ - The abandoned few. Have a couple of seemingly good players, however I assume that they aren't willing to take part in tribal activities if they have been left behind. Some tribe may try and merge them for points.

14. ~TSS~ - I don't know about them so will not comment (although I don't like ~ in names either (purely as I always forget about them when trying to search for tribes)).

15. ~VEN~ - I don't know about them so will not comment.

16. Feb.13 - Top 4 players may be of use to someone, but as a whole, a spent entity.

17. *Epic - I don't know about them so will not comment.
18. BOA - I don't know about them so will not comment.
19. TLF - I don't know about them so will not comment.
20. TKRT - I don't know about them so will not comment.

Source: Public Forum

Top 20 Players
01 ftw97 (ATTACK)
02 tgo0 (T-GR)
03 Carthon II (ATTACK)
04 frombie (ATTACK)
05 bojanm (ATTACK)
06 tresorro (Nstlk*)
07 ChazGC (ATTACK)
08 Mande1992 (ATTACK)
09 micko80 (ATTACK)
10 gerick6 (ATTACK)
11 Sparkosss (Nstlk*)
12 kfoo (ATTACK)
13 Grimlock- (C46)
14 puccagb06 (4Fun)
15 olafSchlief (Nstlk*)
16 4Knife RO (Nstlk*)
17 mikestuntz (ATTACK)
18 theSleepwalker (Nstlk*)
19 filphillip (C46)
20 maccano1 (Nstlk*)

Grimlock- said:
1 ftw97 - early on nobeled everything while the other tribes were at war. Doing good imo i wonder what his attacks are like.

2 tgo0 - keeping quiet and building up his cluster love to see what this player can do

3 Carthon II - Likes to nobel in different Ks opens his nobeling options doing well

4 frombie- I believe its his first world doing very good still needs to learn a bit more

5 bojanm - talked to him a few times good bloke but going inactive

6 tresorro - this guy is everywhere likes to get involved in wars i assume as i can see a few of his villages in former YGI area as well as few villages near attack

7 ChazGC - albrew was in his area might of affected his growth lets see what he can do now

8 Mande1992 - out of the blue comes to 1st ODA congrats btw. Making a nice cluster in k53 near nstlk :eek:

9 micko80 - like chazGC now that albrew left see what he can do.

10 gerick6 - frontline with Nstlk holding out well

11 Sparkosss - spread out might be coz of the early mass recruitment or simply looking for better villages :D. Doing well so far

12 kfoo - grew fast but where to now?

13 Grimlock- inactive, lazy pointwhore i trully am havent done much except nobel barbs

14 puccagb06 - was thinking of quitting but doing well he still has around 400K to nobel before he runs out of villages

15 olafSchlief - I believe he is an experienced player who knows Tw strategy

16 4Knife RO - dont know what to say sorry :S

17 mikestuntz - dont know what to say sorry :S

18 theSleepwalker - dont know what to say sorry :S

19 filphillip - think its his first world fast learner and loves to war :D

20 maccano1 - former YGI i am sure he knows how to play this game well and will rise in rankings if he doesnt go inactive :s

Deciphered said:
1 ftw97 - Strong player. Deserves to be #1
2 tgo0 - Has kept relatively quiet but plugged away to keep @ #2.
3 Carthon II - Good player. Recently broke 1 million.
4 frombie - Too talented at this game...
5 bojanm - Right in the core of Shadow. Has done well to expand like he has
6 tresorro - Limited contact but from what I can tell a strong offensive player. Could potentially be higher if it wasn't for her tribe...
7 ChazGC - Very strong player and a solid central position.
8 Mande1992 - Joined world late but has 2nd highest nobling speed. Should be much higher.
9 micko80 - Good player. Bit freaked out by his COA...
10 gerick6 - Has a nice position to push back Nstlk*. Keep it up
11 kfoo - Don't know how he manages to expand himself with the help he gives to others. Great guy.
12 Sparkosss - Is everywhere...
13 Grimlock- Makes a good team with LordKhal
14 puccagb06 - Haven't talked to since old feb.13
15 olafSchlief - Limited contact
16 4Knife RO - Limited contact
17 mikestuntz - Good guy. Honest and reliable member of Shadow.
18 theSleepwalker - Good position to pwn the rim. But where's the fun?
19 johnsince07 - Dedicated tribe member. Good guy.
20 Deciphered - Will soon be #21...

Source: Public Forum

[/spoil]

By now, the map was taking on a recognisable shape, with some new tribes carving a name for themselves. As Feb.13 remnants went their separate ways (some joining ATTACK/Shadow, others to Nstlk*), and with LA-G fading, the size of those tribes diminished. New tribes were coming to the fore. In the East, we had TK, and in the South, -AA-. But most interestingly, in the North East, two tribes had been growing while keeping out of affairs – SORRY! and K25PG. It was these two who would draw some attention to themselves at that time and give some other news than just Shadow/Nstlk*. It may not have been the most ambitious war, but it was a reminder that other tribes did exist and were not to be underestimated completely.


So we have a world forming, predictions at the time were many and varied. On the one hand we have Shadow and Nstlk* battling for the top spot, but a victory there is not clear cut and certainly would not yet seem to define the world; whilst Shadow may have taken a lead in the stats, Nstlk* still showed strong resolve, and its focus on the war front early on could yet prove useful. Neither of the two sides can yet resist the combined force of all other tribes, and as Shadow has edged in front on points, it makes them more susceptible as a target.

Let’s bring in some stats, charting almost a month of ATTACK/Shadow vs. Nstlk*:

[spoil]

Shadow vs. Nstlk*: April 13 - May 9

Side 1: 200
Side 2: 186
Difference: 14

chart

Source: Public Forum

[/spoil]

May – The Two Powers

We enter perhaps the most influential period in Shadow’s rise to dominance. The stage is set for a gruelling war between two superpowers, while vultures wait on the sidelines threatening to plunge the entire world into a bitter war. At the moment, it really is too close to call.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. Nstlk*: May 2 - May 9

Side 1: 36
Side 2: 38
Difference: 2

chart


Shadow vs. Nstlk*: May 8 - May 9

Side 1: 10
Side 2: 4
Difference: 6

chart

Source: Public Forum

[/spoil]

While Shadow may be evening the balance and perhaps seeming to pull ahead, the margins are slim; we have nothing that might be designated as a decisive victory. Certainly, both sides are still fighting hard and the casualty count is disappointingly low. Big wars tend to be lost on how well each side defends when the other attacks; if players start to crumble, then morale can tumble and disenchantment becomes rife. Conversely, strong defence can frustrate and annoy, even to the extent that attackers will simply give up! Neither side was willing to break.

The stats would even vary from day to day. At times, Nstlk* offensives would threaten to throw the entire future of the war into doubt. Victory moved constantly on swift wings between the two tribes. To the West and in central regions, the front was mostly static. Nstlk* early gains had dried up and the fighting was slow and relentless. In the North, the weakness of Shadow's cluster was been revealed by strong Nstlk* offensives. In the South-East, their T-GR allies were the appetiser of choice for Shadow. Both sides were working at their enemy's weak points, neither willing to commit wholly to the front.

Yet, in a month’s time, we shall see Shadow take a lead which it never relinquished. Let’s look again at the situation. Beneath the façade of an even war, Nstlk* was struggling. Despite an early impetus, its advances had slowed, and having cleared up the easy targets, it seemed less well prepared for the protracted war which it now faced. Admittedly, it was still outnobling Shadow in the key frontline areas, but Shadow was closing the gap. It had taken its time to redirect its troops away from Feb.13, particularly given the speed of the Stalkers' early advance. Now that Shadow was better defended, the fight would be much more even.

While Shadow's spirits were boosted by the slow turn of the statistics, morale was lower in the Nstlk* camp than it outwardly seemed, and their leaders were under a lot of stress to deliver in this war. The T-GR recruits had proved far less valuable than ~AOW~, and the other tribes of the world were largely keeping to their own affairs.

Let us pause for some maps courtesy of stampcoin:

[spoil]
Top Tribes: May 11

StampcoinTopTribes.jpg


Top Players: May 11

StampcoinTopPlayers.jpg

Source: Public Forum

[/spoil]

These weeks were some of the defining moments in the history of Shadow. Never again would it face off against such a comparatively large and experienced tribe. Both tribes were struggling to find a way through. Nstlk* was winning the war on the frontline, but Shadow was nobling more villages overall. Something had to give.

The middle of May was characterised by an uninspiring fight. The spectators on the forum who had gathered to see a ferocious contest faded away as each side dug in for a war of attrition. W27 was never a world to be deluged with lightning offensives, but rather patient wars of attrition as both waited for the other to make a mistake, and then pounce upon them. So it was that Shadow and Nstlk* began a careful positional game of strike and riposte. It was not so much a war as a battle of wills between each leader as to who would break first.

As it turned out, it would not be Shadow's master plan, or even the adroitness of its members that punished Nstlk*, but rather a sequence of events away from the frontlines would shake Nstlk* to its core. The slow warfare, the demise of hope for any sustained advantage, the mesmerising monotony of conquer and counter-conquer - all would contribute to its downfall. But few wars are won on the relentless grind of conquers; many require those decisive blows, capitalising on a mistake, that dismember an opponent. So it was that for all Shadow's offensives, Nstlk* would be broken by its own internal strife.

It is not difficult to understand why the larger players of Nstlk* could no longer continue to work; we cannot often predict the requirements of war, and although I cannot speak for the exact circumstances of the loss of these players, we do know that they came at this time and were a blow from which Nstlk* never recovered. As May lapsed into its final days, olafSchlief and sparkosss both drifted away, leaving a worrying hole in the Western front (K53), followed rather soon afterwards (in June) by tresorro and 4knifeRO (who was banned early in the month), while theSleepwalker departed to form his own tribe.

Even as the first players succumbed to their own troubles, perhaps wrapped by the inescapable tendrils of real life, or else merely bestowed with the insight that more productive things had to be done, Shadow was able to capitalise. With an audible sigh of relief, it watched as the titans of Nstlk* came crashing down. Never again would such greatness take ranks against Shadow.

For all the inaction and uninspiring posturing, May is an interesting one. Much of the forum posting at the time descended into the gritty mud-slinging that warfare lauds, and with Shadow beginning to perhaps pull away in the later weeks of May, many were expressing a concern that the world was either stagnant or would become so, and that a lack of good players and growth had forced the world into this state.

Indeed, one or two outspoken members were of the opinion that Shadow had indulged a mass recruitment strategy, and that the merge with ~AOW~ had ended the world purely through the excessive disparity in numbers. Perhaps more striking was the accusation that the world had no good players, that the players at the time that had risen to the top were merely filling the void of the true greats who had left. That is, that the great players of the world were only relatively stronger than others in the world, but not worthy of any particular praise in their own right, that they were unfit for other worlds.

In many ways, it was a fair assessment. W27 is and was unique; the players and tribes are a product of that. Those who sought to disparage Shadow judged it by the standards of other worlds, and the hypothetical question of Shadow’s success on an ostensible ‘real’ world was bandied around. Whilst such questions are ultimately inconsequential, they are interesting nonetheless.

The key to the world's state is undoubtedly the growth of the world through the early months. Not only did that growth stagnate, but much of the experienced membership did not get the chance it hoped for and consequently left. The corollary of these events was that the alleged best players of the world, who rose to prominence afterwards, could be accused of being second-rate. The world had seen some household names in its time, but they had been brought by the novelty of the world and had all melted away.

Likewise the entire model of Shadow at the time was a product mostly of the settings, of the state of the world. It was because of the way that the world was set up that such recruitment happened, and it was because of the size of the world that they were free to stretch out the membership. The point is that Shadow could not be compared to other tribes on other worlds, nor could the conflicts and politics of the tribes, because the world was so fundamentally different.

Shadow and other tribes like it are best likened to pre-mades in another world. They have brought together a group of players they know to be strong and experienced and are using this advantage to usurp local rivals. The older tribes on W27 are simply the equivalents of massive prefabricated affairs on other worlds. Unlike those worlds however, these tribes are not fraught with activity difficulties and leadership struggles - the players all intended to stay for the length of the world.

Usually, a pre-made tribe will struggle to maintain the activity of players who have joined after playing one or more other worlds because those players get bored of a general monotony in the game. Having played before (often for long periods of time), a new world can feel like biting off a lot more than is able to be chewed. Also, whilst the tribe may look good on paper, it may struggle with different settings/style of world.

Smaller pre-made tribes can really struggle to get off of the ground if they do not seed their membership with players they meet in the world. Unfortunately, they eschew recruitment early in the game, and the best players have already gone to other tribes. Eventually the experienced membership of the start forms only a small core to a tribe that is outstripped by larger, more fortunate neighbours who have been luckier/shrewder with their recruitment choices.

The tribes on W27 are mostly the best points of a pre-made because most of the players in the tribe from the start have already proven themselves by going three months on the world as a guarantee of their activity. The biggest tribes at the beginning can snap these players up and this can lead to a massive disparity in the world. The remaining tribes have to either gamble on newer, unproven players, or snap up smaller ones. The world is very unequal.

The merge with ~AOW~ served to compound this problem. When you merge two strong tribes together, the pool of experienced and active players for the rest of the world vastly decreases, whilst the strength of the merged tribe is simultaneously increased. While Nstlk* and YGI? merged to keep abreast of the expansion of their rivals, a merge between a rank one and rank three tribe often spells disaster for the rest of the world.

Shadow's membership was characterised by a massive strength in depth. Other tribes could not physically compete with such a breadth to its membership. The first wars decided which tribe would keep their experienced core of players, and this effectively sealed the fate of the world from the beginning. If Nstlk* and Feb.13 could not defeat Shadow, the rest of the world had little else to offer. This was the fear that led many to declare the merge to create Shadow as the winning move of the game.

As for the players themselves, it is a more interesting question. On the one hand you could say that the best players here lacked the experience of those on other worlds. You could say that W27 had a weaker average player and that it lacked the competition of other worlds, that it was more of a numbers game filled with players sending attacks like monkeys with typewriters.

However, on the other hand, I would posit that this lack of experience simply bred a lack of experience. Without the experienced bedrock of veterans, without the real protagonists among the dramatis personae, no one could learn and no one needed to. At no point thus far was anyone making a true name for themselves. Whilst there were flashes and some players were commended highly, it was never necessarily the case that everyone stepped back in awe. In that way though, the world still settled into a relative hierarchy of player experience that looked like any other world. In other worlds, whether W27 had a weaker average player was inconsequential.

The world encompassed a number of slightly experienced players, a modest few who had seen wars and fought well before. Much of the rest of the belligerents was a collection of reasonably new players who were thrust into it. Many had survived and flourished simply because their aptitude for the surviving in the early game was the defining factor of their growth, and not necessarily their ability to war as part of a tribe. It is not a great leap to suggest that negative or passive strategies (such as proliferating PAs) triumphed in the early stages of the Tribe Lock and that a lack of early wars brought a different survivor from the usual baptisms of fire.

Consequently, by the time that wars did come around, there were few who could be described as veterans, few who really knew what lay before them. As such, it lacked competition. It lacked the learning experience that it needed to be, and it simply lacked longevity. That (first) war between Shadow and Nstlk* was probably the truest war that the world observed. We saw that long frontline, we saw the bitty conquers and the small gains. We saw good defence on both sides and a lot of players who crucially rose to the occasion.

Admittedly, there were many then who were indeed strong players on both sides. There was still a wealth of experience in both tribes, and this gave the war a certain competition. Those who didn’t have it quickly learned. Both Nstlk* and Shadow had brought in strong players, and both tribes were willing to teach their members how to play. But as the world went on, fewer and fewer tribes could boast a significant number of players who had any fighting experience at all.

I think that it’s important when we look back on the history to remark this as some of Shadow’s best time on the world. There’s a saying that you are judged on the strength of your opponents, and in that moment, both Shadow and Nstlk* were at their best. I speak for myself when I say that I learned more about warfare in that month than any other, but I wouldn’t be surprised if that were the case for many others.

This notion of ‘real’ war might seem laughable to many, but perhaps the defining feature of the wars up until this point, not forgetting Feb.13 or (possibly) LA-G too, is that all the tribes so far had possessed experienced and large players. Certainly as the world wore on, the dichotomy in experience between Shadow and its opponents grew. Indeed, Shadow’s control of the majority of the core made it the most likely home for the experienced players. In turn, Shadow was best prepared for the long haul; if it could get past the experienced members of other tribes in the beginning, there would be few barriers to its domination. Whereas on a real world, Shadow may have been found out by a more solid and experienced tribe, W27 was its perfect home.

So in regards to the conversations at the time, W27 was giving the best it had to offer. Many players could not grow in terms of their skill simply because they had no opportunity and perhaps even no need to do so. Shadow’s positioning endowed it with a good number of the better players of the world. Those in Nstlk* or any of the other growing tribes faced a difficult choice: would they take their time and build up their own experience in wars against smaller tribes, but risk allowing Shadow to far outgrow them; or would they strike, inexperienced, at Shadow while it was vulnerable?

As you can see, there is something to be said for Shadow being more experienced, but nothing substantial enough at this point. Although it was accused of depriving the world of any doubt as to its direction, this is something of an overstatement. It had the lion's share of the most highly ranked players, but many of these were playing for the first time. While it had recruited well, it had to retain and nurture its experienced and strong players if it wanted to win. Both Feb.13 and Nstlk* could be said to have had similar amounts of quality in their ranks, but they lacked the necessary leadership and luck to win the day. Consequently, it was the superior foresight and leadership of Shadow that converted their early promise from a core of solid members into a much broader tribe of strong players.

Whatever the case, with each day that went by Shadow's war machine was learning, but it needed much more time and practise before it could truly cast off its vulnerability. Gains were appearing against Nstlk*, particularly as it lost larger players. Effectively, as soon as May came to an end, Nstlk* had relinquished the entire area of K53 to Shadow as well as losing parts of its upper echelons and quite a lot of points. On the Shadow side of things, their persistence had paid off and Nstlk* had been dealt a terrible blow.

Despite its advantage in points, however, its strength was difficult to bring to bear on the front, and the challenges of the tribes it was already fighting were enough without any others getting ideas. So to make matters worse, whilst Shadow was showered with barb villages on one front, it was facing a grave threat on the other. Although Nstlk* might have lost influential players, it did have its war effort reinforced by Bored. Consisting of a collection of ex-Feb.13 players, they had formed a tribe for the purpose of renewing the fight and having some fun to relieve their eponymous boredom.

And that was not all on Shadow’s mind. Remember K25PG and SORRY!? They decided to merge following their highly successful war against *epic and became the larger K25PG before changing their name to [IRON]. Threats, it seemed, were never far away. One tribe might have begun its long slide to obscurity and defeat, but many more waited to see whether chinks in Shadow's armour would appear.

June – Knightfall

The W27 Weekly was restarted in June, and it makes me so glad I posted the stats for posterity:

[spoil]Top Ten: June 7

Top Ten Tribes
1 Shadow 31.189.654 41.156.593 79 520.970 4307 9.556
2 Nstlk* 16.772.739 19.457.310 72 270.240 2060 9.445
3 TK 7.404.924 8.097.386 58 139.610 1036 7.816
4 K25PG 6.277.195 7.531.379 98 76.851 1057 7.125
5 LA-G 5.432.838 5.928.302 72 82.338 803 7.383
6 4Fun 4.182.260 4.182.260 10 418.226 481 8.695
7 -AA- 4.169.035 4.181.814 43 97.251 539 7.758
8 Bored 2.833.950 2.833.950 5 566.790 297 9.542
9 Dstlk* 2.765.386 3.306.681 87 38.008 556 5.947
10 *TKP* 2.660.444 2.759.427 50 55.189 412 6.698

Top Ten Players
1 ftw97 Shadow 1.444.507 149 9695
2 Carthon II Shadow 1.325.220 141 9399
3 theSleepwalker ASLEEP 1.257.139 122 10304
4 tresorro Nstlk* 1.227.596 108 11367
5 4Knife RO Nstlk* 1.222.101 120 10184
6 micko80 Shadow 1.151.503 122 9439
7 kfoo Shadow 1.140.469 117 9748
8 mikestuntz Shadow 1.118.104 114 9808
9 Mande1992 Shadow 1.116.751 115 9711
10 gerick6 Shadow 1.095.282 111 9867

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

As I don’t have a map of this time, I can only describe the world as May drew to a close and June began. To the West, Shadow was beginning to gain significant territory from Nstlk* who had lost major players. To the North, the fighting was brutal in K44 and theSleepwalker had left Nstlk* eroding its stronghold in the North West. In the North East, K25PG/[IRON] had been formed, and despite the ostensibly lower quality of its members, it boasted high activity and strong continent dominance. In the East, Bored had declared upon Shadow and old enemies were once again at war; while at the same time, a tribe called TK was growing strong. In the South, Nstlk* had been defeated and the Shadow stronghold there was at least safe, but even the threat of inactivity threatened to claw at it.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. Bored, Dstlk, Nstlk*: May 31 - June 7

Side 1: 74
Side 2: 34
Difference: 40

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

Shadow vs. 4Fun, Bored, Dstlk, Nstlk*: June 7 - June 14

Side 1: 53
Side 2: 24
Difference: 29

chart

[/spoil]

W27 stood at a crossroads in history. Shadow, although looking more dominant over Nstlk* by the day, was beleaguered and beset on many sides. It now enjoyed a massive size advantage over its closest rival, but morale was falling amidst a tribe weary of the slow gains and the monumental task ahead of them. Just as Nstlk* had been driven to an unexpected demise, so too did the same appear to be happening to Shadow. Members were quitting here and there, while internal struggles left others decidedly disgruntled. Each knew that more enemies lay in wait, even if Nstlk* could be defeated

These were tribes who could tip the balance, waiting undeclared. Even its current enemies were far from beaten. Tribes like [IRON] and TK were watching the war, biding their time with the potential to throw the world into an even more brutal conflict. As we moved into mid June, 4FUN joined in. It was a dark hour for Shadow, and it could have been pushed to the brink.

Yet just when Shadow seemed to be reaching rock bottom, its predicament proved to be exactly the test of faith that it needed. It was time for its character to be revealed. Here the world watched as it shouldered new burdens, but Shadow did not break. It was a defining moment. It may have been fast becoming a worst case scenario for them, but it was exactly what was needed to mould the tribe. Never had it faced such a scale of uncertainty, but it would remain true to its values. With each day that went by, and with each moment that no more enemies came, it grew stronger again.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. Nstlk*: June 14 - June 21

Side 1: 91
Side 2: 23
Difference: 68

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

Shadow vs. Nstlk*: June 21 - June 28

Side 1: 127
Side 2: 14
Difference: 113

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

Despite its difficulties at this time, Shadow would overcome every test. Where it could have been so severely punished for its ambition and its unwillingness to finish its war with Nstlk*, the retribution never materialised. Nstlk* began to weaken, and other threats proved largely illusory. Either Shadow was hiding its vulnerability well, or the rest of the world was afraid.

Whichever it was, Shadow was escaping. Morale was being revived, troops were being rebuilt; the picture was becoming recognisable again. Just for a moment, it had threatened to falter, but few, if any, had noticed. With Nstlk* slowly collapsing under Shadow's pressure, the stats had belied the turmoil in Shadow. This, perhaps, had been its saving grace.

By the end of June, it had a telling advantage, mainly over Nstlk*. Bored had already merged with them, and 4Fun did the same too; yet Nstlk* always seemed to stay on similar points because they were beginning to lose players as fast as they could bring them in. Shadow, on the other hand, was growing again in strength and confidence.

It seemed that victory over Nstlk* would be forthcoming if all of this continued, and it seemed for the moment that other tribes were largely indifferent, that Nstlk* and the Feb.13 remnants would finally be left to their fate. From one of the darkest times in Shadow’s history, it had reemerged on the road to victory, and all in the space of a month. Let's take a final look at the standings for June.

[spoil]Top Ten: June 28

Top Ten Tribes
1 Shadow 36.604.416 47.132.042 74 636.919 4882 9.654
2 Nstlk* 17.776.945 18.080.596 44 410.923 1926 9.388
3 TK 10.299.658 11.436.343 65 175.944 1406 8.134
4 [IRON] 8.316.227 9.891.608 92 107.517 1299 7.615
5 LA-G 7.742.844 8.289.689 68 121.907 1049 7.902
6 Dstlk* 5.739.983 7.028.756 91 77.239 962 7.306
7 *TKP* 3.623.296 3.733.662 50 74.673 533 7.005
8 -AA- 2.613.614 2.613.614 28 93.343 317 8.245
9 FURY 2.369.753 2.590.480 68 38.095 400 6.476
10 ~VEN~ 1.716.711 1.716.711 33 52.022 265 6.478

Top Ten Players
1 ftw97 Shadow 1.810.509 185 9787
2 theSleepwalker ASLEEP 1.670.479 166 10063
3 Carthon II Shadow 1.622.311 172 9432
4 gerick6 Shadow 1.550.265 155 10002
5 Mande1992 Shadow 1.361.416 138 9865
6 micko80 Shadow 1.358.885 142 9570
7 mikestuntz Shadow 1.265.511 130 9735
8 Grimlock- Nstlk* 1.245.507 128 9731
9 filphillip Shadow 1.184.149 134 8837
10 Zarin Shadow 1.175.095 121 9712

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

As June came to a close, Shadow found itself in a far more dominant position. The Shadow was beginning to fall across old enemies and lands that had once been enemy strongholds. The best of the enemy were now only memories, brave knights fallen. Maintaining 8 out of the 10 best players in the world, and with a Top 40 members equal to almost exactly the same size as those of Nstlk*, TK and [IRON] together, things were looking up. It had seen tough and uncertain times, but a flicker of light was emerging at the end of the tunnel.

All the same, while their toughest opponents to date may be crumbling, it is difficult to ascertain what exactly is lying in wait. As our eyes travel down the leaderboards, let us not forget how outnumbered Shadow is. Whilst a powerful dominance may be in sight, so too could the world be thrust back into a larger and even bloodier war.
 
Last edited by a moderator:

DeletedUser

Guest
July – Foreshadowing Victory

Despite the troubles of the earlier months Shadow had thus far pulled through. Whether surprised by enemies, engaged in bitter wars or staring into a cataclysmic implosion, Shadow had survived. The early days of July were enjoyed as a time of relative peace, with Shadow finally able to consolidate its position.

Nstlk*, broken by the loss of many great players, were growing dysfunctional and apathetic in the wake of waning leadership; Shadow would capitalise. Its new recruits had initially impressed, but they too were close to being overcome by an insurmountable weight of numbers. Indeed, Shadow may even have been grateful to finally put old Feb.13 enemies to rest.

Interestingly enough, the world was very much boiling down to this conflict. At the time, commentators were unanimous that the continued demise of Nstlk*, coupled with the rise of Shadow put the two tribes at the core of the world. It seemed that the other main tribes were waiting to see what would become of this conflict, or were making plans of their own. Shadow was the tribe to beat. The likes of [IRON] and TK were beginning to realise that the mantle of resisting Shadow could soon fall to them, but rumours of dealings and alliances behind closed doors were dismissed by the premature bravado of Shadow.

Elsewhere in the world, another old name appeared again in the news. Having relocated its stronghold and rebuilt itself, LA-G had engaged ~VEN~. Unfortunately, it was more of a diplomatic fracas than a real war. Conquers were few, and the war dried up very quickly. Considering that this was the best on offer after Shadow vs. Nstlk*, it's no wonder that commentators weren't interested in anything else.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. Nstlk*: June 28 – July 5

Side 1: 97
Side 2: 30
Difference: 67

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

The stats here are telling a more even story, and it can be said that the first set of stats for July proved that Nstlk* were not utterly beaten, that better organisation and teamwork were being achieved in parts. The situation as a whole was far graver than when things had begun, but that did not stop individuals trying to turn the tide. The new recruits to Nstlk* were throwing themselves into the war, and let us not forget the copious behemoth of neutral tribes that formed the arena of spectators.

A sequence of maps courtesy of stampcoin, filed in the July 12 Weekly, tells the story rather vividly:

[spoil]
April 17th 2009

map17apw27conq.jpg


May 11th 2009

StampcoinNewMap.jpg


July 11th 2009

StampcoinNstlkShadowconquers.jpg

Text: [spoil]
Tribes: Shadow (green)
Players:

Tribes: Nstlk* (orange)
Players:

Timeframe: Last month

Total conquers against opposite side
Shadow: 360
Nstlk*: 79

Difference 281

Points value of total conquers against opposite side:
Shadow: 3,317,580
Nstlk*: 754, 902

Difference: 2,562,678[/spoil]

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

Let’s take a look at the stats for that second week of July:

[spoil]

Shadow vs. Nstlk*: July 5 - July 12

Side 1: 72
Side 2: 4
Difference: 68

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

From the early promise of Nstlk*, to the even and gruelling struggle on both sides, to the epic demise of the new harlequin; it had been an uncertain conflict, and players do maintain that Nstlk* had possessed a good chance. By this stage however, the direction seemed to be in one way for Nstlk*, and that was down.

Whilst newer members were adding an invaluable impetus, they were simply unable to rectify the collapse of Nstlk* on the Western Front. A quick comparison of the maps shows that between May and July, K53 and K44 fell completely to Shadow. The losses of major players in these areas had exposed the smaller and less experienced players to a renewed assault, and villages that were more used to long range support came under fire.

The ramifications of the loss of some of the largest Nstlk* players culminated in the collapse of resistance in K53. Other Nstlk* villages in the area were mostly isolated clusters and easily captured. In that moment, much of the front there was jeopardised. While this front was briefly reformed on the K43/53 border, holes were beginning to appear, and Shadow would later capitalise fully. Nstlk* was still a large tribe, but the war there was very much on Shadow's terms.

Elsewhere, K44 fell into the same trap, and Nstlk* villages were left horribly exposed in a veritable sea of barbs. With the long and threatening tendrils of Nstlk* lying now lifeless, Shadow's front found renewed definition all across the western continents. Elsewhere, Nstlk* were almost entirely cleared from K65/66, leaving Shadow to pump its full might into the major fronts.

K45/55 saw heavy action, and much of the 4Fun membership had perhaps underestimated what lay in store when they joined Nstlk*. The ominous spectre of encirclement loomed for those trapped within, and many northern Shadow areas became ensnared more deeply in the fight. Much of C46 was surviving and therein was 4Fun found to be the weaker of the two tribes, allowing Shadow to begin to close the net more tightly on the most obstinate enemies who were providing the consolation conquers.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. Nstlk*, Dstlk: July 12 - July 19

Side 1: 102
Side 2: 13
Difference: 89

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

Was Nstlk* completely lost at this point? I would definitely not count it as defeated; whilst it may have been heading that way, it simply needed time to reorganise without the pressure of relentless assault. This was the moment where it needed to be bailed out , and if relief had come at this point, Nstlk* would have hit back relatively quickly and very strongly. Indeed, relief in the preceding month would have been even more effective, particularly when Shadow was struggling with its own issues.

However, without immediate rescue forthcoming, Nstlk* began its fall into obscurity and defeat. As it did so, there were whispers, rumours, that other tribes were seeing the light. No longer content to wait for Shadow to utterly destroy Nstlk* and pick them off one by one, they were preparing to attack it, sooner rather than later, lest all advantage be surrendered.

We must remember that Shadow was not in a totally dominant position; it may have been far ahead of any other challengers, but their combined totals still outweighed that of Shadow. Perhaps even more important was the fact that Shadow was almost completely surrounded, as well as possessing a sizeable number of enemies within its borders. It was also apparent that little or nothing was known of the other tribes who lurked. It was battle-weary, and Nstlk* was far from a spent entity.

[spoil]sweeney2kaii8 - Do you think Nstlk* would have beaten ATTACK/Shadow if y'all had stayed and fought?

olafSchlief - I don't think so; we were badly out numbered and we had too many players that went inactive or passed their sits. But I do think it would have been a lot closer and depending how many sitted accounts they were playing we might have won.

Now if ~AOW~ would not have joined ATTACK/shadow after the first few weeks we would have won but once the ranked one and three tribes merged, with the world settings too, winning was not really on the cards.


Source: sweeney2kaii8 interview with OlafSchlief

[/spoil]

What was happening at these times, I do not honestly know, but one can speculate I suppose; these sorts of rumours can have elements of truth within them, and it seemed a logical decision. The real question at this point is whether such a move is viable. If we strip away hindsight for a moment, it’s certainly an interesting prospect; no one has at this point has seen TK in action, and [IRON] have been quiet for a long time, as have *TKP*.

Did Shadow players expect something? That’s a difficult question; I for one expected something eventually, but for each tribe to declare themselves individually, not to form as one. Other believed it to be nothing more than fancy, while others still were at least planning for the worst case scenario. In many ways the tribe was too buoyed by its early success to take seriously the prospect of multilateral threats.

[spoil]
Shadow vs. Top Ten: July 30

shadow.png

Source: Public Forum

[/spoil]

[spoil]

Shadow vs. Nstlk*, Dstlk: July 19 - July 26

Side 1: 111
Side 2: 6
Difference: 105

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

As we approached the end of July, things on the rumour front were starting to become more concrete and these were perhaps more than just fanciful susurrations. The tribal rankings may have put Shadow ahead, but there was still a potential for depth to a new opposition.

[spoil]Top Ten: July 26

Top Ten Tribes
1 Shadow 44.652.282 55.099.668 70 787.138 5648 9.756
2 Nstlk* 16.882.711 17.518.835 54 324.423 1872 9.358
3 TK 13.418.616 14.731.145 70 210.445 1813 8.125
4 [IRON] 10.716.530 12.449.368 82 151.822 1551 8.027
5 LA-G 9.616.507 10.056.477 55 182.845 1226 8.203
6 *TKP* 5.383.857 5.715.924 57 100.279 768 7.443
7 Dstlk* 4.834.511 5.013.513 60 83.559 679 7.384
8 FURY 3.597.580 4.025.526 78 51.609 569 7.075
9 ASLEEP 2.224.218 2.224.218 1 2.224.218 220 10.110
10 -AA- 1.729.357 1.729.357 17 101.727 212 8.157

Top Ten Players
1 ftw97 Shadow 2.310.006 234 9872
2 theSleepwalker ASLEEP 2.224.218 220 10110
3 Carthon II Shadow 1.909.442 201 9500
4 gerick6 Shadow 1.818.860 179 10161
5 mikestuntz Shadow 1.725.847 173 9976
6 Mande1992 Shadow 1.664.489 169 9849
7 BrobFellshank Shadow 1.531.263 152 10074
8 Zarin Shadow 1.505.369 150 10036
9 bojanm Shadow 1.466.018 147 9973
10 filphillip Shadow 1.438.680 155 9282

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

August – A New Adversary

Those who played this world will remember well what happened next. Time it was for one last throw of the dice, one last brilliant stand against the Shadow. Indeed, we come to one of the most critical times in the history of the world, and the possibly most important hypothetical question of all. But before all that, let’s get on with the declaration that would rock W27.


So it was that after much waiting, we finally had other tribes declare upon Shadow. And not just one, but an entire coalition of them at that! For all Shadow's arrogance and taunting of the rest of the world, the other players had stepped up. Unwilling to admit to any fear or anxiety, the prevailing emotion was curiosity; both sides wanted to see how this would turn out, that is, whether the Coalition was capable of being the first to deliver that crushing blow to Shadow.

[spoil]
Maccano1 said:
As predicted in the last blog post the ‘coalition’ have officially declared war upon Shadow, the tribes Nstlk*, Dstlk*, [IRON], LA-G, TK and FURY have all banded together in an attempt to topple the number one tribe Shadow. This world war has been something which has been in the works for quite some time, and players such as myself called for it 2-3 months ago. Despite a not so professional declarion the tribes have all begun a concerted effort to take on Shadow, and although you would expect the coalition to have a huge advantage here is the match up.

Nstlk* – Ranked 2nd – Top 40 = 14 million

TK – Ranked 3rd – Top 40 = 13 million

[IRON] – Ranked 4th – Top 40 = 12 million

LA-G – Ranked 5th – Top 40 = 9 million

FURY – Ranked 8th – Top 40 = 3 million

Dstlk* – Ranked 10th – Top 40 = 1 million

Total = 52 million (240 players)

Vs.

Shadow – Ranked 1st – Top 40 = 48 million

Although the coalition does have advantage in numbers, and points, its general points per player are much, much, much lower than Shadows. They will also have to deal with communication issues, not being able to support each other, being on the edge of Shadow (who dominates the core) and having no identifiable leader (at least at the moment). Certainly this is an interesting development as the world bands together to try and stop Shadow who look like if they aren’t beaten will easily run through the world unopposed. Now there remains only two tribes undeclared in the war *TKP* and SAM, with these tribes able to either add or relieve pressure on Shadow, they could be important players in the next few weeks political game of chess.

Source: W27 Blog

[/spoil]

Now, let’s back up a moment. When we review the maps and the stats, it does seem that Coalition forces have the advantage, if only a small one in terms of numbers. Shadow is mostly surrounded by enemies and finds itself assailed on almost every front it has. We enter a new kind of war – no longer is Shadow able to rely upon its overwhelming strength, nor does it have the depth of resources to plough into the front. Players less used to fighting suddenly find themselves on the frontline and a vast sea of fresh enemies stretches out ahead. It is clear that Shadow faces its greatest challenge yet.

I know that Shadow players would like me to point out here that the tribe was yet again declared upon, and in fact whilst it was already in a war; but I am going to say that the Nstlk* war wasn’t exactly in the balance at this point. Not content to be in first place, Shadow's older veterans were always quick to bring up the successive ambushes it faced while warring different tribes. Whatever the case, W27 was once again vibrant and interesting.

[spoil]
Zarin said:
I thought that this week I would use this space to make some predictions about the world and cast some of my own opinions into the mix. And what better place to start than with the war which has begun in our midst?

It was of course a long time in coming. Ever since we were gaining the upper hand and becoming a dominant force other tribes should have thought about this. I guarantee that there were times during the war when a huge declaration like this could have turned the tide of the war. It thus beggars belief that it should be so tardy. For what reason have you shied from necessity?

Perhaps, it is cowardice. Many of the tribes arrayed against us have lots of smaller less experienced members and perhaps this pervaded the leadership of these tribes who felt that they lacked the ability to take on Shadow. True, each tribe alone would have fallen to Shadow, but if we were distracted with the war, we could not have spread our resources so thinly. But you failed to realise this and it will cost you.

Perhaps you felt that Nstlk* would pull through, or that Shadow would disintegrate whilst you calmly built up and picked off whatever was left. I mean, that’s the reason is it not? I would aver that’s the reason why [IRON] or TK didn’t attack sooner. You were waiting for both Shadow and Nstlk* to exhaust themselves so that you could come in and take everything. Nstlk* take the hits like the meat shield you used them as and then you waltz in and crush the weakened Shadow members. By the time Nstlk* realise what has happened, it’s too late for them and you take them as well.

I think you missed the opportune time. Proceeding with that plan was all about the balance between Shadow and Nstlk*, finding a moment when both sides were weak and neither was too far ahead. That was some time ago, and now you have finally realised that this will not work and your hand is forced. It shows; there is no precise coordination but mismatched attacks, no real support anywhere just nukes waiting in villages. It could have worked well; timed correctly I might even have put money on [IRON] or TK to become the dominant force (probably [IRON] out of those two).

What do I think will happen? Shadow will win. I have seen enough of the reports to judge the quality of opponents and I am insulted that you think that you will be enough. In the first 48 hours, you were supposed to seize the initiative, to make some concrete gains, but you floundered in your inexperience and ineptitude. As it stands, you do not have the ability to destroy a single player, let alone the entire tribe. Soon we shall bring our full might to bear and you shall know how wrong you were to wait this long. When your leaders fall, the lesser players will disintegrate and Shadow will purge the remaining resistance. We shall take our victory then and move on.

What’s that: bias? True enough, I don’t know what you have up your sleeves, so let’s finish with the hypothesis of what might happen should Coalition tribes win the day. I think that this victory would be down mainly to [IRON] and Nstlk*, the other tribes seem to be less enthusiastic in their pursuit of greatness. Then perhaps those two would make an alliance, Nstlk* would deal with either TKP or LA-G whilst [IRON] would go after TK splitting the world in two. After that, I see one last final war between those two in which the greater experience of remaining Nstlk* players would probably tell, and if they could keep a tribe together, they would probably make some good ground and become the dominant force. Who knows? You would probably merge all the best players if you won into one uber tribe and try to finish the world.

Finally, I wish good luck to all those involved, I am glad you finally joined in and I look forward to meeting you all on the battlefield

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

Contemporary predictions and a diatribe intended to incite a little bit of debate perhaps, but the point is there: Shadow had the belief that it could win, even against this new threat; the Coalition was more enamoured to the fact that it had to win, that this was the only option, as unattractive as it was.

Time for a map I think:

[spoil]
Top Tribes: August 7

Mapw277thAugust2009.png

Shadow – Red
Coalition – Blue
REF – Orange
*TKP* – Green
SAM – Pink


Source: W27 Blog

[/spoil]

It is interesting to note one or two absences from the Coalition table. Whilst the top 3 tribes behind Shadow joined in, the net was never sealed because *TKP* were reluctant to take part, and therefore left a comfortable front which enabled Shadow to build a main bastion in the South West that could support and provide the resources for wars on other fronts.

Intriguing also was the reluctance of ASLEEP’s one man band to join the fray – an experienced player on the Western Front would have been worth their weight in gold to those defending. To the South East, SAM was likewise unwilling to commit to the war, and yet another front was not completely sealed against Shadow.

[spoil]Zarin - Were you asked to join the Coalition?

mrpickle99 - Oh yes, on numerous occasions, and to this day the side against Shadow is trying to get us to join.

I believe that the time for uniting against Shadow came and went before The Coalition was formed. I expected someone else to form it, if I had had time myself I would have started something similar around 3-4 weeks before the coalition was initially formed. As I thought the time was already gone, it was the automatic response from me to say no when offered a chance to join. But I still brought it before the council of The Killer Penguins, and we agreed unanimously that it would be suicide to declare war on Shadow. Not only because of the late start, but more because of who was leading it, Nstlk* was the frontrunner at the time. And we were very much so not on good terms with the leaders of that tribe at the time.


Source: W27 Weekly

Zarin - Will ASLEEP be joining in?

theSleepwalker - Haven't thought about it yet. Lots of tmails begging me to jump in, though.

Source: W27 Weekly

Zarin - Were you asked to join the Coalition?

Styv - All the time and it is continuous even today. I think it may be that the coalition tribes are fluid along with their leaders. We have said from the start that we are neutral, based on our own terms.

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

Whatever their reasons may have been, not one of *TKP*, ASLEEP or SAM decided to join the Coalition. As it stood though, the Coalition was still a large proportion of the major tribes and was an indictment of a firm resistance to Shadow.

However, points and declarations are one thing, whereas war is entirely another. Here Coalition forces had the opportunity to hit Shadow hard; indeed, it is undeniably true that the attacker should be looking to make the early gains, and significant ones at that. Once again Shadow prepared itself for the early losses while it reacted to the new threat. Unfortunately it didn’t quite happen.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. Dstlk*, FURY, [IRON], LA-G, Nstlk*, TK: August 2 - August 9

Side 1: 231
Side 2: 73
Difference: 158

chart


Shadow vs. Dstlk*: August 2 - August 9

Side 1: 4
Side 2: 0
Difference: 4

chart


Shadow vs. FURY: August 2 - August 9

Side 1: 44
Side 2: 5
Difference: 39

chart


Shadow vs. [IRON]: August 2 - August 9

Side 1: 17
Side 2: 21
Difference: 4

chart


Shadow vs. LA-G: August 2 - August 9

Side 1: 45
Side 2: 5
Difference: 40

chart


Shadow vs. Nstlk*: August 2 - August 9

Side 1: 22
Side 2: 21
Difference: 1

chart


Shadow vs. TK: August 2 - August 9

Side 1: 99
Side 2: 21
Difference: 78

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

Obviously, stating that Shadow stormed to a massive early victory does come with the caveat that different tribes displayed widely different abilities in the fighting. The crucial early push was present only in some areas. It’s interesting that Nstlk* displayed far greater resolve, armed with the hope that they could be relieved. In the North, against [IRON] and the newest Nstlk* players, Shadow was struggling. The infamous Shadow/Feb.13 doughnut meant that Shadow could be reached on both sides and was suffering. It was their weakest area, and enemies were looking to capitalise.

To the West, many of the central elements of Nstlk* were still yielding the conquers, and curiously enough, *TKP* were mysteriously absent, refusing to punish Shadow on that flank. With the fight moving into K43, those players could rely on their firm base in K53, free from fear of *TKP* attacks. With ASLEEP remaining eponymously unhelpful, Nstlk* found itself unable to put together a firm set of statistics and erased the work of their tribemates in the North.

To the South-West, Shadow possessed a firm base from which to direct support and long range offensives. With Nstlk* having waned significantly over the preceding month, resources were deceptively plentiful.

To the South, brave newcomers FURY were quickly shown to be far out of their depth. Despite a handful of early conquers, their players were unprepared for the war. It had been a brave move for them to join the Coalition, and they faced a difficult war against players many times larger than theirs. Without assistance from others in the area, they looked likely to be the first to go.

To the East, TK made little early impact and served to make the Coalition look meaner than it was. Much had not be known of them, and some ostensibly large players proved unfortunately quiet during the early attacks. Suffering far more heavily than any other tribe, as they did, analysts point to the fact that the Shadow players they faced had not been involved in the war to any great degree and had fresh resources. Essentially, it was hoped that the players who had not been part of Shadow's early wars would not represent the challenge that others posed. On the evidence of the first week, the plan of attacking players who were not battle-tested was backfiring horribly. Their large size and poor preparation were being exposed as weaknesses, but they still managed to conquer commendably in parts.

Elsewhere, LA-G’s position, or rather lack thereof, left them awkwardly placed in the war, filling in gaps, and unable to function cohesively as a tribe. Some members were located perilously within Shadow borders and suffered terribly in the early days.

So the major question looms over us: was it going to be enough? At the time, there was a lot of speculation to this effect; Shadow were clearly unwilling to offer any praise or encouragement to the Coalition forces, and those within the Coalition were empowered by their ideals. The jury was out for the moment, but many of the neutral figures were not particularly enthused by the idea:

[spoil]
Maccano1 said:
When the declaration came from the ‘coalition’ that they would stand up united against Shadow; the rallying call went out to their troops to their troops and their leaders decided that they would stand strong against the dominating tribe… Or at least that was the theory, it seems like at the moment the coalition is more a rag tag collection of players than anything substantial.

Now maybe I’m being harsh on them, and yes its true some of the coalition have had success against Shadow (notably IRON), however when you collect most of the world’s top 10 together to try and do something, it really should be doable, however it seems that many of the players from the tribes haven’t been participating against Shadow, which ultimately is at the determent of the cause.

The message the leaders need to convey to their troops is “get your thumbs out of your asses!” however I doubt that this is something that they are able to do. Unfortunately there seems to be little organisation from most of the tribes, leaving it up to individuals to try and take on Shadow on their own with little help or back up. The coalition is far from a spent force, however you have to question how long they can survive in this state of disarray; a casual observer would suggest that they lack any strong leadership that is willing to pull the various parts together, it is only then that they could start to become an effective entity…. However the question remains who (if there is anyone of that ability) is willing to step up to the plate?

Source: W27 Blog

[/spoil]

Much of the question centred on the issue of timing. While the Coalition was powerful on paper, it lacked the experience of Shadow and had a larger number of smaller members. I think it was felt that once the element of surprise had been squandered, and the dust had settled, if Shadow were still around, then they (Shadow) would do what they had done up until that point, and calmly make the gains.

Now, had this move come a month earlier, when Shadow was far more engrossed in war with Nstlk*, then the advent of these new tribes would have been far more threatening. Indeed, had it come even earlier when Nstlk* was even, then it would have been more effective again.

The ethos was certainly there, but this author got the impression that the Coalition was overestimated. TK are an excellent example: despite the element of surprise and a large tribe with some sizeable members, they were beaten back brutally even in the first week. For all their points, most of the players were facing targets far larger than them. Whilst not all of Shadow’s members were experienced veterans, they had plenty with the experience, knowledge and wisdom to advise others; Coalition tribes were mostly bereft of such experience and wisdom and had little idea on how to make their numbers, size and surprise work.

Going forward with this example, both sides of the Eastern Front had seen only sparse glimpses of warfare. Those in TK's area had missed both Feb.13 and T-GR, depriving them of useful experience. Considering Shadow's tangles in the North, things were largely even on paper. But because the tribe as a whole lacked experience, there was no one to lead or guide efforts with any certainty. TK had the resources (defensive inclinations of its larger players notwithstanding) to launch a sizable offensive. Yet without any planning or coordination, attempts were sporadic and ineffective.

It demonstrates the key advantage of Shadow at the time: it had players with the vision and understanding to deploy its experience where it was needed, reorganise the tribe into several largely independent units and pick its targets intelligently. It had the advantage of being able to adjust its focus on different fronts, ensuring that it was always at least equal to its opponent.

The key would always be coordination, especially on a tribal level. Whereas the larger Shadow players could get away with going it alone, the smaller Coalition players needed to work together on larger targets, but the coordination was simply not there. Whilst that might have been expected between the tribes themselves, it was perhaps disappointing that coordination within tribes also seemed to be lacking.

Now if we look at [IRON], they prepared well for the war with defence, picked targets intelligently and executed their plans competently. They demonstrated what could be achieved, as did Nstlk*, but the other members could not replicate the success. With each tribe left to its own devices, success was a fickle mistress, and Shadow walked away comfortably.

Each tribe was bluntly striking away with varying degrees of success. Because it didn't punish Shadow in the first days, their enemy began to give hints of the formidably strong, intelligently managed and fluidly manoeuvrable war machine it was becoming. Granted, it wasn't used to the stalwart defence of [IRON] and didn't look quite so illustrious in the North, but other tribes should have been preparing for a veritable storm of retaliation.

I think I could encapsulate it quite comfortably when I say that I was pleased at the time that it had taken them so long to get this together. Had it come a month or two earlier, then Shadow would have been battered heavily, and it would have been a real world war; when it became apparent that it was not forthcoming at that time, and that even when it did come, the players were as inexperienced as was hoped, Shadow breathed a sigh of relief.

It is at this point we shall pause and consider the future. The first week of August had given a mixed message. There was clear resistance to Shadow, courage and a surprising amount of skill within it; at the same time, Shadow had steamrollered over large parts of its new enemies and had not exactly been embarrassed. Perhaps the reputation of Shadow had been its best defence in the first week, but defiance from [IRON] and Nstlk* would not go unnoticed. The supposed gulf in experience and competence that Shadow liked to tout suddenly looked far more surmountable.

[IRON] was already taking heart from the experience, decrying Shadow as weak and arrogant. The element of surprise was a waning leg to stand on in defence of Shadow's losses and an emboldening of its enemies was the last thing it wanted. If [IRON] and Nstlk* refused to fall into line in accordance with the sequence of so many other wars, what could Shadow do? For all its grand tales of victory Nstlk*, was it really as strong as it looked?

With the first week over, surprise had been squandered. Shadow was looking stretched or weak, but only along a small proportion of its front. Its death knell was far from being sounded. Some had struck crucial blows, but the result was by no means as resounding as Coalition forces might have hoped.

And talking of enemies, the world’s politics would take another turn. It was at this time that a new tribe was formed from the ashes of another. Of course, I talk about REF:

[spoil]
Maccano1 said:
Reformation:

The Winston Churchill Quote: “we shall fight on the beaches, we shall fight on the landing grounds, we shall fight in the fields and in the streets, we shall fight in the hills; we shall never surrender” Is often trotted out as a quote used to describe a ‘never back down’ ideology, that leaders of tribes try to associate with their tribes. However this isn’t a sentiment that could be used in regards with Nstlk*. They failed, we failed, as a tribe and as a family, there is no longer a coherent ethos behind the tribe and thus it will be known in the annuals of time as a tribe which was unable to overcome its problems.

YGI? Was a tribe which also had its problems, but despite a lack of leadership it had a very clear ethos and goal. To be small and compact, a tribe where players would be active and aggressive, enthusiastically standing against other tribes, willing to fight against any and all with the aim of enjoying the ride. This is an ethos I cherish and wish to regain, so with it I am officially announcing my departure of Nstlk*.

This will not be news to many who know me, I have been discontented for a long time, however now I have finally decided that the time is right to rediscover my routes and create a tribe which is based on the principles of YGI?. This new tribe will be known as Reformation, or REF for short; the aim and goal is to create a tribe who will actively fight everyone and anyone, until we are victorious or are overcome by a better tribe.

To conclude I will defer to a less popular Churchill quote as it is one that is much more adequate in the symbolisation of our goals and aspirations: “Never, never, never believe any war will be smooth and easy, or that anyone who embarks on the strange voyage can measure the tides and hurricanes he will encounter.”

Source: Public Forum

[/spoil]

My commentary from that time (recorded in the Weekly):

[spoil]
Zarin said:
A long time ago, there was a tribe called YGI?. Many had hope for this tribe; it would be a compact unit of strong players who would be aggressive and determined. One might hesitate to use the word elite, but there was an ethos concerned with a high average level of skill among players and no little talent amongst its ranks. Ultimately, it did not come to fruition, and as with PM our hopes were for nothing.

So it is with trepidation that the arrival of a new tribe which adheres to those ideals is announced. It has certainly attracted the attention of one or two solo players who had become disillusioned with Nstlk* as well as ex-YGI? members. They are also united under a strong leader and have a clear ethos.

Thus, it appears that we could very well have a strong tribe in the making, or like YGI? it could crumble internally. Let us hope that such a thing does not yet happen, as REF could be very much a catalyst for increased conflict and action across the world. They have already locked horns with Shadow, but are not part of the Coalition either - something of an interesting rogue element.

At the moment, we see only the tentative beginnings of this tribe and it will be a test of their leadership as to how things continue. The world will watch as we may yet see the rise of a great tribe, or another dashing of our hopes and a tragic slide into obscurity. As Livy once said: ‘In war, the outcome corresponds less to expectations than in any other case whatsoever.’

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

As we see, REF had styled itself as a tribe of high calibre, strong members and a solid ethos; ostensibly at least the prospects were good. It is key to remember, on the other hand, that these players had all been in Nstlk*; no one new was joining the fight, and in fact, REF’s early policy was one of isolationism, keeping out of the way of other tribes which effectively rendered Nstlk* without many top players, ones who were desperately needed.

We have a stage set for what could be the final showdown, the final test for Shadow which would hand them victory, or crush their dreams, ushering in a new epoch for W27. With the forces arrayed and the war begun, far fewer vultures could be seen on the edges.

So what of the other, neutral tribes who were sitting it out? Their neutrality was due, in all cases it seems, to a lack of faith in the Coalition and what it could do; these tribes did not wish to speed up their prospective demises. Now, when reasonably neutral members don’t have faith in it, it is not an auspicious start; yet is that perhaps because everyone knew, or thought that they knew, what Shadow could do whilst these upstarts were largely new prospects?

And among all of this, we had the rogue presence of REF. Curiosity and perhaps hope for the onlookers, but it still held that the victor here would simply become the next entity to win the world. After all, if the Coalition came out on top, surely the large, neutral tribes would their obvious subsequent targets ...

[spoil]
The War to End All Wars...or is it? - Deciphered
Some thoughts from the leaders of smaller tribes at the time

We always hear from the top tribes. We always hear how the stats are looking between the #1 and the #2 tribe and who is on top. We hear this because that is naturally what we pay attention to. Why would we care about the smaller players and tribes who form that ugly bulge around the rim?

This week I took the liberty of talking to some of the leaders of certain smaller tribes, mainly through their leaders, about what they thought about the current situation of W27 and their opinions when looking toward our future, post-war.

Of the Rank 10 to 20 tribes, only 1 of them (Dstlk*) helps to form what we like to call 'The Coalition'. You may dismiss them for not being able to have a significant impact on the world, but could things have worked better had the coalition leaders organised a more effective front against Shadow?

XXX said:
The top 10 - 20 tribes join in on the fight against Shadow and we all grow together whilst taking their villages and forming a couple ally tribes within the 'Coalition' which naturally come about when working together.

This opinion is commonly shared amongst several of the said tribes. They suggest a reform of sorts to gather tribes into groups and actually allow to work together by being able to send support. Did they (The Coalition) miss out on a good opportunity to form a stronger, united offensive on Shadow? Is it really too late?

I leave the latter question up to you. Although it is mainly rhetorical, I wish to encourage free thought amongst our ranks - which is why I decided to write this 'article'.

Many messages I received talked of a downright Shadow victory, people know and fear of their collective organisation and prowess all over the world:

XXX said:
Shadow wins, game over.

XXX said:
I feel Shadow will come out on top simply because of how well you work together and also the area that Shadow covers!

XXX said:
At this point it is to late to try to beat Shadow in a war; the only chance for any player not in Shadow is to attempt to join them.

XXX said:
I believe Shadow will come out on top.

XXX said:
First, shadow has more safeguarded territory than the coalition. Although coalition forces are circling the map, the strength of the attacks is not as great as the Shadow. Second, Coalition forces cannot send support to each other. Third, Shadow has more strong players than the Coalition.

Most of this may be true, but the only reason players say these things is due to the reputation of said tribe. It can be argued that Shadow have never truly been tested on a global scale. Sure, the archaic Feb.13 vs. ATTACK war was originally tight, but Shadow lacked longevity and commitment from their opponents. The start of the Nstlk* vs. Shadow war was also close but again Shadow won, mainly, by keeping up activity and morale rather than winning by skill and coordination alone.

One thing that all of the tribes I have spoken to agree with is that this war was necessary to keep the world alive. Could it give them breathing space and enable them to grow whilst their enemies weaken? We all thought the Nstlk* vs. Shadow war would decide the world as no-one paid attention to [IRON] or TK back then. The war gave them time to grow and leave them in the position they are in now.

So is there hope yet?

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

Given that the world is in a thoughtful sort of time, I thought also that I would offer some alternative thoughts on how we came here and the opinions at the time from Lord of Bones:

[spoil]
Politics of the World - Lord of Bones
Some thoughts from Lord of Bones on how the politics of the world have changed

I joined this world for the unusual settings; it was clear from day one that the settings would have an impact on world politics in the long run. I will start with a review of what was going on in this world for the last 8 months.

The first 3 months were a bit chaotic and lacked tribal scale politics but it made something else – it connected people from different sides of the map, there were about 4 tribes that actually did something in this time and only one of them survived.

I will concentrate my examples on ATTACK/Shadow as they are the only tribe that have been here from day one and some claim that they won this world. This is only for convenience as all others can be compared to them.

In the beginning (on a bright November afternoon… the 13th to be exact) all tribes and all players had the exact same starting point; the race should have been exciting, but this world was probably misunderstood by some. The beginning gave a chance to everyone to form friends, to mould the world that they will play on. It was clear that the game would start on February the 13th but the first 3 months were a time for the players to envision and to create the world they wanted to play.

The first 3 months gave a pretty clear picture of who had capable leaders and who couldn’t handle the challenge (and what a challenge it was) of managing a tribe made up from people that had no idea what they were doing, that couldn’t really help each other; most of whom, didn’t read the world settings. This was a test for the most seasoned leaders, not to mention the newer ones.

When the calendar showed February 13, 2 tribes that more or less merged to form the tribe we all know and love: ABS ranked 3 at that time merged into ATTACK ranked 1. This move was cooking for about a month before the lock lifted, Ephette made some moves to find, get to know and to recruit people that she came to trust to form a solid leadership and an active tribe.

ATTACK was dominant from the start due to good recruiting and an adamant leadership, but with success also came the enemies. The first one was LA-G, with whom diplomacy deteriorated quickly due to the woefully low diplomatic skills of crystalball. However, a young baron named dimi, who was a member of LA-G, beat ATTACK to the destruction of LA-G and the downfall came more due to internal politics rather than the efforts of ATTACK.

While ATTACK was at war with LA-G, a tribe called Feb.13 sneak-attacked and gained a temporary advantage. After about 2 months of the war drums beating, Feb.13 surrendered and fell apart. While ATTACK still busy clearing the field a new tension was building up this time with the Night Stalkers.

This act repeated itself a short time later; Nstlk* were waiting for Feb.13 to weaken ATTACK, but as ATTACK took the upper hand in the fight, Nstlk* saw an opportunity to strike a tribe that was exhausted from war.

The battle drums sang, armies were marching and nobles were sent. As before, the declaration came after the attacks started. (Yes! To all of you: to attack a tribe with which you have any diplomatic relations with, without prior notice and a decent declaration while you exploit their weaknesses, is a low, dishonorable and despicable act.)

This act forced ~AOW~ (the only ally of ATTACK throughout the game) to choose sides, an act that led to the merge of the 2 tribes and the creation of Shadow.

A week ago a new war started (against the Coalition), this is an all out war that is the last major assault on the "superpower" named Shadow.

Now that I have finished the introduction, I will point out a few interesting points in this world’s politics (I will refer to the early ATTACK as Shadow from now on just for convenience).

The first act that stirred the politics of the world and set things into motion happened about a month before the lock ended. 5 top players suddenly quit (purple, ilovetherain and others) and left a gap; the world transformed overnight from a solo based world to a world that demanded cooperation. Players started to bond and planned what would happen when the lock was to be lifted.

February 13 was the earthquake that everyone waited for and within about 24h a new power balance was visible. The most dominant force was Shadow (ATTACK) and LA-G that was ranked 2. Other tribes that were made at the start were Feb.13, YGI and Nstlk*. There were also 2 small tribes in the south ~AOW~ and J1g$@w.

Shadow needed a war, to make a statement, and to bond players together. Early on, the opportunity came as the ranked 2 tribe's (LA-G) leaders had some harsh conversations and whispered war. Shadow geared up for war, orders were given and the declaration was written and 2 days before the war was supposed to start a baron named dimi caused more harm to LA-G in 10 minutes than Shadow managed to cause from that day till now. Despite the fact that Shadow made a proper declaration and gave a notice to the LA-G leadership, this war was a skirmish as the leadership of LA-G just didn’t function. However, it still was a conflict that was won by Shadow.

This war caused a few things: Shadow got a dominant position that made the whole world fear and hate them for it and it built up the reputation and achieved the goals for Shadow. It made a statement (we are here, we are number 1 and we can justify this position) and it bonded the tribe; people sent support half a world away and practiced on coordination.

While shadow was at war, a new power formed in the core of the world named Feb.13. They ruled 2 continents and were surrounded by shadow players. Was it a fear that they would be an island in Shadow territory or that they saw an opportunity to attack with Shadow busy that caused them to declare? The fact is that they chose to engage in a war and caught Shadow ill-prepared with all troops at the LA-G front and gained an early advantage. The approach of Feb.13 was a practical one and it was shown in the forums that their approach was different to the one held by Shadow.

Shadow held high the ideals of honor, respect and dignity while the Feb.13 leadership declared that they saw no reason to act honorably when an opportunity was spotted. Shadow leaders believed that with integrity, dignity and holding true to your word, one could unite the players and give them a goal, and that they would thus gain the respect from the world. Shadow was willing to pay the price for these ideals as Feb.13 believed that they would gain victory by deception and sheer force. This was a long war and, although Shadow took the blow at the beginning of the war, they recovered. The war was ended by the surrender of Feb.13 and their subsequent disbandment into 4 smaller tribes. This war had its ups and downs but mostly due to persistence of Shadow, the tide turned and Feb.13 lost.

This war caused a few things: Shadow proved that they held rank 1 by right and it also strengthened their belief in the ideals that drove the tribe. However, it also generated a wave of hate due to a level of arrogance in Shadow's conduct; people felt that Shadow tried to prove that they are better, not only on the battlefield, but also on a more personal and moral level. This is where the world started to form, there were Shadow and ‘the others’.

The next war (or so called one) was between YGI? and Nstlk* which was more of a pillow fight than a war. The outcome of ‘this thing’ was a merge generating 2 tribes, the elite Nstlk* and the Dstlk* academy tribe.

The only tribe that ever had an alliance with shadow was ~AOW~ and when the above merge occurred and led to the Nstlk* declaration, this alliance was put to the test. ~AOW~ was forced to choose sides; it had an alliance with both Shadow and Nstlk*. ~AOW~ dropped the alliance with Nstlk* a few weeks before the attack on Shadow due to some disputes and disinformation with Nstlk*. ~AOW~ chose to honor the alliance with Shadow and entered the war on their side.

What actually happened there? ~AOW~ had to choose between a chance to destroy Shadow with an ally that they just couldn’t trust or to join Shadow's side and by that, seal any chance that Shadow would fall. ~AOW~ made a practical choice but there was no lack of emotion involved. At the end the choice was made because “you can trust Shadow”, something that couldn’t be said about Nstlk*. At the end ~AOW~ merged with ATTACK and the outcome of this merge was the creation of a "new" tribe called Shadow.

The Nstlk* war went on and was at balance but mostly due to inactivity and internal politics in Nstlk* they started losing it. This is a point (just before the coalition war) that I want to stop and examine what was going on.

Top Ten Tribes (July 26)
1 Shadow 44.652.282 55.099.668 70 787.138

2 Nstlk* 16.882.711 17.518.835 54 324.423
3 TK 13.418.616 14.731.145 70 210.445
4 [IRON] 10.716.530 12.449.368 82 151.822
5 LA-G 9.616.507 10.056.477 55 182.845
6 *TKP* 5.383.857 5.715.924 57 100.279
7 Dstlk* 4.834.511 5.013.513 60 83.559
8 FURY 3.597.580 4.025.526 78 51.609

Shadow – a superpower in this world; the tribe worked hard to create and maintain an image for people to both respect and fear. Shadow had a way and fought for ideals. I wrote once "to inspire people to do things will always work better than to inflame them to do them".

Shadow earned respect but it also created some enemies - actually the entire world. Some tend to think Shadow are snobs and that Shadow thinks that they are better than the rest, and that they are arrogant, but the reasons for the war are best described
in the words of willettskillz :

I'm just trying to make an interesting end to the world. You may say that I'm selfish but I think its better than waiting for Shadow to attack. Once we attack, I will give every member of [IRON] a choice: to leave and not join the war, or to fight alongside their friends and allies against a common enemy.

There is no hatred in my planning of this war; in fact, most of us agree that Shadow is a very respectable tribe, but the position you are in makes you an enemy of the rest of the world.


Shadow used the tool of propaganda skilfully throughout their time on this world and generated an image that shadow are the honorable, just, heroic, good warriors that fight against the evil and corrupted tribes that only driven by hate and jealousy (not that one expects truth in it, but to point it out and use it in this way is still called propaganda).

Shadow fought on a psychological level as well as with troops; who doesn’t remember the ‘amnesty mails’ that were sent out when tribes declared upon us? They were effective as people saw Shadow as "respectable" (Shadow actually gave the amnesty that they had promised) and the conduct of the tribes and the propaganda that showed them in a very unpleasant light caused the internal disputes, and the inactivity, that destroyed any major enemy that Shadow has had thus far.

The power struggle in the world was created from diplomacy and politics at least as much as through real fighting; people quit or turn on their own leadership for different reasons. Players, like citizens, are fed by rumors and twisted or biased info more than by real truth. I will give 2 examples:

[IRON] talked with TK and Nstlk* about this Coalition thing but their players were totally ignorant about this (and again I will quote willett):

(21.07. at 19:23) "believe me, [IRON] members are unaware."

The irony here is that the enemy knew about it before the declaring side's players did. On the same issue, 2 days before that quotation, Shadow members were informed;
on 19.07 this message was sent out:

"It is time to spend some time taking a close look at your villages and how they are situated in regards to other tribes like TK, [IRON], LA-G,*TKP*."

The 2 tribes were both afraid of spies apparently; both were not exactly sure what would be the outcome, but they both made a decision and Shadow decided to take the chance to inform the tribe while [IRON] hid this info. How does this kind of conduct affect people?

We had a debate about whether ‘to exploit the fact that the players in enemy tribes didn’t know what was going on’. We decided not to do so as it is not the most honorable thing to do, but it was a possibility. What would have been the outcome of that?

The war we face now has started, not out of a conflict or anything like that, but as an act of desperation and a feeling of helplessness from the dukes of the Coalition.
When we talked about reasons for the war I got this answer:

"i felt that this really was the last chance to take you down before the rest of the world just quit"

This world was driven by reputation and fear more than anything else; there were no epic wars that ended with a ‘bang’ in which entire continents were wiped out, persistence and stable leadership won the wars while inactivity and desperation lost them. Politics made a greater difference than troops, information and disinformation, and were a weapon stronger than the sword and the game of minds determined the outcome of a battle more than the sheer technical skill. Truly W27 was a 'King's game'…

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

So how is it that within the space of a month, such a bright prospect for this world was covered in Shadow? The denouement was as catastrophic as it was bathetic. In those first weeks, the Coalition kept things reasonably even; but as time wore on, gradually Shadow moved ahead. The stats were always difficult at the time because Shadow made the larger numbers from the inactive Coalition constituents, whereas some elements were holding up well.

[spoil]
Coalition Commentary – willettskillz
Some thoughts on the war from Coalition members (interviewed and compiled by willettskillz):

Gunther MAplethorpe:[spoil]willettskillz - I know I’m showing my own bias here, but I’ll ask anyway. After the last issue of the World 27 Weekly came out, the only tribe ahead of Shadow in the stats was [IRON]. Do you think that anything specifically made this a little easier for us than others tribes in the Coalition?

Gunther MAplethorpe – This is a difficult question to answer. I have not spent much time within the other tribes, so any comparison I may make about why [IRON] has been faring better is purely speculative. I am convinced it’s more about the meta-game, though, rather than anything as mundane as troops strengths, village build styles, or the like. [IRON] has a strong group consciousness, with the majority of our members having played alongside each other for a long time. The merges that brought about SORRY!, K25PG, and ultimately [IRON] were made of packs of players who had similarly played together since near the beginning, with the resultant close bonds formed amongst the people behind the players. I haven’t seen this level of trust in any other online game I’ve played, and certainly not in the other TW worlds of which I’ve been a part.

willettskillz - Do you think that the Coalition's strength in numbers trumps Shadow's ability to coordinate between a lesser number of players?

Gunther MAplethorpe – That remains to be seen, doesn’t it? I don’t think it’s too difficult to surmise that though the Coaltion has many more players involved, such numbers necessarily bring with them a lack of cohesion; the more players you have, the more difficult it is to coordinate effectively. Shadow has a 67 players, and anyone in a tribe of more than a dozen can attest to the inverse relationship coordination has with tribe size. These issues grow exponentially, it seems, as the number of tribes involved grows. Throw in other minor challenges like the level of inexperience of smaller and newer players, and the apparent advantage in numbers sometimes feels like a distinct disadvantage.

That said, we’ve already seen the worst of those issues; they’re already being looked at and fixed. We will only continue to break down those barriers to coordination. Shadow, on the other hand, can only become less cohesive than they are, as they continue to lose villages in the war, and will lose players due to inactivity and exhaustion. The two factors that seem to pull players out of TW are real life issues, and lethargy; the large player base of the Coalition is much less susceptible to those factors, while even one player leaving Shadow is a significant portion of their team.


willettskillz - As a member of the Coalition who actively fights Shadow, do you see a large gap in experience between the opposites sides of the war in the north?

Gunther MAplethorpe – I thought that I did before the war started. Like many players on this world, I saw the bugaboo of Shadow as a large, frightening force, impossible to touch. But I see now that this is mostly smoke and mirrors; it was simply the size of the beast that struck fear, not the ability of its membership. After the war launched, though, I saw that we had truly overestimated the beast. There is a gap in experience, to be sure; Shadow has some strategic players, and can put a long-range goal into play. But that gap is not the gaping chasm I once thought it was, but merely a small fissure easily bridged.

willettskillz - With the northern end of Shadow taking the heaviest hits from the Coalition, do you see K35 and K36 folding to the Coalition control by the end of the war?

Gunther MAplethorpe – I reject the premise of your question. I see K35 and K36 coming into Coalition hands before the middle of the war! The northern arm of Shadow is the main battleground for [IRON], and barring anything totally unforeseen happening, I cannot see those continents lasting long in Shadow’s hands. In fact, one could make the argument that the longer they hold out in their northern pseudopod, drawing support from the south, the worse off they’ll be.[/spoil]

samurai kiwi:[spoil]willettskillz - Do you have an explanation as to why the statistics in the last week’s World 27 Weekly were in Shadow's favour?

samurai kiwi – Ok, Shadow were prepared for us; they might not have known all the tribes involved but they knew enough to defend what was needed and counter rapidly.

willettskillz - Nstlk* and Shadow have been warring for quite some time now. Why do you think that the statistics are as they are?

samurai kiwi – Early on in the war I had quite a few isolated vils where Shadow could get at them easily, and that's what they did. After those had fallen I made my push and got some back, but when our big players all together I was left isolated in a new K again and so have slowly lost them. Make them work tho :)

willettskillz - What do you think are Shadow’s and the Coalition’s biggest advantages and disadvantages in this war?

samurai kiwi – Shadow's biggest advantage is that they are a good tribe that have played together for a long time and are mostly experienced players.

The Coalition's biggest advantage is that we are spread out around Shadow, forcing them to stretch their defence further than they have previously; they might be able to do it, only time will tell.

Coalition's biggest disadvantage is communication between tribes and not being able to support each other.


willettskillz - Now, please add any more comments that you feel would enlighten the readers of the World 27 Weekly and that will bring our conversation to a close.

samurai kiwi – World 27 is a world that is full of inactive players who were mostly new to the game but many of the remaining active players are expereinced, myself included. This will be a long, hard and close fought battle that is still to early to say which way it will go. SHADOW are a good tribe but I believe that the Coalition can take them down if we work together.

Play hard, fight fair and have fun :D
[/spoil]

ashiwwru12:[spoil]willettskillz - After the statistics came out in the World 27 Weekly, no more than 2 days after the war had been declared some players were surprised by how the personal statistics of LA-G and Shadow were almost even (5-6).

What do you think contributed to the statistics between your two tribes coming out the way that they did?


ashiwwru12 – This is our strategy which worked. Some of the villages we lost were because of more coordinated activity by Shadow, otherwise we would have recaptured them.

Our strategy we can't disclose openly, but I congratulate my tribe mates for their contribution and achievements.

Luck also favours us because Shadow have limited players compared to "Coalition", and they cant focus all the players at the same time. This is the principle of our strategy before war started. I think you get the hints.


willettskillz - With LA-G's positioning in the world, do you think that having your cluster in K24 away from the fighting is a pro or a con?

ashiwwru12 – Actually our K24 cluster is very much isolated from the center but is contributing a lot in this war.

We have our resources and armies coming from there continuously, so we have a good supply line now and always will have during the war. We are getting help from our positioning in the world.


willettskillz - LA-G has been fighting Shadow constantly since the end of tribe-lock. At times this war went cold but for the most part LA-G, effectively, has lost up until now. Do you think that with the Coalition by your side that LA-G will show better statistics than has been shown in the past?

ashiwwru12 – Yes definitely. We already proved that by our statistics from the 2 days of war declaration. We have destroyed more than 300 nukes of shadow through our defence up to this point. We are also using some new tricks that will help us in future.

Don't forget that we are rank 3 in terms of tribe OD.


willettskillz - Now, please add any more comments that you feel would enlighten the readers of the World 27 Weekly and that will bring our conversation to a close.

ashiwwru12 – We hope that Coalition make a dent on Shadow and that we have a chance to noble their villages one by one.

I have more hopes from our alliance members:

[IRON]-GREAT GOING-JUST CLEAR THE MAXIMUM SHADOW VILLAGES AND NOBLE THEM.

NSTLK*-TIME TO RECAPTURE THE LOST GLORY

LA-G-WORKING HARD TOO. RESULT WILL COME SOON.

TK-NEED DEEP THINKING ABOUT NEW STRATIGIES

FURY-EXPECTED A LOT, WAITING FOR TURNAROUND

DSTLK*- THEY WILL UTILIZE THE TIME AND DO WHAT'S NEEDED.

VS.

SHADOW-ATLEAST THEY ARE LOSING SOME VILLAGES -THAT MAKES US HAPPY AND MOTIVATES US.

ATLAST WE ALL ARE ENJOYING W27-WHICH WAS DULL UNTIL NOW.
[/spoil]

sweeney2kaii8:[spoil]willettskillz - As the leader of Nstlk*'s academy, how do think Nstlk* and Dstlk* have fared in this war since the rest of the coalition has joined in?

Do you think that things will turn around for Nstlk* and Dstlk* soon?


sweeney2kaii8 – I'm not too sure, all I can say is its going to be one hell of a war and it looks to last a while. I think we need a good plan to defeat shadow. I think we may have left it too late. Nstlk* and Dstlk* put together nearly used to be as good as shadow; if we had the "Coalition" with us then I think we would have defeated shadow.

willettskillz - In this war, do you think Nstlk* and Dstlk* will be one of the dominating forces of the Coalition in this war?

sweeney2kaii8 – Yes, Nstlk* are very experienced but Dstlk* won't have as much of an impact as the other tribes.[/spoil]

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

As you can see, hope was high among Coalition leaders. Certainly Gunther is right on the mark when he talks of an initial fear dissolving, to some degree, with the hints from conquers that Shadow could be assailed. Indeed, a poor showing in the first days was not denting confidence, so let’s see how things progressed:

[spoil]

Shadow vs. Dstlk*, FURY, [IRON], LA-G, Nstlk*, TK: August 9 - August 16

Side 1: 172
Side 2: 44
Difference: 128

chart


Shadow vs. Dstlk*, Nstlk*: August 9 - August 16

Side 1: 34
Side 2: 15
Difference: 19

chart


Shadow vs. FURY: August 9 - August 16

Side 1: 29
Side 2: 7
Difference: 22

chart


Shadow vs. [IRON]: August 9 - August 16

Side 1: 12
Side 2: 8
Difference: 4

chart


Shadow vs. LA-G: August 9 - August 16

Side 1: 30
Side 2: 0
Difference: 30

chart


Shadow vs. TK: August 9 - August 16

Side 1: 66
Side 2: 14
Difference: 52

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

Following the early conquers, things began to stabilise in the second week. The element of surprise card was played, and support was moving into position. Those early moments were invaluable to the Coalition, but one cannot help but escape the notion that they were underwhelming to say the least.

Certainly, the second week yielded only slightly more positives. Nstlk* fared significantly worse, but [IRON] fell only slightly behind, and both FURY and TK made far better showings. The worst of the bunch was LA-G who fared even worse this time around and skewed the stats horribly. Its poorly positioned members were helpless against Shadow.

It should not have escaped notice that Shadow was leading against all opponents and that this alone balanced any hope from the Coalition. And yet, the Coalition was improving; it was making conquers, and maybe, just maybe, other tribes could be brought in to tip the final balance.

So what was going on beneath the surface? Well, I can certainly speak for Shadow when I say that morale was on the increase. The onset of so many opponents brought an inevitable shock, but we were still very confident. Once the illusion of the strength of the opponents vanished, it became clear that we were still very much in control. Psychologically, this was very critical to the tribe who had become used to this feeling during preceding wars. With the element of surprise now gone, players were back in the war room, planning operations and seeking to retake the initiative.

I was in little doubt that the South and East would fall easily, and my own operations in the West would soon be striking at the heart of Nstlk* territory. The only real question was hanging over the North. However, some of the most experienced Shadow members were there, and despite having a significant assault to weather, they came out commendably. Having suffered through Feb.13, Nstlk* and now this, they were understandably eager for some revenge. Once we were able to assess where resources were needed and settle into the conflict, it was just like old times, and we were looking forward to the war.

On the other side of the river, it’s difficult to be sure. [IRON] was immensely confident and as outspoken as Shadow on the forum. Nstlk* likewise spoke for itself and was confident that Shadow would simply disintegrate due to the attrition of war. One wonders whether it had mistaken the drop in conquers on that front for Shadow weakening rather than its resources be redirected. TK, LA-G and FURY all seemed immensely quiet about the affair.

Perhaps the Coalition was naively proud of what it had already accomplished in getting so many tribes to declare; perhaps Shadow was grossly underestimating quite the task ahead of it. What’s most interesting is that both sides remained confident of victory in the war, and both stats and analysis were thrown around by each side to support their cause.

Certainly the Coalition had a long term goal to on which to focus. It was hoping that the epic scale of the war and the colossal commitment from Shadow to eliminate all those players would give way to apathy and inactivity, that attrition would emaciate Shadow. It was certainly a very realistic possibility; I spoke to players not familiar with the world and they were always wary of Shadow’s demise, either by internal dispute or the simple loss of players. The loss of any player was a blow to Shadow since they were much larger, whilst the Coalition was less susceptible to it.

But what can be said about the relationship between the tribes? Beneath the possibly rosy exterior, some have commented that the tribes did not get on. I remember someone mentioning that [IRON] made itself quite unpopular by trying to direct other tribes, and was itself bitter about the weakness of other members. Declaring together and fighting a common enemy was one thing, but it seems that genuine cohesion and actual coalition was entirely another.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. Dstlk*, FURY, [IRON], LA-G, Nstlk*, TK: August 16 - August 23

Side 1: 212
Side 2: 16
Difference: 196

chart


Shadow vs. Dstlk*, Nstlk*: August 16 - August 23

Side 1: 89
Side 2: 2
Difference: 87

chart


Shadow vs. FURY: August 16 - August 23

Side 1: 23
Side 2: 4
Difference: 19

chart


Shadow vs. [IRON]: August 16 - August 23

Side 1: 6
Side 2: 4
Difference: 2

chart


Shadow vs. LA-G: August 16 - August 23

Side 1: 8
Side 2: 0
Difference: 8

chart


Shadow vs. TK: August 16 - August 23

Side 1: 86
Side 2: 6
Difference: 80

chart

My commentary from the time follows to give you some contemporary scope on events:

[spoil]There is no way of avoiding the fact that the Coalition has suffered a heavy defeat this week. The difference of almost 200 conquers is a indictment of the seemingly growing disparity between the two sides. Shadow has been victorious on every single front even if by small margins.

Unfortunately, the demise of LA-G and the subsequent dispersal of those members to other tribes has affected the stats negatively for Nstlk* in particular as they have taken in Coalition players whom they would have struggled to help even if they wanted to.

Even so, a reply of just 2 conquers is testament to a heavily weakened tribe in the wake of the formation of REF and the many weeks of war that they have endured. If there were hopes of regrouping after the admittance of some LA-G players to make a stronger Nstlk*, these must surely have been crushed by the loss of SnipeAlott, their largest player and gambitv, both to REF. With many large players in the area having already moved to REF, one must surely expect others to follow suit, leaving the less experienced and smaller players to fend for themselves.

Elsewhere, TK struggle again this week to account for their losses with a meagre six conquers. They also seem to show heavy losses from the very top of their membership , but these players have failed to make the conquers against Shadow which may have been expected in light of their group of large members. It seems that they have struggled with the mantra of leading by example and the tribe has suffered as a result. One would suppose that the only good thing that can be taken from this week is that TK made the most conquers against Shadow.

In the North, it has been a slow week, testament either to excellent defence, or mere apathy or even softer targets. Whatever the case, Shadow will take heart from a lead in the stats here, though the prophet of the North maintains his zeal. Let us hope that the stats for next week are far more interesting…

Chronic underdogs FURY enjoyed another decent week this time around compared with their beginnings. Despite an obvious disparity in conquers, the numbers are small and FURY are seeming to hold together surprisingly well considering the probable lack of experience among the membership.

Meanwhile, LA-G defied expectations of a miserable slide into obscurity and defeat with an unexpected merge into the various Coalition constituents. Unfortunately, this comes too late to prevent Shadow acquisition of valuable core territory and in the wake of the ravaging of their duke – ashiwwru12.

Shadow for their part have shown a strong front this week. With gains on every front and the disbandment of one of their enemies, this has been an excellent week which they shall build upon. It seems that the initial efforts of the Coalition have dwindled, highlighting their disadvantage in having such a low average size of member. While Shadow players can maintain assaults on their own, the Coalition must rely upon coordination between several members; should this not happen, then attacks can turn into incongruous messes.

What is perhaps most interesting is the fact that both sides are still heavily nobling other targets. The Coalition are far worse offenders, and one must seriously be wondering where all of these conquers are going; then again, it is more villages for Shadow to take and a simple war of attrition could be the order of the day. On the other hand, Shadow’s other conquers are at least of large villages, even if there are a significant number coming from internal noblings.

Whatever the case, it has been a strong showing for Shadow and a disappointing week for the Coalition. If this continues, then they simply will not be able to contend.[/spoil]

Source:W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

The first tangible blow to the Coalition came in this week when LA-G were defeated. Shadow had never relinquished its hostile diplomacy against them, but they had been fortunate enough to be allowed to grow in places within Shadow territory; other membership elements were far, far away. Surrounded and cut off by Shadow, its core elements were a mess, falling swiftly to Shadow pressure. Their duke was dismantled swiftly and remaining members in the area fled to Nstlk*, while those spread close to other tribes joined those, and as LA-G dispersed, it was another chapter finished.

It had been a mixed history for LA-G. It had often featured prominently, and did well to survive and rebuild after its first defeat by ATTACK, but it performed woefully in that conflict, and it seems that little was done to change that. Its members were too thinly spread, and it was something of an anachronism by the end.

As August was drawing to a close, the disparity between the two sides was becoming more evident; the Coalition was failing in its mission - it had not delivered. The resulting poor morale was taking its toll on the activity of the tribes within it, and in some cases it fell into a vicious spiral: inactivity begets weakness in a tribe, and weakness begets losses which in turn lead to poor morale and inactivity.

What about REF in all of this? Well, what about them? Despite some very minor skirmishes with Shadow, it had done nothing to arouse interest; it had been inauspiciously quiet. Whilst it was growing well and had moved into second place, it was a sizeable number of players who were no longer fighting Shadow. Its place in the news began to drift.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. Dstlk*, FURY, [IRON], Nstlk*, TK: August 23 - August 30

Side 1: 243
Side 2: 18
Difference: 225

chart


Shadow vs. Dstlk*, Nstlk*: August 23 - August 30

Side 1: 75
Side 2: 1
Difference: 74

chart


Shadow vs. FURY: August 23 - August 30

Side 1: 44
Side 2: 2
Difference: 42

chart


Shadow vs. [IRON]: August 23 - August 30

Side 1: 44
Side 2: 14
Difference: 30

chart


Shadow vs. TK: August 23 - August 30

Side 1: 80
Side 2: 1
Difference: 79

chart

[/spoil]

By the end of August, the story was becoming clear: Shadow was well and truly in front. Every time this had happened before, there had been another tribe to fill the space, to pounce upon an ostensibly weak ATTACK/Shadow, but not this time. Despite alleged pleas to other tribes, help to the Coalition was not forthcoming.

[spoil]Top Ten: August 30

Top Ten Tribes
1 Shadow 56.751.427 65.318.451 63 1.036.801 6667 9.797
2 REF 14.256.781 14.256.781 14 1.018.342 1449 9.839
3 [IRON] 14.143.685 17.574.411 84 209.219 2085 8.429
4 Nstlk* 11.915.902 13.870.277 71 195.356 1594 8.702
5 TK 10.148.444 10.588.762 66 160.436 1270 8.338
6 *TKP* 7.492.369 7.744.981 49 158.061 957 8.093
7 FURY 4.677.342 4.881.718 57 85.644 626 7.798
8 SAM 3.041.834 3.041.834 25 121.673 446 6.820
9 EX 1.879.579 1.879.579 15 125.305 244 7.703
10 SoD 1.741.317 1.873.178 80 23.415 334 5.608

Top Ten Players
1 theSleepwalker REF 2.671.829 260 10276
2 ftw97 Shadow 2.505.885 255 9827
3 Carthon II Shadow 2.436.307 253 9630
4 gerick6 Shadow 2.350.540 231 10175
5 mikestuntz Shadow 2.332.296 230 10140
6 Zarin Shadow 2.201.493 218 10099
7 BrobFellshank Shadow 2.100.718 209 10051
8 Mande1992 Shadow 2.094.770 214 9789
9 filphillip Shadow 2.065.401 216 9562
10 toby7304 Shadow 1.961.142 198 9905

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]
 
Last edited by a moderator:

DeletedUser

Guest
September – Judgement

September was an important month for W27, or rather a conclusive one for once. Any chance of victory was slipping through the fingers of the Coalition. It was time for their judgement, and perhaps that of the world; there could be no more excuses or chances. The war was underway, and we would see who would prevail. In so many ways the events of this month decided the course of the world and set it upon its final path. If Shadow could see off an entire coalition of the largest tribes in the world, what then could possibly be done to restrain it? If Coalition forces could turn the tide of the battle, or even wear down Shadow's war machine, would it be able to usher in a new epoch?

Thus, the first week was a foreboding one for the Coalition when TK, who had been suffering heavily due to inactivity problems and a lack of cohesion, were broken down to form several new tribes. Previously they had taken in much of Dstlk*, and these ex-Dstlk* players in the North-West became UNI, while those in the East became mostly NOS or else drifted off to form a neutral tribe called Trade.

TK as a name was fading, and those who usurped its place were nothing new. It was fast becoming evident that there would be no one to relieve the pressurised Coalition units; despite their attempts, new recruits were reticent to come forward. Indeed, who could be now be found to continue the war?

[spoil]

Shadow vs. FURY, [IRON], NOS, Nstlk*, TK, UNI: August 30 - September 6

Side 1: 191
Side 2: 15
Difference: 176

chart


Shadow vs. FURY: August 30 - September 6

Side 1: 37
Side 2: 4
Difference: 33

chart


Shadow vs. [IRON]: August 30 - September 6

Side 1: 18
Side 2: 7
Difference: 11

chart


Shadow vs. NOS: August 30 - September 6

Side 1: 21
Side 2: 0
Difference: 21

chart


Shadow vs. Nstlk*: August 30 - September 6

Side 1: 89
Side 2: 1
Difference: 88

chart


Shadow vs. TK: August 30 - September 6

Side 1: 23
Side 2: 1
Difference: 22

chart


Shadow vs. UNI: August 30 - September 6

Side 1: 3
Side 2: 2
Difference: 1

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

As each week passed, Shadow was becoming more and more dominant. The stats were fast becoming a farce, with even [IRON] subjected to a savage disparity in conquers. With Nstlk* driven back heavily in the West, Shadow was beginning to focus on its weakest area in the North. The stats were beginning to tell.

Across the board the Coalition's warriors were being beaten back. Any hints of early promise had been neutralised, and many elements were in retreat. Falling so quickly from grace, Nstlk* was looking a shadow of its former self. NOS/TK was the same story it had always been. [IRON] were now struggling to fight on their usual terms, and despite high hopes, were being resolutely denied. FURY, championed for its audacity and success against the odds was finding only limited success against a withering hail of firepower. Only UNI, the newcomers, could boast of anything approaching parity.

Cometh the hour, cometh, in this case, precisely nothing from the Coalition. It had nothing it seemed, to give, beyond its initial rush. The tribes and their leadership were simply not cut out for the protracted war which they faced. Whilst Shadow had a strong band of committed players, poor morale was working at the cracks in the Coalition tribes, and the less experienced members were quick to relinquish hope. No help had come from some tribes. Shadow’s last major test had been overcome it seemed.

Eyes may have turned expectantly to REF, but they too seemed apathetic enough to avoid war. Minor skirmishes against Shadow had revealed little, but the Coalition were busy exhorting them to come to its rescue. But even if REF did act, would it be the force that changed the war? Would it be the eleventh hour miracle that would save W27 from the Shadow?

The world had been slowly waking up to its reality, but September represented the time when it turned back over. Excuses could be made for the early weeks, but as the consistent disparity continued, the denouement of the war and the world was becoming clear. Yet in all of this, nothing changed, no one new joined the war; Shadow pressed on resolutely while the Coalition pursued a war that they could not win.

It’s at this point we take a step back and look at the progress of the Coalition. Its early moves in August had aroused curiosity, but somehow it had never quite delivered the punch it needed. It was revealing for both sides. On the one hand, Coalition members found that Shadow was not the untouchable war machine that it might have seemed; and yet on the other hand, Shadow was made aware of the rifts in experience and skill between the tribes.

I think it was a time when we could shed new light on the formation of the world. As much as we may be unwilling to admit it, many of the competitive elements were gone. The base of experienced and solid players was small in the world, and Shadow, as well as possessing a significant proportion itself, was beginning to remove any who resided outside its walls. The strategic elimination of leadership and experience beyond its frontiers was a deadlier weapon than it had anticipated.

The genius of ATTACK, or its lamentable nature (depending on how you see it) was to unite the better players in the core. In the early wars, it had been pitted against strong opposition with experienced and strong members. Without any significant growth in the world, and with the loss of many players early on, much of the experience in the player base could be found within Shadow.

On top of that, it also had enough members willing to guide others. Certainly for experienced members in Shadow, it was not a significant learning experience, whereas other tribes in this late game had to rely on a much depleted number of gurus as it were, or simply learn alongside their leaders.

[IRON] was faring well because it had players, whilst new to the game, who understood the game, and the cohesion of the tribe meant that members were very keen to teach and help each other. It had also seen conflict, and whilst not properly schooled in the art of defence, had at least worked well coordinating its offence.

TK, however, struggled because it had big players, but not ones who had any experience of conflict. It could make early gains throwing troops at Shadow in surprise attacks, but without any real knowledge of the machinations of warfare, struggled immensely as events progressed.

Much of the solid part of Nstlk* had fled to REF and the remaining elements were plagued by inactivity. Areas that had once been Nstlk* strongholds had fallen to the advance of Shadow, and resistance in the area was fractured into Nstlk*, REF and UNI. Nstlk* lacked real leadership or enthusiasm for the game, given that it was losing player after player.

FURY, whilst being the smallest, had held up surprisingly well. Despite no obviously large or experienced players, it had often managed to score some conquers against Shadow, even if it was losing heavily overall. It was a commendable effort and one that the Coalition should have heeded. Indeed, without almost no discernibly valuable players (relative to its allies), FURY still managed to maintain reasonable cohesion and aggression.

What was perhaps most disappointing about the entire affair was that Coalition players were still conquering plenty of villages … just in all the wrong places. Indeed, so many nobles were spent on ulterior targets that the Coalition was actually gaining more points than it lost from Shadow conquers. At least Shadow could hide its internal nobling and barb hunting under the veneer of its victories!

You may be thinking that the writing is on the wall, that Shadow's assertion of its dominance in the conflict thus far is a prelude to a decidedly one-sided slaughter of its enemies. You'd be wrong. The Coalition may have been moving slowly in the first days of September, but it was beginning to pick up a little momentum, a little fight. Let's see how the story continues.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. FURY, [IRON], NOS, Nstlk*, TK, UNI: September 6 - September 13

Side 1: 149
Side 2: 8
Difference: 141

chart


Shadow vs. FURY: September 6 - September 13

Side 1: 36
Side 2: 2
Difference: 34

chart


Shadow vs. [IRON]: September 6 - September 13

Side 1: 17
Side 2: 5
Difference: 12

chart


Shadow vs. NOS: September 6 - September 13

Side 1: 24
Side 2: 1
Difference: 23

chart


Shadow vs. Nstlk*: September 6 - September 13

Side 1: 60
Side 2: 0
Difference: 60

chart


Shadow vs. TK: September 6 - September 13

Side 1: 4
Side 2: 0
Difference: 4

chart


Shadow vs. UNI: September 6 - September 13

Side 1: 8
Side 2: 0
Difference: 8

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

[spoil]

Shadow vs. FURY, [IRON], NOS, Nstlk*, TK, UNI: September 13 - September 20

Side 1: 129
Side 2: 33
Difference: 96

chart


Shadow vs. FURY: September 13 - September 20

Side 1: 31
Side 2: 0
Difference: 31

chart


Shadow vs. [IRON]: September 13 - September 20

Side 1: 34
Side 2: 33
Difference: 1

chart


Shadow vs. NOS: September 13 - September 20

Side 1: 28
Side 2: 0
Difference: 28

chart


Shadow vs. Nstlk*: September 13 - September 20

Side 1: 26
Side 2: 0
Difference: 26

chart


Shadow vs. TK: September 13 - September 20

Side 1: 5
Side 2: 0
Difference: 5

chart


Shadow vs. UNI: September 13 - September 20

Side 1: 5
Side 2: 0
Difference: 5

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

Looking at the previous weeks, a change was becoming apparent. Shadow was finding it more and more difficult to conquer its enemies; the Coalition was beginning to work out how to make them and how to defend against the onslaught. It's not just [IRON] that demand attention, Nstlk* were redressing their defensive frailties. Suddenly conquers were drying up for Shadow and quite alarmingly at that. A scoreline of 34-33 against [IRON] does not profess any great advantage, certainly not that which was emerging earlier on. The Coalition was fighting back.

Unfortunately, the thing that was giving was not Shadow per se, but rather its attention. Conquers may have thinned against the Coalition, but only so that REF could be given the same treatment. The world's great nepenthe, it was nowhere to be seen. Early skirmishes had amounted to little, but Shadow's decision to up the ante over the fortnight put REF on the receiving end of a surprisingly disparate defeat (84-11).

[spoil]

Shadow vs. FURY, [IRON], NOS, Nstlk*, TK, UNI: September 20 - September 27

Side 1: 152
Side 2: 7
Difference: 145

chart


Shadow vs. FURY: September 20 - September 27

Side 1: 17
Side 2: 0
Difference: 0

chart


Shadow vs. [IRON]: September 20 - September 27

Side 1: 58
Side 2: 5
Difference: 53

chart


Shadow vs. NOS: September 20 - September 27

Side 1: 49
Side 2: 2
Difference: 47

chart


Shadow vs. Nstlk*: September 20 - September 27

Side 1: 17
Side 2: 0
Difference: 17

chart


Shadow vs. TK: September 20 - September 27

Side 1: 6
Side 2: 0
Difference: 6

chart


Shadow vs. UNI: September 20 - September 27

Side 1: 5
Side 2: 0
Difference: 5

chart


Shadow vs. REF: September 20 - September 27

Side 1: 26
Side 2: 1
Difference: 25

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

Rarely are events clear in war. The see-saw of W27's wars was moving again, and the impetus was coming back in Shadow's favour. [IRON] was suddenly blitzed, but REF, FURY and Nstlk* were all making the best of things. It was as if neither side knew exactly how to go about the war, or how to win it. On one side, Shadow's erratic offensives were depriving its advance of any momentum; on the other, the Coalition tribes were struggling to fit together any consistency either.

Admittedly, the general trend of the war remains obvious. Shadow had been ahead at almost every stage in the conflict. Recent weeks may have featured stirring tribal displays, but the holistic picture is one of defeat and degeneracy. This is very much the heart of the Coalition story: single tribes made independent gains; but because the whole endeavour lacked leadership and coherence, these advantages were squandered.

The Coalition had been weighed in September, and the events had found them wanting - the stats prove that. Certainly I would posit that it became clear in September just how wide the chasm between the tribes was. I said it was a defining month; it was. It was a requiem for resistance. With the Coalition unable to make any gains, REF was likewise unsuccessful. That avenue for hope had proven to be worryingly short; early skirmishes had snowballed into something approaching a war, and conquers against Nstlk* had been diverted to REF. A quick addition of the stats for three weeks in September puts the early score at 110-12 in Shadow's favour. REF, it seemed, wouldn't be any help either.

[spoil]Top Ten: September 27

Top Ten Tribes
1 Shadow 65.840.490 72.661.053 58 1.252.777 7380 9.846
2 [IRON] 16.983.848 21.279.388 79 269.359 2457 8.661
3 REF 13.174.967 13.174.967 16 823.435 1352 9.745
4 *TKP* 9.045.164 9.104.650 43 211.736 1104 8.247
5 Nstlk* 8.522.954 8.597.001 49 175.449 992 8.666
6 NOS 6.317.785 6.406.931 50 128.139 787 8.141
7 SAM 4.697.463 4.697.463 30 156.582 660 7.117
8 FURY 3.751.987 3.751.987 40 93.800 474 7.916
9 UNI 2.989.082 2.989.082 22 135.867 395 7.567
10 Trade 2.589.342 2.589.342 13 199.180 309 8.380

Top Ten Players
1 gerick6 Shadow 2.894.993 285 10158
2 ftw97 Shadow 2.863.648 292 9807
3 Carthon II Shadow 2.828.915 296 9557
4 mikestuntz Shadow 2.695.893 264 10212
5 theSleepwalker REF 2.613.593 261 10014
6 Zarin Shadow 2.594.460 255 10174
7 BrobFellshank Shadow 2.572.807 254 10129
8 Mande1992 Shadow 2.459.962 251 9801
9 toby7304 Shadow 2.415.095 245 9858
10 filphillip Shadow 2.294.410 235 9763

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

As September fell away, there was no relenting from Shadow, no mercy it seemed. By the end, the world was beginning to look like a foregone conclusion.
 
Last edited by a moderator:

DeletedUser

Guest
October – The Illusion of Hope

October, October; was it a chance to change the game? Was there still a chance of a glorious counter offensive, a sweeping move of tactical brilliance? Or, were things simply too far gone now to be helped? All the cards were on the table, but not all had been played. Both sides knew that Coalition forces would have to dig deeply indeed to end their plight.

The first event of October was the merge between REF and [IRON]. Combining these two northern entities into one was a sensible decision. [IRON] would benefit from increases to its size, experience and pool of active players. REF would gain new leadership and greater direction. Both sides would be better coordinated and able to assist each other more easily. Warily were many looking at the resulting titan. Hope, it seemed, still lingered.

Up to this point, REF had been a chronic disappointment. Like YGI? and PM before them, they too had failed to live up to expectations when it came to the crunch. As a tribe it had never sparked into life, and the loss of its leader, Maccano1, had forced the tribe to take action. REF had been too cautious and apathetic to make an impact, and it was hoped by [IRON] that, under new leadership, the North would be heavily strengthened and united more or less under one banner. If Shadow could be rebuffed, even just for a week, who could say what it might do for the conflict? REF was brave enough to try something new with its formation, but it didn’t come to fruition for them. Indeed, if the Coalition as it was had succeeded, who knows what might have happened?

With a perceived positive on one side, there came a negative as UNI abandoned the Coalition - the first tribe to do so. It was quite an event, not because they were an integral part to the Coalition, but because it sent a clear message that the Coalition was not working. Bemused, the rest of the world decided to return to the major war.

There is a quotation which says that an enemy is hurt more by desertion than by slaughter; certainly the flaming UNI received for its actions is testament to exactly what other members thought. It underlined the lack of confidence that was ostensible in some of the membership, and Shadow surely greeted the news with an inward smile.

The battle lines were looking a little more like those for which many had hoped. It was only now that the Coalition had decided to become (more or less) one tribe. With structure, leadership and a few dashes of lack, [IRON] could have the right recipe for an upset. It was as if they wanted the conflict to go back to the beginning; on this tabula rasa, the Coalition's hopes would be played out.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. FURY, [IRON], NOS, Nstlk*, TK: September 27 - October 4

Side 1: 146
Side 2: 12
Difference: 134

chart


Shadow vs. FURY: September 27 - October 4

Side 1: 38
Side 2: 0
Difference: 0

chart


Shadow vs. [IRON]: September 27 - October 4

Side 1: 21
Side 2: 11
Difference: 10

chart


Shadow vs. NOS: September 27 - October 4

Side 1: 21
Side 2: 1
Difference: 20

chart


Shadow vs. Nstlk*: September 27 - October 4

Side 1: 52
Side 2: 0
Difference: 52

chart


Shadow vs. TK: September 27 - October 4

Side 1: 14
Side 2: 0
Difference: 14

chart


Shadow vs. REF: September 27 - October 4

Side 1: 26
Side 2: 1
Difference: 25

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

[spoil]

Shadow vs. FURY, [IRON], NOS, Nstlk*, TK: October 4 - October 11

Side 1: 136
Side 2: 7
Difference: 129

chart


Shadow vs. FURY: October 4 - October 11

Side 1: 24
Side 2: 0
Difference: 0

chart


Shadow vs. [IRON]: October 4 - October 11

Side 1: 35
Side 2: 5
Difference: 30

chart


Shadow vs. NOS: October 4 - October 11

Side 1: 46
Side 2: 2
Difference: 44

chart


Shadow vs. Nstlk*: October 4 - October 11

Side 1: 11
Side 2: 0
Difference: 11

chart


Shadow vs. TK: October 4 - October 11

Side 1: 20
Side 2: 0
Difference: 20

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

Despite the manoeuvres of its constituents, the Coalition was falling back into the same routines. Every week it allowed itself to be emaciated by Shadow was another that spoke of defeat. The stats conveyed what they always did, and there were no signs of any changes. It did not matter under which name each tribe fought. The movements of players here and there did little to assuage anything, and with the major Coalition players designated and targeted, much of the fight was ebbing away.

Before we actually go on here, I thought I might offer some of my own thoughts on an unusual time in Shadow such as this was:

[spoil]The stats present a difficult historical problem, mostly because there is little variation and because they are very one-sided. It's a picture that is both fair and unfair. If we measure the strength of tribes only in terms of their relative conquers, we do not get the full picture.

At the time, Shadow is going through a very strong period. It is conquering a large number of village both within the war and elsewhere. Organised resistance is only to be found in the North, and thus Shadow is capitalising at a phenomenal rate. The weaker tribes of the Coalition are struggling to contain even quite basic offensives. There is no real need for precision, so much as weight of numbers to win on most fronts.

As a result, Shadow is entering a mostly universal decline in standards and skill. The big enemies have largely evaporated, and the tender meat of NOS and FURY hardly needs cooking at all. The reason for the stats being as they are is simply that much of the world was giving up. Shadow's enthusiasm for what was a small, uninteresting and slow world was conveyed almost entirely by its desire to win. Without that, it's not difficult to see why a tribe might give up hope completely and surrender.

For many veterans of the game, this is a recurring theme. Poor morale, losses and lack of leadership can all be part of a very vicious downward spiral that can quite easily consume an entire tribe. Therefore, the statistics of the last few weeks paint an unhealthy picture of the world. Many of these tribes were fighting only with a handful of active players. Shadow had targeted most of those who were considered valuable and thus left many tribes wayward.

It's therefore difficult to accurately determine the rift between the rankings. Undoubtedly, Shadow's continued activity and leadership meant that it looked to be improving and winning, even if such things were more symptomatic of the Coalition losing. In fact, Shadow was probably not much stronger than when it fought its first wars. It was winning because it could inflate the stats by nobling inactives, something that its opponents couldn't do.

Bar the North, Shadow was not having to work for its conquers. The tribe was getting fat off of complacency. Arguably, this didn't matter. Shadow was conquering its enemies and that was the eventual goal of the world. But crucially, just as with the first weeks of the war, if a tribe could be found to actively resist it, Shadow struggled.

The real war was now between [IRON] and Shadow. Players on both sides were realising that it required serious thought and that the psychological impact of victory would have ramifications across the rest of the map. The feeling in Shadow was that [IRON] were likely to reinforce their position and redouble their efforts. Thus, gains would be tougher and momentum could not be allowed to falter.

I was wary at the time that Shadow was in the habit of winning; it didn't like to lose. We were up against a very sizeable opponent now that perhaps dwarfed the proportion of our resources that we directed against it. Fighting a lengthy war against a defensively competent tribe filled very few members with anything approaching happiness. And I think [IRON] knew that too.

Presumably they felt that if Shadow could be stalled, then the vicious cycle of poor morale and apathy might leak into its opponent. What if Shadow's players suddenly decided that they could not be bothered? It might seem like a ridiculous method of victory, but Shadow's opponents were very hopeful of the attrition of warfare to bleed it dry. It was very much a case that Shadow needed to maintain its winning ways, or else get dragged into a morass of psychology.

Make no mistake either that winning week after week can lose its lustre too. These are the concerns that can weigh on the minds of a leader. Shadow was a long way from being out of the woods - it still had to noble row upon row of enemy villages. At the time though, the priority was new offensives on [IRON], breaking them down once more. If both [IRON] and REF had been beaten before, what could this new tribe possibly have up its sleeve?[/spoil]

The next weeks would define the world's progress from this point onward. [IRON] had had its chance to redeploy its forces, and the previous weeks had looked conclusive than when either REF or [IRON] fought alone. It was a vindication for all those who had averred that the tribes of the Coalition should have been combined into a larger tribe, at least across broad fronts. Would the fact that it had only been realised now thwart any plans to counter Shadow?

[spoil]

Shadow vs. FURY, [IRON], NOS, Nstlk*, TK: October 11 - October 18

Side 1: 131
Side 2: 0
Difference: 131

chart


Shadow vs. FURY: October 11 - October 18

Side 1: 27
Side 2: 0
Difference: 0

chart


Shadow vs. [IRON]: October 11 - October 18

Side 1: 48
Side 2: 0
Difference: 48

chart


Shadow vs. NOS: October 11 - October 18

Side 1: 51
Side 2: 0
Difference: 51

chart


Shadow vs. Nstlk*: October 11 - October 18

Side 1: 4
Side 2: 0
Difference: 4

chart


Shadow vs. TK: October 11 - October 18

Side 1: 1
Side 2: 0
Difference: 1

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

[spoil]

Shadow vs. FURY, [IRON], NOS, Nstlk*, TK: October 18 - October 25

Side 1: 156
Side 2: 6
Difference: 150

chart


Shadow vs. FURY: October 18 - October 25

Side 1: 34
Side 2: 2
Difference: 32

chart


Shadow vs. [IRON]: October 18 - October 25

Side 1: 76
Side 2: 4
Difference: 72

chart


Shadow vs. NOS: October 18 - October 25

Side 1: 43
Side 2: 0
Difference: 43

chart


Shadow vs. Nstlk*: October 18 - October 25

Side 1: 2
Side 2: 0
Difference: 2

chart


Shadow vs. TK: October 18 - October 25

Side 1: 1
Side 2: 0
Difference: 1

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

[spoil]

Shadow vs. FURY, [IRON], NOS, Nstlk*, TK: October 25 - November 1

Side 1: 139
Side 2: 8
Difference: 131

chart


Shadow vs. FURY: October 25 - November 1

Side 1: 45
Side 2: 0
Difference: 45

chart


Shadow vs. [IRON]: October 25 - November 1

Side 1: 78
Side 2: 7
Difference: 71

chart


Shadow vs. NOS: October 25 - November 1

Side 1: 13
Side 2: 1
Difference: 12

chart


Shadow vs. Nstlk*: October 25 - November 1

Side 1: 0
Side 2: 0
Difference: 0

chart


Shadow vs. TK: October 25 - November 1

Side 1: 2
Side 2: 0
Difference: 2

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

For all the talk of psychological battles, of the potential for the Coalition to turn things around, the stats from the end of October began to wipe away any hopes for resurgence. Behind Shadow’s lead, [IRON] lurked; yet they were falling behind with each day that passed, and their once proud standings in the esteem of their companions was being slowly eroded as they succumbed to the pressure. The story was becoming clear, and the chasm was widening again.

Interestingly, it was the first month in which Shadow possessed more villages than the rest of the top ten, as well as having an advantage in points. In many ways, it is a dizzying statistic, since Shadow was therefore on equal terms with the rest of the competitive world put together.

[spoil]Top Ten: November 1

Top Ten Tribes
1 Shadow 77.988.910 85.325.607 57 1.496.940 8702 9.805
2 [IRON] 28.512.155 37.070.521 82 452.080 4008 9.249
3 *TKP* 10.027.745 10.027.745 36 278.548 1172 8.556
4 FOME 4.811.477 4.811.477 19 253.236 657 7.323
5 GR*FM 4.528.188 4.528.188 20 226.409 551 8.218
6 UNI 4.195.464 4.195.464 19 220.814 521 8.053
7 WT3 3.897.869 3.930.822 49 80.221 528 7.445
8 NOS 2.937.816 2.943.650 43 68.457 403 7.304
9 Trade 2.679.304 2.679.304 9 297.700 348 7.699
10 FURY 1.908.466 1.908.466 33 57.832 261 7.312

Top Ten Players
1 gerick6 Shadow 3.480.481 341 10207
2 Zarin Shadow 3.204.214 314 10205
3 Carthon II Shadow 3.188.254 331 9632
4 ftw97 Shadow 3.164.417 322 9827
5 mikestuntz Shadow 3.072.026 301 10206
6 BrobFellshank Shadow 3.048.149 294 10368
7 toby7304 Shadow 3.023.319 301 10044
8 Mande1992 Shadow 3.013.603 305 9881
9 sstarkey Shadow 2.775.627 281 9878
10 Deciphered Shadow 2.727.741 275 9919

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

Looking down the names, one or two have fallen a long way in a month. Nstlk* is now nowhere to be seen, and its death has come and gone. Some of the membership had left, others presumably headed to [IRON], while others still hid in UNI. It was an ignoble end for a tribe that had once been powerful and illustrious. In so many ways, their fall had been the start of the chain of events that set ATTACK/Shadow on the road to victory. It had been a great tribe in its day, but under pressure, it had cracked. The loss of leaders and an unrelenting fight from Shadow had robbed it of its lustre. Despite a renewed impetus from recruits, the battle in its major areas was lost.

With the departure of major members to REF, much of the core of the tribe was lost and the remaining elements, whether fanatically loyal or generally apathetic were little match for the Shadow advance. Admittedly the game was probably up with the departure of its leaders months ago, but a core had bandied together to try to stave off the worst. Once that departed, its ruin was vastly accelerated.

Nstlk* should go down favourably in history. There was a time when they were strong opponents, and they were a half of the world’s best war. There was potential, there was drive and ambition. In the end, a combination of things overwhelmed the tribe and once they slipped behind, they never regained the upper hand.

In many ways, they spent much time equal to ATTACK, and had the base of experienced and strong players that was crucial. After Nstlk*, few opponents appeared who had real skills, who were real warriors. That war decided which of the tribes of experienced members would survive, and the story could so easily have been reversed. When I look back it always strikes me that if ~AOW~ had joined with Nstlk*instead, the world could look different indeed. Say ATTACK had been overwhelmed, I see a similar set of events like these; I see the same problems faced by the world.

ATTACK/Shadow vs. Nstlk* had inadvertently decided the world – commentators had mentioned at the time that the titan of Shadow which began to emerge might not be stopped because it was beating back what was the best tribe to resist it. So often as is the case, whilst the major elements were defeated and the war was decided, the name lingered on and so did the legacy of defeat. Whatever the case, the name was fading from perception, and only [IRON] and FURY remained as Coalition progenitors.

Elsewhere on the list, NOS had fallen far indeed in the space of a month. They found themselves relegated in the table, and were fast becoming a spent entity. *TKP* had profited from keeping to their own affairs and were comfortably in third. No doubt there were a great many pleas for them to join the fight.

FURY, Trade and UNI were either Coalition members, or had been at some point. Whilst FURY were still fighting, Trade were spared much of the fighting (Shadow was focused on actual enemies) and UNI was hiding away, consumed in its own affairs until Shadow could reach it.

During the month new names were coming to prominence. Much of SAM had become FOME, possibly by taking in one or two Shadow enemies, but the South-West was largely untouched with this tribe establishing itself alongside GR*FM whose meteoric rise into the stats had been a quiet affair. These two compact tribes formed a considerable segment in the South-East, left untouched thus far. Like *TKP* they were staying out of Coalition affairs and leaving the North and East to its fate.

That leaves the enigmatic WT3 who had, like GR*FM, risen into the stats with little notice. Located to the West, they were likewise reticent to fight Shadow and were more concerned with the tension between *TKP* and themselves.

Those whose places were taken fell into obscurity. Nstlk* were a Shadow in more ways than one, and TK had effectively been disbanded. Possessing only a handful of members between them, both Shadow and the war stats would ignore them from now on.

The world at the end of October is looking intriguing indeed. As we look towards the anniversary, marking one year of W27, it is interesting to note the politics of the time. Shadow, comfortably ahead, is still ignored by many of the strongest tribes on the world, themselves desperate either to prolong their existence, or await the inevitable. Old names have faded, and new faces have emerged.

Would Shadow finally be allowed to rampage, victorious, picking off its remaining enemies at will. After all, what more could the world throw at it?

November – LIGHT and Shadow

As November began, we witnessed a momentous event for W27 with the formation of a new northern tribe, marking the de facto end of the Coalition. I talk, of course, about LIGHT.

Nothing special was posted on that end at the time, but maybe that is an illustrative point itself - few now cared. But the main question really is why. Well, [IRON] was crumbling, awash with inactivity, apathy and a lack of clear direction; LIGHT was an effort to change all of that. Together with UNI, [IRON] formed LIGHT as a massive northern tribe, a supposed bulwark against Shadow.

Admittedly there are no prizes for the choice of name, but the ethos was there, or at least players hoped it would be. Did anyone at the time really think it would effect momentous change in the world? Certainly one would like to think that LIGHT held out great hope for its future, that there existed a lingering fight within the tribe.

However, the notion that the time for unified and firm resistance had come and gone cannot be escaped. Had we not already observed a northern bulwark with the merge of the REF players? The immensity of talk and posturing belied the nature of the stats, and another merge and name change merely perpetuated the turbulent morale cycle of Shadow’s enemies.

By this time, it really is a poetic case of LIGHT vs. Shadow, and the ostensible evil of that pairing looking set to triumph, being significantly larger. The great defenders of the world, the warriors of the light, arrayed against the seemingly implacable march of dominion and shadow.

Across so many battlefields, with the chill of winter already threatening to claim the bodies of the unburied dead, the resistance would renew their fight against impossible odds, against enemies who had lapsed so far into legend that few were sure if they were mortals. The sounds of a million men marching to war across the dying leaves would shake the walls of every fortress in that accursed land. The beacons of the North were already charred wrecks, but no one had come. More and more villages were lost to the South and East with every day that passed. The North would stand alone.

The Coalition is in ruins, a brave endeavour, but one doomed almost from the beginning. The two largest tribes are locked in a conflict for the northern parts of the world, while a motley assortment of neutral tribes spectates. Slowly the Shadow is expanding across its enemies, but coordinated resistance by a set of tribes is a whimsical anachronism. Old enemies are hollow remnants, and as LIGHT forms its last stand, the rest of the world does nothing.

Where did it all go wrong? Well, the first thing to be said about the Coalition was that is was a brave move. Bandying together a set of tribes, in laudable secrecy, to take on a significantly larger opponent is worthy of praise. The idea and the early execution were worthy of congratulations indeed. It was always going to be a case of doing the best with the available tools; Coalition tribes simply did not possess the preponderance of experienced players to devise and execute the machinations of that victory.

Many constituents lacked experience in protracted warfare and many were largely bereft of real direction or ideas. Perhaps the fear of players in taking on significantly larger players (particularly when such things resulted in massive retaliatory action!) was a factor also. Shadow managed to establish itself as the dominant force, and many of their enemies got forced onto the defensive far too easily.

It’s nothing against those tribes, whose leaders functioned commendably under the circumstances, but they were up against large, experienced players while they, themselves, were backed with smaller, less experienced players. Other advantages needed to be sought, and notable absences in membership combined with a general apathy meant that the total fighting force of the Coalition amounted to something far smaller than the picture the stats portrayed.

The corollary of that was an ill prepared fighting force that lacked the strength to make any significant gains. [IRON] and Nstlk* were deluged with players willing to throw themselves in, but other tribes were plagued with apathy. As such, the both of [IRON] and Nstlk* tried to maintain offensives whilst they defended, and this was far more successful than the very passive defensive displays of their allies.

Add to this the fact that Shadow had recovered substantially from the Nstlk* war, and the picture is very different what it might have seemed. On the one hand, the Coalition was declaring on a tribe which had been at war for months, which would fight in almost every side and would be inferior in size and numbers. On the other hand, Shadow was deceptively fresh and faced an enemy whose points were mostly smoke and mirrors.

I wouldn’t say that the Coalition was weak, nor would I say that Shadow had it easy, but mostly that appearances were deceptive. In those early moments, the expectations of the Coalition were unrealistically high, and when it didn’t come to fruition, morale plummeted. Without early gains in most areas, momentum faded and was almost entirely lost. Enthusiasm is wholly valid, but one senses that the full content of a long war had never been considered by many who signed up.

In all honesty, it seemed as if much of the Coalition had given up quite quickly. Bitter fighting that made Shadow pay for every conquer simply evaporated in most areas quickly. When it became apparent to Shadow that much of the Coalition was dead weight, the war was lost.

Because of the variation in activity, aggression and points among the players in the Coalition, it became very obvious which were the priority targets. Likewise, the public forum was an excellent place to identify the leaders of the tribe and punish them. The big guns in the arsenals of TK and FURY fell very quickly to the correct pressure and the tribes suffered as a result.

[IRON] fared far better because their leaders were harder to get to and because the war featured offensives from both sides. As the only tribe to maintain momentum, [IRON] enjoyed some success. If that sort of organisation and aggression had extended to the rest of the Coalition, then the fight would have been a very different story.

Conversely, Shadow's leaders were too large to be heavily threatened. With many players possessing clusters spread across several continents, eliminating a single player was never a real option for its opponents. Its main leaders were in comparatively safe locations, and with the correct delegation, the command structure was difficult to disrupt. The tribe was used to taking losses in the early weeks of the war; there was no panic. Things moved efficiently and the threat was stopped. The difference in experience became clear very quickly.

Looking back, the Coalition was the right idea, but it was poorly timed and poorly executed. Had it come earlier, I think the story would be very different. Yet, by the time we reach somewhere useful and appropriate, most of the tribes don’t really exist. Striking the balance between preparing members and growing with the Nstlk* war was a tough call, but the impetus of K25PG/[IRON] earlier in that war would perhaps have evened things. It was something Shadow feared at the time.

Whilst times are speculative, much of the rest of the reason for the failure of the Coalition lies in its execution. The plan was right and though tardiness might have been an issue, they did well to keep it practically secret from Shadow. Yet, when it came to the crunch, valuable members were not persuaded, and only a fraction of the tribes’ members partook in the offensive element.

Maybe with hindsight it is too easy to say what should have been, but the underlying message after the Nstlk* war was that experienced and aggressive players were few and far between outside of Shadow. If many of those larger accounts had possessed veteran members who had learned from experiences, who understood the game and could remain firm under pressure; then, Shadow would have had a war on its hands. As things fell, most of the good players either left during the tribe lock or were eliminated in early wars, leaving Shadow with a large core of strong players, and perhaps an equal number spread far and wide among enemy tribes.

The Coalition needed visionaries, it needed players who could lead by example and who could teach. It needed those reliable players in a tribe who could be counted upon to remain steadfast, to make the hard yards and to persevere. Feb.13, [IRON] and Nstlk* all had those, and tribe members heeded the example. Other enemies saw their largest players giving up immediately and being outclassed - they panicked.

Often that is the pattern of wars on this game, where it is not so much about nobling out entire tribes or even players, but destroying their resolve. Nstlk* and Feb.13 fought hard until the leadership collapsed. When it did so, the rest of the tribe failed to rally and fell asunder. ATTACK/Shadow was always fortunate because its leaders stayed, or were replaced smoothly. Whilst it lost leaders after Feb.13, it picked up new ones in ~AOW~.

On the Coalition side of things, [IRON]’s leaders led by example and performed commendably. Admittedly, many did not seem right on the borders, but they weathered the usual storm of long range attacks and the tribe held together as a consequence. On the other hand, TK suffered because its largest members practically shut down after they came under attack, and there was no one to push the tribe forward.

In many ways, one can see that the way that tribes endured and performed is related to the positioning of their leaders. Both Feb.13 and Nstlk* had leaders on the frontlines; they were players heavily in the firing line and were at the centre of the war. It’s the same story with LA-G in the beginning, and LA-G at the end; they were positioned so awkwardly that their leaders were always going to suffer.

If we look at ATTACK, whilst albrew5 was on the frontline (and ended up leaving), Ephette was comfortably positioned and was not a viable target for enemies. Much of their remaining leadership was spread out and could not be easily removed. Likewise, the addition of Mande1992 from ~AOW~ gave another leader comfortably positioned. In addition, the 'leaders' were those who led by example in the wars, and Shadow was blessed with no shortage of these. These hauled Shadow up from modest to exceptional. LIkewise, [IRON] was in a similar boat for the early war and thus endured.

Nstlk*, in the early war with ATTACK, had three leaders under constant attack who thus found it difficult to both fight and lead. TK had a similar problem, though they needed their largest players to lead, and these were the ones that came under fire first. It is evident in all the conflicts, not just those of the Coalition, that leaders were needed for tribes, and not just one, but a veritable core; when this collapsed in tribes, the rest of it soon followed.

Closing the book on the Coalition now would not perhaps be technically correct since some members were still fighting simultaneously, but the real conflict was between LIGHT and Shadow. Effectively, the Coalition was finished. It had failed. Hopes for resistance were no longer owed to the harlequin of the Coalition, but a single plucky entity that was the last hope for the free world.

Let’s have a little look at how things were shaping up in those first couple of weeks. Tribes will now be treated individually, given that the Coalition is dispersing. Some faces have faded and some have come to the fore:

[spoil]

Shadow vs. FURY: November 1 - November 8

Side 1: 49
Side 2: 0
Difference: 49

chart


Shadow vs. [IRON]: November 1 - November 8

Side 1: 45
Side 2: 1
Difference: 44

chart


Shadow vs. LIGHT: November 1 - November 8

Side 1: 26
Side 2: 1
Difference: 25

chart


Shadow vs. NOS: November 1 - November 8

Side 1: 7
Side 2: 0
Difference: 7

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

[spoil]

Shadow vs. FURY: November 8 - November 15

Side 1: 35
Side 2: 0
Difference: 35

chart


Shadow vs. [IRON]: November 8 - November 15

Side 1: 22
Side 2: 0
Difference: 22

chart


Shadow vs. LIGHT: November 8 - November 15

Side 1: 32
Side 2: 2
Difference: 30

chart


Shadow vs. NOS: November 8 - November 15

Side 1: 4
Side 2: 0
Difference: 4

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

At the time I saluted LIGHT trying something new with the caveat that abandoning both Nstlk* and [IRON] effectively put those accounts out of the war. The formation of LIGHT made it quite clear where the activity in the tribes was - the rest was a selection of inactivity and apathy. The result was a streamlined enemy, but one that ran the risk of exposing itself to Shadow pressure, while the meat shield of inactives was overlooked.

Despite this new configuration, things had scarcely improved. Overall conquers from Shadow were down, but the warriors of the Black Rose had been troubled little by enemy incursions. LIGHT had pulled together its allegedly active and offensive elements, leaving behind a small tribe of players asking to be nobled. Shadow certainly seemed happy to add an easy lustre to the stats, but LIGHT was not stepping up to its task. the eponymous promise of resistance was beginning to look farcical in the face of the stats. Other elements were faring no better. Nstlk*, TK and NOS looked largely forgotten as enemies whilst Shadow focussed on the easy pickings of [IRON] and FURY (who had miraculously endured). Hope against Shadow was dimming by the day.

You’d be forgiven for thinking that this was all that was occurring in the world. It wasn’t. To the West, *TKP* and WT3 were squaring up after disagreements, and an early skirmish saw *TKP* make gains on a WT3 player. Indeed, WT3 had struck against a solitary LIGHT player some days earlier, and some awry diplomacy was being undertaken on that end.

[spoil]

*TKP* vs. WT3: November 8 – November 15

Side 1: 20
Side 2: 0
Difference: 20

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

It wasn’t all a stage merely for Shadow, and these happenings spoke of a world not entirely given over to inactivity. *TKP* had always commanded a certain conspicuity by their absence in the world's conflicts; surely the time had come and gone for their impact to be significant? Other elements were biding their time, and as the world passed its yearly anniversary, on Friday 13 curiously enough, Shadow remained dominant.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. FURY: November 15 - November 22

Side 1: 26
Side 2: 0
Difference: 26

chart


Shadow vs. [IRON]: November 15 - November 22

Side 1: 22
Side 2: 0
Difference: 22

chart


Shadow vs. LIGHT: November 15 - November 22

Side 1: 25
Side 2: 1
Difference: 24

chart


Shadow vs. NOS: November 15 - November 22

Side 1: 9
Side 2: 0
Difference: 9

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

The next week passed quietly, with the usual wars lending far fewer conquers than usual. *TKP* and WT3 were posturing, and despite tensions, no war was declared. It was one of the quietest weeks for some time and the usual weekly story of statistics passed with little incident. Either Shadow was growing tired of war, or its enemies were finally turning things around. It was the calm before the storm.

As we moved into the last week of November, frayed tensions in the West spilled over into a war. Conquers were swift, and a martial side of *TKP*, hitherto unseen, became evident. *TKP* was put firmly in the lead. The gains made a fortnight earlier were compounded by a solid week, and it might not be unfair to suggest that it was looking more interesting than conflict in the North.

[spoil]

*TKP* vs. WT3: October 29 – November 29

Side 1: 72
Side 2: 18
Difference: 54

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

In the background, spectators could just make out the renewed assault against LIGHT. After a quiet week, Shadow was back in business and targets were shifting. Inactive [IRON] were no longer the desirable cuisine they once were, and no doubt the drop in conquers the previous week was due to Shadow having to look to tougher targets. The last week saw a return to form and the same story being broadcast.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. FURY: November 22 - November 29

Side 1: 6
Side 2: 0
Difference: 6

chart


Shadow vs. [IRON]: November 22 - November 29

Side 1: 5
Side 2: 0
Difference: 5

chart


Shadow vs. LIGHT: November 22 - November 29

Side 1: 47
Side 2: 1
Difference: 46

chart


Shadow vs. NOS: November 22 - November 29

Side 1: 39
Side 2: 2
Difference: 37

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

Whilst Shadow spent the last week of the month looking strong against its opponents, totals were once again not what they had been in previous months. Their total for the week, some 192 villages, was a poor showing. Even Shadow it seemed was not immune to apathy. Conquers against LIGHT had picked up after the slow previous week, but things were still shaky and perhaps the attrition tactics of its enemies were paying off.

The addition of NOS to proceedings after a considerable time out of the limelight was another interesting move. Two targets were clearly in Shadow's long term plans. Nstlk*, conversely, would find themselves included in the stats for the last time this week, and [IRON] was more of a grave for inactive players than a tribe; spectators still lurked, and the possibility of changing the game lingered. *TKP* had shown that they were capable of fighting, and a merge between *TKP* and WT3 could well have been on the cards.

Untested enemies festered too; the South East continued to grow unchecked in FOME and GR*FM, whilst a new tribe appeared in the North West by the name of Theory and a new one right in the North by the name of BIP. New dramatis personae on the stage, while not necessarily a cause for alarm, asserted that LIGHT was not the final test. Shadow's greatest fear, boredom and apathy, lurked more dangerously than ever. Chinks were apparent in its armour and well executed offensives on new fronts might just be able to prise them open to a significant size. If Shadow could really be pressed, who knows what those so accustomed to victory might do?

[spoil]Top Ten: November 29

Top Ten Tribes
1 Shadow 86.005.757 93.405.873 58 1.610.446 9509 9.823
2 LIGHT 30.473.301 38.014.677 77 493.697 4093 9.288
3 *TKP* 12.084.693 12.084.693 38 318.018 1409 8.577
4 FOME 7.615.147 7.615.147 21 362.626 939 8.110
5 NOS 5.505.118 5.548.981 48 115.604 725 7.654
6 GR*FM 5.504.208 5.504.208 21 262.105 687 8.012
7 WT3 4.890.247 4.943.627 49 100.890 671 7.368
8 Dawn 2.459.934 2.830.050 89 31.798 544 5.202
9 Theory 2.316.065 2.316.065 32 72.377 317 7.306
10 BIP 1.177.705 1.177.705 13 90.593 160 7.361

Top Ten Players
1 gerick6 Shadow 3.663.667 358 10234
2 Zarin Shadow 3.599.112 353 10196
3 toby7304 Shadow 3.531.331 357 9892
4 Mande1992 Shadow 3.516.753 354 9934
5 mikestuntz Shadow 3.513.033 350 10037
6 ftw97 Shadow 3.396.805 345 9846
7 Carthon II Shadow 3.238.775 336 9639
8 Deciphered Shadow 3.194.795 320 9984
9 filphillip Shadow 3.183.118 342 9307
10 BrobFellshank Shadow 3.168.940 305 10390

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

As the stats closed up, Shadow was still on top, but it was looking more vulnerable than it had in some time. A new chance, a new opportunity had arisen; maybe, just maybe, the world could seize it.
 
Last edited by a moderator:

DeletedUser

Guest
December – Ultimatum

December began with an interesting picture. Shadow were firmly on top against their rivals, but all, it seemed, was not quite rosy. Poor showings in recent times were leaving their opponents enough hope to continue. Without the ruthlessness to close out the contest, enemies could maintain their stand. Neutral tribes still waited in the wings, and a vast of sea of enemies was arrayed around them.

Perhaps though, the greatest manoeuvres were taking place out of sight. The shrewd games of those tribes not yet declared were leaving a veritable plinth for rumour and susurration. Indeed, as December began, Shadow would enact one of its most controversial measures.

An ultimatum was delivered to the leaders of FOME and GR*FM, the fourth and fifth ranked tribes respectively. The content follows below:

[spoil]
Ephette said:
Greetings members of the leadership of FOME and GR*FM,

We have watched, with interest, the progression of your tribes, and are now bringing forward a proposal to see what our neighbours are really made of.

We would like to increase our membership in the South-East area, so our first question would be: are you interested in merging into our tribe?

Working on the basis that this would be of interest to you, our next point is this as follows: we are only looking to take in a limited number of people, and thus, we need some means to choose a tribe.

This would be decided by you. It is a chance to show the world what your tribe can do and being evenly matched in points, both sides should have an abundance of troops, so what better opportunity to put those troops to work?

There will be no interference from us in this war; when there is a clear victor, the winning tribe will be incorporated into our membership.

If neither tribe wishes to battle with the other, there will be a public declaration from us against your tribe on the forums.

Regards,
Shadow Leadership

Source: Public Forum

[/spoil]

It is curious that Shadow's wishes to be defender of honour in the world were tarnished in this way. Perhaps Shadow’s power had gone to its head; but the proposal, when it did finally come into the knowledge of the wider community several weeks later, was not well received. This ultimatum was designed to speed the end of the world, to relieve the beleaguered Shadow before it submitted to the attrition that was beginning to set in. Recognising the weakening resolve in the face of adversity, it had acted. One cannot deny the arrogance in its inception, even if the intention was good. Suffice to say, it left a question mark over whether Shadow was willing to fight any more tribes.

However, the stats for that first week closed up propitiously for Shadow. A few shaky weeks gave rise to a resolute offensive and perhaps a message to those who might think of fighting it:

[spoil]

Shadow vs. FURY: November 29 – December 6

Side 1: 6
Side 2: 0
Difference: 6

chart


Shadow vs. [IRON]: November 29 – December 6

Side 1: 19
Side 2: 0
Difference: 19

chart


Shadow vs. LIGHT: November 29 – December 6

Side 1: 122
Side 2: 3
Difference: 119

chart


Shadow vs. NOS: November 29 – December 6

Side 1: 19
Side 2: 0
Difference: 19

chart

Source:

[/spoil]

I also have a handy map now to put things into perspective:

[spoil]
Top Tribes: December 6

top5tribes.jpg

Shadow
LIGHT
*TKP*
FOME
GR*FM


Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

From the stats, Shadow looked to be back in control. LIGHT suffered heavily, and its other allies fared poorly. With LIGHT rapidly being spoken for, and FOME and GR*FM mulling over Shadow’s words, only *TKP* remained completely out of affairs. Its conflict with WT3 seemed to have come to a halt and it was yet again content to leave the rest of the world to its fate. Even so, the world as a whole was still unwilling to settle, and all the signs pointed to more conflict, more upheaval, and more for me as a news reporter to write about.

Despite the pretentious nature of Shadow’s ultimatum, GR*FM, were willing to play ball. Only a few days after the deal was put forth, a reply came. It was to be good news for Shadow:

[spoil]
TarynAshley said:
Ephette,

I have given your 'proposal' a great deal of thought. First, I would like to share my personal opinion of your ultimatum. I take offense it. I find it appalling that you are of the opinion that with just your suggestion, FOME and GR*FM are expected to be your puppets and dance at the end of your strings for your amusement. If it were my decision, I would readily tell you where you can put your 'proposal'.

Unfortunately, the decision is not mine alone to make. My co-Duke, Sboh, my Barons, and the entire tribe have a stake in the outcome. Therefore, I decided that the final answer would be based on a vote where majority wins. To my surprise, my tribe wants to fight our ally, FOME. It appears several of them, including Sboh, have been looking for an opportunity to do this. I find it dishonorable, but I will stand by their decision.

With that said, the timing needs to be taken into consideration. We are ennobling one of our larger players, although that is nearing completion. My real concern is the holidays. Several players will simply not be available during that time, and I will not put the responsibility on the account sitters who have graciously agreed to stay on. Therefore, no assault will commence until after the new year.

I trust you will find this to your liking.

TarynAshley
Dutchess of GR*FM

Source: Public Forum

[/spoil]

FOME were typically sanctimonious and gave a rather different perspective on events. It was the style of rebuttal that might have been expected from such a tribe given their gaping ideological rift with Shadow:

[spoil]
Styv said:
Hello.

First, we appreciate your kind words and even the fact that you have noticed us. We, being a small rim tribe, did not think ourselves worthy of your curiosity.

We find your suggestion to determine the champion of the southeast interesting. FOME and GR*FM have generally been friendly to each other. Like all growing tribes, we have had issues of territory and trust. We in FOME are grateful that somehow we get past them. At the end of every difficulty, our friendship has grown. As for a match between our two tribes, though, the thought is intriguing.

We decided to conduct a cost benefit analysis of your suggestion to see which way we should go. We chose to compare the possible victory in the southeast, against a friend, to the opportunity to join your tribe.

The cost in troops and territory, assuming we won, would be great. I assume GR*FM would fight hard and well. Should we win, it would be a protracted war and we would be weakened by at least 2/3rds. The cost to our tribe in Honor would be greater still. What friend, when given an ultimatum from a powerful foe, would attack a friend. We would be choosing dishonor over honor. Our tribal spirit would be destroyed.

We tried to find some benefit to joining your tribe, but really couldn't come up with any. No one in our tribe has ever thought about or had any aspirations to be in Shadow. Unlike some other tribes, we can respect you without wanting to be you. Although we have some good friends in your tribe and would have fun warring with them, after we join, there would be no one left to war with. Your tribe's only benefit to us, from the outside looking in, is its size. Size may matter to you, but from the beginning, our tribe has never had intentions on world domination. We are large in spirit. Territory and treasure are less important to us that to others.

So, I am afraid that your offer was simply not good enough. Had you come up with some actual benefit, we still would not have chosen your path since nothing you could have offered would compare to keeping our word, defending Honor, and being good neighbors.

I do not know what tactic GR*FM is going to take. I do not know if they will be responding, what their response will be or when they will respond. Should I see massive incommings from their tribe, I will know they chose to fight us. If I see your declaration in the forums, I will know that their response was similar to mine.

I pray for wisdom in your deliberations. I know that I may have offended you with this correspondence. It was not my intention and I apologize in advance if I did.

Thank you for this exercise. It has allowed our small, inexperienced tribe the opportunity to discuss matters of great import.

Your servant...Styv

Source: Public Forum

[/spoil]

It’s one unhappy duchess there and a duke that is enigmatically sycophantic, yet cutting at the same time. However, a decision was forthcoming, and it was one that boded well for Shadow. Whilst it might have been an ugly move, two potential enemies were removed in one stroke. Thinking GR*FM could be left to surprise FOME, Shadow turned its attention elsewhere; the war preparations of GR*FM left Shadow free to ply their resources into other fronts, simply allowing the carnage to unfold. The South-East was seemingly secure from those two, and Shadow’s dominance was moving up another notch. Other enemies would soon be feeling the brunt of extra resources, while southern areas could be left undefended.

Indeed, what is perhaps even more unbelievable is the set of events that followed the next week. Buoyed by its diplomatic manoeuvres against GR*FM and FOME, Shadow would take another step on the path to victory with the announcement of its final recruitment drive. With attrition threatening to claw away its dominion, even in spite of dealings under the table, fresh blood was needed to oil its war machine. *TKP* would be the target. In an unexpected move, Shadow prised away many of its best players (as well as one or two from WT3) and left the tribe a broken shell - leaderless and splintered. In the space of just over a week, Shadow had removed three powerful enemies and had not only secured one healthy batch of recruits, but would have another on the way soon.

The last piece of December's jigsaw is what happened in the interim. Whilst GR*FM replied that it would acquiesce the offer, FOME was remaining entirely defiant about the affair. Their annoyance and scepticism of the offer repulsed any offers. GR*FM was no doubt waiting for a surprise offensive, and Shadow was not about to ruin that; yet FOME pressed Shadow for a decision, expecting a declaration upon them. With each side appearing to have a course of action ready, a tense peace descended on the entire area.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. FURY: December 6 - December 13

Side 1: 17
Side 2: 0
Difference: 17

chart


Shadow vs. [IRON]: December 6 - December 13

Side 1: 19
Side 2: 0
Difference: 19

chart


Shadow vs. LIGHT: December 6 - December 13

Side 1: 108
Side 2: 1
Difference: 107

chart


Shadow vs. NOS: December 6 - December 13

Side 1: 0
Side 2: 2
Difference: 2

chart

Source:

[/spoil]

Moving through the middle of December, Shadow looks far more comfortable in its position. The pattern of the first week was largely being followed, though the remarkable victory of NOS is worthy of mention. Given the opportunities, its enemies would still make the yards. [IRON] and FURY have both seen better days, offering little now to the war. LIGHT were struggling again, particularly after the introduction of *TKP* members, widening the front significantly and bringing more players to bear.

Now larger and more focused that ever, Shadow could afford to thoroughly outnumber and overpower its enemies. News in the following week murmured something about Theory and WT3 merging, but nothing short of a Christmas miracle was going to extricate LIGHT who took yet another savage tumble.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. FURY: December 13 - December 20

Side 1: 18
Side 2: 0
Difference: 18

chart


Shadow vs. [IRON]: December 6 - December 13

Side 1: 0
Side 2: 0
Difference: 0

chart


Shadow vs. LIGHT: December 6 - December 13

Side 1: 146
Side 2: 8
Difference: 138

chart


Shadow vs. NOS: December 6 - December 13

Side 1: 10
Side 2: 2
Difference: 2

chart

Source:

[/spoil]

Christmas was looking to be an enjoyable affair for Shadow. LIGHT was firmly on the back foot, despite commendable efforts to finally make conquers. Elsewhere, other enemies were mere fragments of what they had been and the new membership in Shadow was proving to be of great significance, bringing in large totals for conquers and keeping activity high. Eyes turned to the South-East once again, and promises made were brought to the forefront of many minds.

But as the snow was falling on W27, things couldn’t pass without incident. Once more Shadow was set upon by surprise; Merry Christmas indeed from the South-East. As the first of the Christmas breaks came to a close, war was begun earnestly in the twilight of the year.

And in that moment best laid plans went up in smoke. There went the tidy ending to the year that would have completed things for Shadow. GR*FM had never had any intention of attacking their neighbours in FOME; they wanted a far more prestigious scalp.

[spoil]
TarynAshley said:
Greetings,

I wanted to send this just to the players we are sending fakes to, but it looks like many more of you are responding by sending your men to say hi, so I really did not have time to sort it out completely. But this way I can say hi to you all..

By now you realize that GR*FM is attacking some of your players. Believe me, I never wanted it to come to this. However, your Dutchess put us into a corner, and I was not willing to stay there.

For those of you that are unaware of the situation, Ephette gave FOME and GR*FM an ultimatum. Either we fight each other or Shadow would declare war against us. Based on the trend of her past 'proposals' with other tribes that I have spoken with, the winner of this conflict has not, in the past, been welcomed into Shadow. Rather, in their weakened state, their villages joined Shadow, not their players. In addition, I do honor my alliances and would not attack them, as FOME would not attack us. I found out today, after the attacks, that we had a NAP with you? This was never shared with me,but it is of no matter now anyway.

So, my hand has been forced here. We welcome you to join us, although I know you will think this foolish. We will not declare war on Shadow, we are just eliminating any potential threats. This avenue would not have been pursued, as I have made friends with several of you, but I have not been left with any other options to protect my tribe.

So, a friendly sparring is what I will look forward to. It is what the game is all about after all. And this brings to mind David and Goliath...lol. However, we will do our best to make this challenging for you.

I hope you all had a Merry Christmas and look forward to a Happy New Year.

Respectfully yours,

TarynAshley
Dutchess of GR*FM

Source: Public Forum

[/spoil]

GR*FM had thrown their lot into the game, and Shadow, taken by surprise, was caught off balance, woefully unprepared. A short window loomed before the second break, and it seemed that their plan to eliminate Shadow villages within their area was working well:

[spoil]

Shadow vs. GR*FM: December 27 - December 29

Side 1: 7
Side 2: 30
Difference: 23

chart

Source: Public Forum

[/spoil]

Shadow, for the first time in many weeks, was firmly on the back foot. Taken completely by surprise, GR*FM had rolled into its villages easily, and Shadow was struggling to get to grips with the onslaught. This was a well-organised, highly motivated tribe. Perhaps though, it was the sheer tenacity, the recklessness of the plan that inflicted the most grievous wound upon them. Foolishly they had believed that GR*FM would make good their word, and had thus ignored the area. But GR*FM had never been for fighting FOME, they simply wanted one last throw of the dice.

[spoil]
Sir-JesusJuice said:
Ephette, the information you were sent via mail was to mislead you. That was the only way we could prepare ourselves to attack Shadow. It was not meant to betray you, it was just our desire to survive and do what we wanted to do.

Also, the decision from the Vote you were sent was different to the one that instead occurred. This is a copy of the poll that was taken in a shared forum thread with FOME and GR*FM:

[spoil]Who's killing who?
What do you want to do in this dilemma?

Fight GR*FM/FOME
2 Votes (7,14%)

Fight Shadow
20 Votes (71,43%)

Fight for the right to Paaaaarrrtyyyyy (or to fight Shadow on our own terms)
6 Votes (21,43%)[/spoil]

As you can see, the tribe voted for war on Shadow after all. But if we had sent you this information back then...You would most definitely have attacked us. FOME also contributed to the votes, of course.

You are also missing another key piece of information, GR*FM is not looking for world domination...God knows where you got that idea. Everyone on W27 knows by now Shadow has won this world. It's just a matter of time. The coalition didn't stand a chance, Light didn't stand a chance, and we don't stand a chance. All we're doing is having a bit of fun before this world ends.

So we hope everyone is having a good time. I know those of us in GR*FM are.

Yours Slim01 ~ Head Baron Of GR*FM

Source: Public Forum

[/spoil]

Both sides struggled to maintain their honour; the accusations flew from side to side, and somewhere in that messy conflict, the end of the year was about to bring an ethereal and transient peace to the affair. GR*FM had made impressive early ground, but the element of surprise was surrendered, and the attack break would allow Shadow to prepare for the second wave. The world watched as the plucky tribe stood up to the behemoth and won a great victory in those early days.

FOME, for their part, remained oddly distanced from the affair. After all, GR*FM were the only tribe making attacks, and FOME seemed to pass by those first days unmolested. War, it seemed, could never be on their agenda.

On the other fronts, the earlier break had slowed Shadow, but the last week still closed up with Shadow comfortably ahead against LIGHT. Despite the disparate sizes, much attention was being paid to GR*FM, and LIGHT was looking to be spared damage in the weeks to come.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. FURY: December 20 - December 27

Side 1: 4
Side 2: 0
Difference: 4

chart


Shadow vs. LIGHT: December 20 - December 27

Side 1: 64
Side 2: 1
Difference: 63

chart


Shadow vs. NOS: December 20 - December 27

Side 1: 4
Side 2: 0
Difference: 4

chart

Source: Public Forum

[/spoil]

With the year coming to a close, peace reigned once again across the snow covered lands of W27. In the North, LIGHT was smarting from its recent blows, but looked far from resisting, far from dismantling its bleak past. In the West, newcomers Purge were making their home, whilst *TKP* continued to slide into obscurity; the newest members of Shadow were acclimatising to their new identity. To the South, FURY were all but finished, and attention was fully focused on events in the South-East where GR*FM were making their brave stand. In the East, news likewise came mostly of GR*FM and the armies marching to war.

The fires of combat were still burning as the footsteps of a world's warriors began to be hidden beneath the snow. A cold peace descended upon the world, and the year’s denouement had been its most shocking engagement. The coming year would bring yet more war, and W27's story was far from over.

We’ll finish up with some maps and rankings captured at the end of 2009:

[spoil]
Continent Dominance (Tribe): December 31

Map1.jpg


Top Tribes: December 31

Map2.jpg


Continent Dominance (Player): December 31

Map3.jpg


Top Players: December 31

Map4.jpg


Top Noblers: December 31
Map5.jpg


Top ODA: December 31

Map6.jpg

Source: Updating Maps on night of December 31

[/spoil]

January – One Last Throw

As new light dawned on World 27, seismic shifts were underway in the South. The surprise declaration from GR*FM came together with that of FOME. Shadow had not just one new enemy, but two. Wasting no time, a larger GR*FM emerged from the union of the two tribes, planting its standard firmly in the foothills from which the sun rises and waited for the reckoning that would come with the dawn.

From every snow covered turret and every misty expanse that stretches across the vast swathes of Shadow land, the warriors of the Black Rose sought a new enemy. In their pride, they had underestimated this latest foe, something that had proved their undoing in the early engagements. Burgeoning as their enemy was with new warriors, they knew that there would be no swift end.

The plan of GR*FM had an element that was both a great strength and a great weakness. They had struck neatly, between the Christmas and New Year breaks; and their early surprise, combined with the reprieve of the second break, had allowed them to make significant gains. Unfortunately, while they had a precious respite to consolidate their gains, so too did their enemy have a chance to draw breath.

Now, as the war began anew, and the old paths, lost through the harsh winter and days without use, began to be trodden again; the Shadow war machine was coming to life once more. A defiant refutation was unlikely, given the ill prepared nature of the front, and Shadow’s decision was to dig in and halt the GR*FM offensive while their own units could be diverted that way.

The assault had been tenacious. It had been swift, surprising and damaging to Shadow. The loss of 50 villages here and there might not be a significant blow in the context of Shadow's size, but the real menace came in the psychological matter of its execution. A tribe they might once have disregarded had shattered their entire perception of the rest of the world. What would follow if other tribes fought with such tenacity and aggression?

At the very least, Shadow knew that they had to cut their losses and to grind out a win as quickly as possible. Leaving the problem to fester would be a propaganda disaster that it couldn’t face, even if the chance of losing the battle itself was slim indeed. LIGHT were already waking up to this new reality, knowing that they too had a chance to punish Shadow while its resources were divided. Could others likewise be found to arrest the world's defeat?

Perhaps in its many months of dominance, Shadow had grown too proud, too complacent in its status. Ill prepared were its members for the strength of defiance that still glowed in the hearts of its enemies. Notions about winning and losing might do well to be put aside; this was about a statement of defiance, about showing Shadow that it did not have the authority to do as it pleased.

Intention, however, is one thing. The compulsion of military force is entirely another. I wish I could tell you that propriety and intention come above the baser acts of military force, but World 27 is no fairytale world. With Shadow prepared, and their resources in place, the lifting of the break began to move things away from GR*FM.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. GR*FM: December 27 – January 3

Side 1: 38
Side 2: 38
Difference: 0

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

As you can see, there was a dead heat in the first major set of weekly stats. The breaks had interrupted much of the fighting, but the early gains of GR*FM left them only 3 conquers ahead in the grand scheme of the war. The cards were dealt, and the point had been made, but now the grinding of the war machine began to drown out the defiance of their sentiment.

Elsewhere in the world, players watched eagerly to see if the other tribes would follow the lead of GR*FM. Unfortunately, the South-East was but one small sector of the larger Shadow front. Numerous, larger Shadow players, too distant from the GR*FM war, were only too happy to continue to notch up their victories against other opponents.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. LIGHT: December 27 – January 3

Side 1: 75
Side 2: 3
Difference: 72

chart


Shadow vs. NOS: December 27 – January 3

Side 1: 2
Side 2: 0
Difference: 2

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

It seemed that the unfortunate apathy among Shadow’s opponents could not be so easily shifted. LIGHT was becoming deeply troubled by problems with its own morale and activity, and the other enemies were vanishing as major players in the world. GR*FM were left well alone as the centrepiece of the encounter. Undoubtedly there were some who might have hoped for this to be the Stalingrad of the Shadow advance. As it was, this author recalls the bitter anger of Shadow against those who would dare to surprise them. Unsettled by the early assault, Shadow had steadied itself during the break, glad to even the score. The cracks were not appearing.

Indeed, long time enemies FURY had melted away over the later weeks of 2009. So far had they fallen that they were off the maps at the end of the year. Some players had moved away to other tribes, or else had left the game entirely. Shadow's interest was squarely on GR*FM, and the loss of FURY from proceedings was an ignominious one. It had been a tribe of great spirit and wisdom in joining the Coalition, but it had lacked the real size and experience to trouble a much larger opponent. As such, its combat record will not do its activity and courage justice.

It might have been replaced by GR*FM, but it was becoming clear the world was running out of tribes to save it. Most of the North was opposed to Shadow, if only in name, but the losses of rivals like *TKP* and FURY were pieces of a sinister jigsaw that spelled out world domination. The chance for the rest of the world to act was slipping away. Perhaps it was already lost.

Shadow's reckless assault on GR*FM was surely not the prettiest of affairs, but it brought with it all the fury with which they had been struck. As the war entered its second week, the true test of GR*FM would come.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. GR*FM: January 3 - January 10

Side 1: 77
Side 2: 15
Difference: 62

chart


Shadow vs. LIGHT: January 3 - January 10

Side 1: 80
Side 2: 4
Difference: 76

chart


Shadow vs. NOS: January 3 - January 10

Side 1: 4
Side 2: 0
Difference: 4

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

All in all, commentators made a great deal of the war at the time. When the stats are presented thus, it makes GR*FM seem nothing more than a blip in the long history of Shadow dominance. To present it as such may well be a mistake.

I call upon a personal experience of mine. As I do so, you have to remember that Shadow was in an unparalleled position in the world. For months it had grown accustomed to sweeping victories against opponents, particularly now that the spine of many enemy tribes had been broken. I remember, around that Christmas period, watching over some of the accounts in that region and seeing the incomings counter rise on an account. Thinking it to be a mistake that a handful of attacks should come in from GR*FM and noting that they were still some time from arriving, I duly prepared some defence, sent off a mail to the tribe's duchess and logged off for the evening.

It never entered the mind of this author that they might be about to make war, that these few attacks were the beginnings of a timed offensive. I think, more than anything, this demonstrates the sort of complacency that had crept in. Of course, when I woke up, much hell had broken loose, and I realised how wrong I had been.

The war was one of the most bitter. Both sides were ideologically opposed to their opponents, both felt that the other was deeply mired in wrongdoing. For Shadow it was a nasty mixture of wounded pride, shock and even a little envy. For GR*FM it was wounded pride too, a desire to teach Shadow a lesson and to leave with dignity.

Rarely, I think, do tribes make their moves on the strength of principles when such endeavours go against every instinct for self preservation. There will be many who comment that this war should have come earlier, when Shadow was weaker, and its enemies more numerous. Although the opportune moment is something of a subjective idea, the comment is fair. GR*FM never joined the Coalition, nor did FOME. Imagine what may have happened had they brought this sort of firepower to bear on Shadow. Things could have been so different. But for any accusation of poor timing, GR*FM should be consoled by their notoriety; they became the benchmark by which opponents were measured.

Those other opponents, for their part, had continued in metronomic form as always. With FURY having shrunk almost to nothingness, they were left out of proceedings for the month. The same would soon be said for NOS, leaving only LIGHT as a major contender. With an almost predictable resignation, the war in the North did not falter, even with renewed offensives in the South-East, and Shadow made ground once again.

The later weeks of January saw the full cost of the war against Shadow told on GR*FM. I remarked at the time that history seems to repeat itself. A tribe declares upon Shadow and though its early conquers engender some hope, the tide turns, and that tribe is hounded to extinction.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. GR*FM: January 10 - January 17

Side 1: 55
Side 2: 10
Difference: 45

chart


Shadow vs. LIGHT: January 10 - January 17

Side 1: 46
Side 2: 0
Difference: 46

chart


Shadow vs. NOS: January 10 - January 17

Side 1: 1
Side 2: 0
Difference: 1

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

[spoil]

Shadow vs. GR*FM: January 17 - January 24

Side 1: 52
Side 2: 6
Difference: 46

chart


Shadow vs. LIGHT: January 17 - January 24

Side 1: 44
Side 2: 5
Difference: 39

chart


Shadow vs. NOS: January 17 - January 24

Side 1: 1
Side 2: 0
Difference: 1

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

The two weeks that followed saw heavy blows dealt against GR*FM. With Shadow having been so heavily focused on LIGHT, the realignment of the great war machine was slow indeed. When it arrived, whilst it may not have been the decisive hammer that might crush such a comparatively small tribe, it was nonetheless grinding out another victory. Conquers against LIGHT had slowed a little, and NOS seemed to be quite forgotten amidst proceedings.

[spoil]
Top Tribes: January 24

Tribes2401-2.jpg

Shadow
LIGHT
*TKP*
GR*FM
NOS


Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

A perusal of the map at the time really garners the scope of the conflict engulfing the world. Shadow can now purport to stretch from one side of the world to the other. The other tribes are pushed to the fringes of the world and have to resist along vast fronts. It also gives a great weight to the strength of opposition against Shadow. By rights, there is very little hope for the other tribes, given those vast expanses of Shadow territory; but equally, those tribes will not yield one inch of territory without a fight.

We are poised at a time when that endgame is on the horizon. Unmatched, not only in its size and strength, but also in the experience of its members, Shadow has a very real chance at complete victory.

At the time, some commentators were wary that Shadow might suffer a similar fate to other tribes that had attained such power within a world. Too often the novelty and enjoyment wear off long before that victory is ground out. The more ambivalent and exciting wars are passing into history while the slow attrition of enemies is what lingers on the horizon.

Simultaneously, the character of the tribe is changing. It begins now to rely on a smaller core of the members to see out the large majority of the conquest. Its enemies are conscious of the struggle for their own unity against an enemy, while the insularity among Shadow’s membership grows. As a tribe grows larger, members become more independent and the reliance on the tribe diminishes. A loss of cohesion can lead to fragmentation, to rivalry.

Admittedly the coercion of an entire tribe into a single-minded entity that seeks a common objective is rather impractical. However, the loss of fear, and onset of complacency that was returning with GR*FM being overcome, detracted from the bondage of mutual security that holds together a smaller tribe.

A lot is made of the egos of those involved. When a tribe in this position breaks down, it is the people, rather than the situation, that is always the factor cited. It’s not difficult to see that, with the negative cohesion from fear of the enemy removed, the unity of the tribe focuses heavily on the individuals involved. No longer is there an outside threat to bring members together.

If they have already taken to working in their corner of the map with their neighbours, what real need do they have for the rest of the tribe? If they feel that they are the ones making all the effort, what animosity will be wrought towards the other members? The subtext of the unfolding months was that its greatest enemy could turn out to be itself. Unequalled, Shadow still had to be wary.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. GR*FM: January 17 - January 24

Side 1: 76
Side 2: 16
Difference: 60

chart


Shadow vs. LIGHT: January 17 - January 24

Side 1: 84
Side 2: 2
Difference: 82

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

The final week saw victories on both fronts; Shadow’s pressure on GR*FM was paying great dividends. The tribe was one of great dissimilitude, with certain members deep thorns in their enemy's plan and others as soft targets. On balance, the acquisition of so many players in FOME was not wholly beneficial for the statistics.

Fighting was picking up again in the North. LIGHT would not surrender, but their attempts to renew any offensives were being severely hampered by the incongruity of the tribe. Any chance to maul their oldest enemy while it fought elsewhere was evaporating. Shadow had survived a tough test in GR*FM, far tougher than either side might have expected, but they had not been found wanting. I leave you with the picture of the world as January fades:

In the North, the fighting rages on. The comforting totals of the statistics have done much to calm the disquiet at the arrival of GR*FM, and those looking for easier conquers have returned to the conflict against LIGHT. As work on repulsing enemies from K44 begins, so too does the front seep into K34, into the stronghold of LIGHT. K35 and K36 remain as stale as ever, both sides stacking heavily to nullify any push on that front.

But in K33, the rapid flanking manoeuvre against LIGHT is paying off, striking at villages far from the front. The new recruits from *TKP* are being put to good use. With other fronts eliciting few gains and Shadow looking unlikely to press against the front in the East, this could well be the deciding factor in the advance; attention must surely focus here.

To the West, *TKP* lingers on as a force, ever watching and waiting, but crippled by its losses to Shadow. Smaller tribes mete out an existence, and some fight their own wars. Purge and Bella eschew the common enemy of Shadow and fight among themselves on matters of principle, but it is a wasted sideshow for an audience hypnotised by the growing monotony elsewhere.

To the South, the embers of FURY are gone, and the front moves to focus on the newcomers of GR*FM. Shadow’s main bastion in the South-West can eagerly deploy to counter this new threat, and can be content in the stronghold wrought there.

To the East and South-East, the great din of fighting can be heard. Shadow, though lacking in finesse, can nonetheless begin to bludgeon the much smaller GR*FM to death. It is the mix of experience among the minnow ranks accounting for the disparity in the stats, with the weaker players being sought as easy targets for Shadow’s wolves, while the defensive bastions are simply blitzed with as much firepower as can be wrought. With all advantages of surprise surrendered, the relative sizes and strengths can begin to tell.

[spoil]Top Ten: January 31

Top Ten Tribes
1 Shadow 105.595.504 123.149.296 70 1.759.276 12439 9.900
2 LIGHT 31.941.282 34.308.034 64 536.063 3633 9.443
3 *TKP* 9.783.606 9.906.596 49 202.175 1236 8.015
4 GR*FM 8.960.352 8.960.352 27 331.865 1065 8.413
5 NOS 4.880.498 4.880.498 40 122.012 605 8.067
6 Dawn 4.081.461 4.593.638 79 58.147 733 6.267
7 Purge 3.733.889 3.733.889 35 106.683 545 6.851
8 Bella 3.212.997 3.212.997 30 107.100 435 7.386
9 -DC- 2.276.725 2.291.909 49 46.774 367 6.245
10 BIP 1.774.652 1.774.652 26 68.256 221 8.030

Top Ten Players
1 gerick6 Shadow 5.283.841 513 10300
2 Zarin Shadow 4.775.089 468 10203
3 filphillip Shadow 4.334.195 453 9568
4 mikestuntz Shadow 4.275.496 424 10084
5 Mande1992 Shadow 4.271.681 429 9957
6 ftw97 Shadow 4.247.181 432 9831
7 Deciphered Shadow 4.233.595 415 10201
8 BrobFellshank Shadow 4.230.403 417 10145
9 sstarkey Shadow 4.122.885 418 9863
10 stampcoin Shadow 3.391.946 340 9976

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]
 
Last edited by a moderator:

DeletedUser

Guest
February – Beginning of the End

The first week of February would see one of the most unpredictable tactical decisions ever taken played out on the battlefields of W27. With Shadow settling down to a slow conquest of GR*FM to add to their grind in the North, it seemed as if they would either ride out their victory by slowly wearing down their opponents, or would fall apart and toss every occupant of the world back into the sort of steaming crucible that hadn't been seen since last February.

So far, so predictable. However, GR*FM didn’t see it like that. The week had yielded an unusual ease to the conquest of Shadow, with GR*FM players not rushing to their defence as they had always done. Something was clearly amiss.

Perhaps it is the case that a certain defeat is better brought to its conclusion swiftly, rather than allowing the inevitable to fester with the stench of loss. As the torches were burning into the night of February 6, the armies of Shadow related a quick bizarre set of circumstances. The enemy forces had disappeared. Where once the proud banners of Grim Freedom had stood, now did barbarian rebels make home in those settlements.

Grim Freedom’s statement had been made. Content with their early gains, and perhaps unwilling to see out the remainder of the war, they left with their heads held high, or their tails between their legs (depending on the version to which one subscribes). In one evening, a significant hurdle to the sovereignty of Shadow had been removed.

The conflict itself had been an interesting one. From the early surprise and the tenacious daring of their advance to their unpredictable demise, it was a conflict like no other. Few, if any, other opponents aroused as much respect from Shadow as GR*FM.

A tribe of no great size had stood up for its beliefs; they had faced off against a colossal opponent and had seized more ground and more initiative than they had any right to. Admittedly, it was their surprise and speed that edged them out in the early encounters, but it was never the case that GR*FM stopped taking Shadow villages.

Shadow did admittedly take many, but the numbers for GR*FM certainly put LIGHT to shame. The hope that they would simply roll over and give up was a foolish one for Shadow to have. Their dogged defence left a decidedly bitter taste in the mouths of Shadow players, and perhaps more damagingly, the threat to their reputation had been evident. Whilst their arrogant disregard might have ceded to a grudging respect, an outsider might well wonder why such a disparately small opponent would give so much trouble.

We arrive at the great question surrounding this conflict. Of all the conflicts in the history of Shadow, this one stands out because it went against the expectations of those involved to such a great extent. Why should such a comparatively small, and up until that time unremarkable, tribe fare so well against the great power of W27?

I leave it in the hands of some comments and commentaries at the time. One or two more bits of information might just be required for context:

[spoil]
[spoil]
TarynAshley said:
I will take my leave now and fade out of W27. This will make many of the Shadow players smile with delight, because I will not be here to take anymore of your time attempting to take me down. Any players that managed to take a village within my cluster, did so after I stopped playing after all, but good for you. As always, it has been an eye-opening experience.

Source: Public Forum

[/spoil]

[spoil]
winvarwen said:
This is my first post to a TW board, and very well may be my last, and it will be long, sorry, skip it if you like.

First to TarrynAshley, I hope you get a chance to read this. As far as opponents go the only one I've faced in my four worlds that is in the same league as you is konarkg (and that is presuming that he was a single player). You certainly seem like a genuine person and please understand that the reason I didn't communicate to you more is a couple fold. 1) I have to allocate and prioritize my time and I must give my time to my tribe-mates before I give it to opponents. 2) I don't trust myself enough to not accidentally give up valuable intel in a pleasant conversation to engage in one.

Certainly what little contact I have with you and via Silverwolf I am sure that you are a very caring individual who wants to just have fun in this game. Please understand that I hold you in high regard.

The GR*FM/FOME war is in many ways the most poignant engagement that I have been in, and it is so for reasons that continue to escape me. So first I feel the need to discuss it in detail where I have not felt inclined to for the other wars I have been in.

With the world well in hand Ephette, Dutchess of Shadow made an offer to GR*FM and FOME. Have a war, decide who's best, then when the fighting is over we will induct the survivors into Shadow. Oh, and by the way, if you don't we will declare war on both of you.

That said, let's talk about the leadership of the tribes involed and specifically where they failed.

Ephette: I am sorry to say this, but if you really wanted a GR*FM/FOME war, that was the wrong mail. It said everything that needed to be said, but it needed to be said differently.

TarrynAshley/Styv: You were presented with a gift. You were offered, in a world that has been decided, to be allowed to test and hone your skills against a roughly equal opponent, without intervention of the dominant power. The only one that you should be worried about. And you spazzed, you both chose to take insult rather than inquiry. All you needed to do was to ask for clarification, but you didn't. You both said "My Honor" won't allow me to fight "My friend", which makes sense, since you didn't bother to ask WHY was Shadow going to declare war.

Winvarwen: I should have sent the damn e-Mail. I knew that, presuming that my Dutchess actually wanted a GR*FM/FOME war, that it was the wrong one. So I drafted a mail to send to Styv (and then I would have sent a similar one to TA) explaining what the offer was, since they obviously didn't understand the true spirit of the offer. But Styv's interview with the newsletter convinced me that he had no desire for any conflict, friendly or otherwise and so the mail went unsent. OK I'm an idiot too.

Honor:

As a point of honor, honor and truth are consistent, they are not mailable. If you are to say, I am fighting you because I am honorable and you are dishonorable, then for you to maintain your honor, you must conduct yourself in an honorable fashion, even if your opponent is not. (In this I am *not* saying that Ephette conducted herself dishonorably. I'm saying if HITLER were the one hosing you, you still need to be honorable to be considered so.)

If you take umbrage to an opponent telling you, hey, do what we want or we will destroy you. Oh, and by the way it will be on this date. Even if the opponent is completely dishonorable in action and deed, you cannot strike first without warning AND maintain honor. Just so ya know. What a dissapointment.

Leadership:

Leadership is not measured by your accomplishments, but by the accomplishments of those you lead.

If Ephette had but one village I would station half my troops there, because what she gives to the tribe exceeds anything that those troops would be worth. I do not know TA well enough to know whether she is a good leader or poor. That she is the largest member of her tribe actually speaks against her, but that (at least in my case) she lead the assault and let her brethren take the villages speaks for her.

What I do know, is that I would not trade one for the other. Leadership is more than just one dimension and Ephette has proven herself to me in every dimension that I could conceive to test. She is a servant leader and should be commended as such, not degraded because she isn't the biggest fish in the pond. About the only thing she lacks is a little tact. I can live with that, even if it means I have to take a month out to engage someone I should not have been at war with (TA).

The War:

Unlike the Feb.13 war and the first "Coalation" war. The war with GR*FM was never in doubt. The whole course I mean. GR*Fm was a very tight group. TA in particular had her villages very close to each other. Shadows member are spread all over the place. I'm all over the place. Not only that but I had most of my troops on long range missions when GR*FM attacked. This gave GR*FM a tremendous short term advantage.

The initial losses were inevitable. Especially given the lack of warning (though 24 hour warning would have done very little for me anyway). After the initial triage of the losses however comes the support -- lots of it -- Shadow is not dominant without reason. Teamwork is the reason, supporting your tribe mate even when it may be inconieniant is the reason. Then once the bleeding stops the counter attacks begin. Sadly (and I keep doing this which annoys me to no end) I/we tried to be slick, and that failed. TA was just too tight, it was too quick and easy for her to move her troops.

I am no General Lee (American Civil War General for the South, generally considered the most brilliant general of the war), I am a General Grant (they guy who defeated Lee, only because he was too obstinate to quit when he lost) and eventually I went back to my ways and just started pounding her until she pretty much ran out of troops. And that was when she quit. She was going to start losing villages, and it was going to be a lot, and it was going to be quick.

TA I laud you, you did a great job defending, and you did so knowing that the inevitable was going to happen, and you stuck it out far longer than any opponent I have met, and certainly longer than I would have.

I just wish, that in your role of leadership, that you would have taken the road of clarification rather than insult, because I am certain that GR*FM would have succeeded over FOME and that you would have become my tribe-mate rather than my enemy.

God bless you in all your future endeavours.

Sincerely (no wax)

Winvarwen
Don Rollins

Source: Public Forum

[/spoil]

[spoil]
Silverwolf008 said:
Ladies and Gentlemen it is my great pleasure as a member of Shadow to say that GR*FM has breathed its last and departed. I do have something to confess to each of you, which I am sure will not endear me to the esteemed leaders of my great tribe who I hope are able to see where I am coming from in what I say here.

Now firstly let us get the statistics out of the way, upon the day of writing this the 2nd of February they stand thus: Shadow 313 conquers to GR*FM’s 96 a difference of 217 conquers to Shadow. Those stats scream Shadow’s dominance. But this reporter is here to tell you that Shadow did not win this war, GR*FM left on their own terms and with heads held high.

Those of you who just choked on your Coffee, no I am not being held at gunpoint by TarynAshley or any other member of GR*FM forcing me to write this. As someone who viewed this War from the front lines – as always – I can honestly say I am completely and utterly impressed with GR*FM and if I was a member of such a tribe I could scarcely be prouder.

Some of you are probably going: “What happened to the Wolf that bites?” Well the thing is with that, I only bite back when bitten first. Some of Shadow’s best and brightest slammed GR*FM and still they defied Shadow, still they stood with backs straight refusing to be brought to their knees.

TarynAshley the leader of GR*FM should be commended as one of the greatest players and leaders in the history of W27. She refused to budge and fought back constantly slamming Shadow in each of its attempts to win. The stats here agree with me – Shadow 43 conquers to TarynAshley’s 51 in reply, a difference of 8 in TA’s favour.

Whilst Shadow’s Generals will be remembered longer and held in a loftier place in the echelons of the Tribal Wars Greats, (as they should be) TarynAshley should be remembered by each of you as the greatest General to bring arms against Shadow.

Some of you will call GR*FM’s mass delete and departure cowardice. Those who do are sadly incorrect, you see GR*FM never declared war and only ever sought to keep what was there’s already.

Although they were on the downward spiral towards oblivion one must ask themselves: why did it take over a month to get to this point? The answer I think may well lie in Shadow’s dominance of this World. Shadow certainly cannot have taken their opponent’s seriously.

When the war began Shadow was ten times the size of their enemy. I think it would be fair to say that Shadow not only weren’t frightened, but that they expected a massacre to occur. In some places it clearly did, 313 conquers is no mean feat, but when you compare the retaliatory conquers (96) Shadow only beat their opponents by (according to my calculator) 3.26 times the amount of conquers.

This hints at an apathy gained by weeks before hand of the incompetency of LIGHT and other such weaklings who have consistently failed not only to defend well against Shadow but to send retaliatory strikes.

It is somewhat ironic, but not entirely discouraging from Shadow’s point of view, that they found their match in a small Southern Tribe. Shadow can take heart now that they have complete and utter control of the South and have merely to clear the villages GR*FM and Company have left behind.

They can now turn their frustrations, anger and disappointment from a relatively unsuccessful Southern Campaign and bring their full force and might to bear against LIGHT. You may note that whilst I have not been kind to Shadow in these past paragraphs I think it would be fair to note that Shadow has much more to offer than this and I am relatively certain that this conflict will have awoken them again.

I almost feel sorry for LIGHT who will undoubtedly face Shadow’s full wrath in the coming weeks and months. Shadow can also take great solace in the fact that they are a few miles closer to becoming the first tribe to complete a world.

So I say farewell to TarynAshley and GR*FM, congratulations you stood up to a giant and to a certain degree: you won.

By Silverwolf008

Source: Public Forum

[/spoil]

[spoil]
Zarin said:
If anyone had money on this, well played; well played indeed. One cannot deny that it has been an interesting conflict, one that has been unique compared to others. And yet, so similar too, the early promise, the slow mobilisation of Shadow and the final attrition until there is but one consequence. I am conscious that this may well be the last word on matters and I shall be as balanced as I can be in an assessment of this war.

It is by no means a tale of woe for GR*FM; there has been much to praise too and as I begin at the top, I think perhaps some plaudits are in order, and not of my favourite sarcastic variety, but a genuine tipping of the hat to at least one player who held their own with an admirable spirit. A lot has been said of TarynAshley on this forum and it is to her that this author, with the authority of many esteemed Shadow players, extends his praise.

Indeed, considering the relative sizes of the opponents, it is testament to GR*FM that they held their own and refused to give in when Shadow repaid their injuries as the New Year began. Yes, Shadow began to take hold in the statistics, but that is a fraction of the picture. Here we had a tribe who were putting up a fight; one can imagine that it was a rare delicacy for Shadow and one which they relished.

But I think what is most striking about the war is that despite the early discrepancy between the tribes; this author can say that there has been a grudging respect proffered to GR*FM members, the original ones that is. In some ways, it highlights all facets of the game - both sides are guilty of a less than honourable path (honour and ethics debate to come soon) and there was perhaps an unnecessary dislike on both sides but it gave way to a rigorous conflict, albeit a short one and a respect from both sides.

On the other hand, without TarynAshley and one or two others, the rest were meagre and inferior to the average Shadow player. The integration of FOME was a disaster and in fact FOME itself was a chronic disappointment, highlighted by the humour with which GR*FM received the opinion that they were equals. Strip away a reasonable beginning that was to be expected and you have a tribe who quit whilst they were ahead, or rather, whilst people still remembered good things.

Their sneak attack was well planned, but as the war progressed it became apparent that many members were unwilling to bear the longevity of the conflict and the weak links were soon found and exploited. There was little plan or direction about the war; once villages within their sphere were assimilated the vast sea of Shadow could not be effectively tackled. This author assumes that the point was a final act of defiance, a blaze of glory to print their name upon the history of W27. All admirable this author supposes, but a final act nonetheless.

So it is that I have difficulty making up my mind on this conflict. On the one hand, we have a defiant enemy, a demonstration of great skill and leadership and a genuine challenge to Shadow that has been lacking for so long. On the other, I see a deluge of meek members who hid behind the kudos of a few excellent ones and who, by losing villages, painted a poor statistical picture and brought about a defeat and who had no chance of victory but quit before Shadow could make it so.

It is obvious that there was no intention of victory, nor an entertainment of its attainment, by the mass delete of GR*FM players. Some of us hoped that they would fight to the last man, something to truly admire, but alas, fighting Shadow is a wearing activity.

It comes down to the funny idea of victory. It is reasonable to suggest that a sea of barbarian villages is no legacy to be expressly proud of, but perhaps there is something elusive about an enemy that is not properly beaten. By all rights Shadow wins; war, after all, does determine who is left. Yet, GR*FM left on their own terms as it were and one cannot deny that a fight must have lingered there somewhere, or was it a case that their troops lay defeated and they dissimulated to save themselves the ignominy of being nobled?

In 73CE, a Roman legion breached the walls of Masada. They would find all of its inhabitants dead, having committed suicide rather than face death at the hands of the Romans. Whilst it was done on their own terms and they were spared the humiliation of execution and enslavement, the Romans still had captured the fortress and with minimal losses; it was a victory for Rome because the enemy were gone.

And that is what Shadow will take from this. Not only are they victorious, but they have attained a victory with fewer losses than if GR*FM had stayed around. The resilience of GR*FM was admirable and they have done themselves no disservice in their acquittal. They should be proud of the fight that they engendered and can be confident that they exceeded expectations. It seems that both sides will gain and that is perhaps the greatest victory that can be had. For Shadow, who remain, it is another enemy laid aside on the path to domination; it may not be the end of the world, but perhaps we can see it from here.

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

[/spoil]

GR*FM are gone. The South-East seethes with barbarian villages and Shadow’s wounded can brush the dregs of the conflict under the rug. A collective sigh of relief can be heard reverberating around its many camps. In one moment, Shadow’s victory has leapt far closer to its execution. The grudging admiration of the world can gradually come to compensate for the early embarrassments, and the presage of victory can redress the psychological impacts of the conflict.

The hole left by GR*FM is never to be filled by another tribe. While one or two linger in that region, the vast majority of resistance has been crushed and Shadow’s project of colonisation begins in earnest. That is, after all, what they do best. With another buttress of the enemy resistance dismantled, efforts can truly focus on the North. The monumental task facing LIGHT is warped further; the path of Shadow grows clearer; the fruit of victory hangs lower than ever before.

The rest of the world forms a rather uneasy third wheel to the ensuing conflict. Collectively, they total just over the mass of LIGHT and perhaps a third of Shadow. This chapter is so named as the beginning of the end because it is precisely that. With another opponent gone, the scope of a simple North vs. South conflict becomes painfully obvious, and the asymmetry is more obvious still.

In a period of two months, Shadow has cast off its vulnerabilities, both through astute manoeuvre and through good fortune. The last enemy gambit, though strong in its early moves, ultimately came to nothing. For its enemies, hope is proving hard to find, and it was at this point I sought out those remaining leaders to comment on the remaining fate of the world.

[spoil]
Shadow
[spoil]
Ephette:

Would you care to outline how your tribe has come to this point?

Shadow has been a tribe at war since the beginning of the game. After tribe lock ended, we became ATTACK. The history of our tribe through these stages has been discussed in various places. After the merge with AOW we became Shadow, war with Nstlk* followed, then with the Coalition.

Where did the name of your tribe come from?

Following our merge with AOW, we held a competition to come up with a new Tribe name, to reflect the new tribe that we had. Shadow was the winning entry.

What do you see as the strengths of your tribe at this point in time?

We have a long history together, and have therefore built up a good working relationship with our tribe members. There is a lot of trust, and a great willingness to work together towards the goals we have set for ourselves.

What are your goals with your tribe?

We are currently working towards seeing the end of this world.

Do you have any wisdom that you have gained in your time here that you would wish to impart?

Get a good group of people around you, who you can bounce ideas off. Be willing to listen to others, everyone has something to offer.

What do you see for the future of your tribe?

We will continue to clear the world of all the red dots.

Do you have any regrets in your tribe's decisions?

Hindsight is wonderful thing. There are no major regrets, but if I could do it again there are probably some things I wouldn't do. Sorry but I can't elaborate on them.

What did you think of the Coalition?

The Coalition was a marvellous opportunity that never happened. They had the people, they just didn't have the willingness. A sad disappointment, but on the other hand they will probably be remembered longer than some other tribes that passed through this world and left it untouched.

What do you think of Shadow?

What can I say? I'm very very proud of us.

What are your thoughts on the Shadow/LIGHT conflict?

Another disappointment. What did LIGHT hope to achieve that others before them had not been able to? Their lacklustre leadership, and absent members spoke voulmes about their lack of commitment towards bringing anything to the table that even remotely resembled a war.

Will you be leading tribes in the future?

After W27 I'll probably have a break from the game a month or so, or at least until I can no longer bear to be away from it.

Zarin:

Would you care to outline how your tribe has come to this point?

The history of Shadow is well documented, it was the vision of ATTACK that brought it to its dominant position and the merge with ~AOW~ that engendered the name.

Where did the name of your tribe come from?

It was the result of a vote within the tribe.

What do you see as the strengths of your tribe at this point in time?

Well aside from our massive advantage in points, I would definitely cite the experience and cohesion of the membership. I feel that this tribe has a grizzled core of veterans against whom no one can stand and points are all very well for other tribes, but to my mind, many of them are lacking the experience, particularly in war, to make an adequate stand against Shadow.

The ethos of the tribe too is excellent and it’s an absolute pleasure to work with so many fantastic people. Members are driven and diligent; they work together so well and it is testament to the underlying attitude of the members that is responsible for Shadow’s continued success.


What are your goals with your tribe?

World domination…enough said.

Do you have any wisdom that you have gained in your time here that you would wish to impart?

The first thing to say would be to remember who you are and know yourself. Far too easy it is to become wrapped up in a persona, to take the game too far and forget yourself. As part of that, you should also recognise that each player is a person too, so treat them as such and respect them. I’ll admit that I have lost my way in that one, but you’ll learn it one way or another.

Indeed, it’s just a game, it’s not personal and it’s not your job. Like any addiction, one has to recognise when it is becoming problematic and assess things. It is meant to be fun and although it is all too easy to become imbued with some sense of tribal duty, we all need breaks at times. Enjoy it, have fun and take it seriously…but always make sure that you are playing the game, not that it is playing you.

Learn from those around you, all of them. You can find what you are looking for in the most unlikely places. Never assume that you know everything on a subject, and never be afraid to pass on your advice when the time comes. Always remember that you were inexperience once, and that you are only where you are on the advice and guidance of those around you.

Finally, basic qualities go a long way. Honesty, trustworthiness, compassion, respect...the most basic things go a long way, particularly between tribes and they will be returned in kind. Leaders need to respect members and listen to them and it will be returned. If you expect qualities from players, you have to be prepared to demonstrate them yourself. Put yourself in another’s position before you judge too.

I suppose you get out what you put in and TW is a wonderful game with many special and unique people. Enjoy it and take the good times with you in life.


What do you see for the future of your tribe?

I see world domination to be honest; our only threats lie within these days and I am confident that we can surmount them.

Do you have any regrets in your tribe's decisions?

Regrets are funny things. Who are we to say what might have been had we done it differently? Not every decision gives the desired results, but we have to learn from them and move on positively.

What did you think of the Coalition?

It was a marvellous idea and they should be commended for putting it together and keeping it well hidden. It was a challenging endeavour and it turned out not to work, but that was more down to the quality of members than the idea itself. It was brave, and the best option, but it unfortunately came to nothing. It is easy to be critical of its execution, but I am not sure that I could have done better.

What do you think of Shadow?

I shall simply say that it has been an absolute pleasure to be part of Shadow and that is has a wonderful group of people behind it. I count myself lucky to be a part of it.

What are your thoughts on the Shadow/LIGHT conflict?

LIGHT had a lot of promise, but ultimately they were and are lacking in initiative. Low morale, apathy and inactivity have hit them hard and it is a real shame to see a promising opponent succumb in that way. I am positive that Shadow will win and I am going to enjoy fighting every inch of the way.

Will you be leading tribes in the future?

I have not even decided whether I shall return to this game. Lord of Bones said that there is no time after TW, only time between it and I think that he is right. However, even if I do return, I think that I want a more relaxing run of things…but I said that when I came to W27. It is fun, but a lot of work, even now, so I shall be magnanimous and suggest that others deserve to try their hand.

[/spoil]

LIGHT
[spoil]
Onyx Knight:

Would you care to outline how your tribe has come to this point?

I apologize, I'm not completely clear on the question. I'm assuming your asking how LIGHT was formed? If so, basically myself and Testicules formed K25PG, which eventually had SORRY! and a few other tribes merge into it and became known as [IRON]. I briefly left this world, and during that time [IRON] became known as LIGHT.

Where did the name of your tribe come from?

Again, I was not here when LIGHT was formed, however it only stands to reason that since we are a tribe that is at war with Shadow, I can't think of a more fitting name then LIGHT.

What do you see as the strengths of your tribe at this point in time?

We are a very close knit tribe; skirmishes among us are rare. We unite well, and I feel, we have strong bonds among members.

What are your goals with your tribe?

As with any tribe, we have some minor issues we need to work on; I feel we are steadily working on these issues and have made quite a few improvements in the recent weeks and it is my hope we will continue to do so.

Do you have any wisdom that you have gained in your time here that you would wish to impart?

As with most players here, I do take this game seriously and I also take my role within the tribe seriously. That being said, I think it is a common occurrence for most of us to think of TW more as a job instead of a game. So while most of us want to be a serious, formidable player, we all need to remember to balance that with real life which can be a hard thing to remember to do at times.

What do you see for the future of your tribe?

We have recently made some changes, and I feel this will make us stronger as a whole. I see us sticking around for a long time to come.

Do you have any regrets in your tribe's decisions?

I think we have made sound decisions as a whole. While no tribe is perfect, I can't think of anything we as a tribe would have done differently given the chance.

What did you think of the Coalition?

I think there were some areas for improvement, but overall I feel it served its purpose.

What do you think of Shadow?

I personally respect Shadow, I've even played along side a few Shadow members in other worlds and I counted it an honor to work with them. I think Shadow is a worthy adversary and I hope we prove to be the same as well.

What are your thoughts on the Shadow/LIGHT conflict?

I think both sides have strong players and time will tell how this conflict evolves. In the meantime, I think we're all having a pretty good time killing each other. <grin>

Will you be leading tribes in the future?

When I join new worlds, I at times ‘create’ a tribe just for fun which is usually small and consists of a few friends who eventually merge into larger tribes. At this point I don't foresee myself seriously running another tribe, as this one demands a lot of my attention already.

[/spoil]

*TKP*
[spoil]
anullo:

Would you care to outline how your tribe has come to this point?

As far as I know TKP started ages ago, as far as I can tell on the 13th November 2008 at around 01:00 by a player that no longer exists, the tribe slowly grew and grew like most big tribes we were doing well I think we had got to third and then around the 8th-9th of December shadow asked a lot of our bigger players to join and most of them did, and since then we have been growing still and regained our position as third.

Where did the name of your tribe come from?

I have no idea, as far as i know it has always been that and a good name it is too because penguins are fun :D

What do you see as the strengths of your tribe at this point in time?

The fact that we all are striving to reclaim the glory that we lost when our main members left, and the fact we all stuck together like a group of children when the adult leaves :p

What are your goals with your tribe?

Just try to rebuild what we once had and to be big enough so that when Shadow come knocking we can at least try to put up a decent fight.

Do you have any wisdom that you have gained in your time here that you would wish to impart?

Of course I have too much to mention and a lot of which can't really be put into words, I think the main one would be: be active be on as much as possible and always be doing things; be polite and people will like you more; talk on the forums and people will notice you and are much more likely to help to you then and lastly, a lot of people are scared of attacking players because they are scared they'll attack back, just do it.

What do you see for the future of your tribe?

Unless something drastic changes in the next month (maybe even less) I see us being taken out by Shadow as a lot of our villages are near theirs now as older members are now part of them.

Do you have any regrets in your tribe's decisions?

None that I have made but of course the choice to leave to shadow is one I regret on behalf on the people that left.

What did you think of the Coalition?

Erm ... The what?

What do you think of Shadow?

Standard big tribe: they exist to grow and to continue their own existence, I hold no grudge against them.

Will you be leading tribes in the future?

I probably will, but I'll probably co-run it so I'm just there to help make decisions rather than talk to people lots :D

liverpooljk

What do you see as the strengths of your tribe at this point in time?

Location of our members/ability of members are the strongpoints I feel.

What are your goals with your tribe?

To keep the tribe highly ranked until worlds end, and get the tribe’s members a reputation for being decent players.

What do you see for the future of your tribe?

I see *TKP* staying in #3 spot till the end of the world hopefully :)

Do you have any regrets in your tribe's decisions?

None whatsoever.

What did you think of the Coalition?

Inactivity was their main downfall; I think they had the numbers to put up a fight against Shadow but inactivity gave Shadow the advantage.

What do you think of Shadow?

Played this world very well and deserve to win it.

Will you be leading tribes in the future?

Probably not.

[/spoil]

Dawn
[spoil]
wobba987:

Would you care to outline how your tribe has come to this point?

I am very happy with the current leadership and running of the tribe; everything is good. Being the only duke, I do get a lot of jobs to do, but I have many close friends here that are always willing to help me out.

Where did the name of your tribe come from?

The name came from a poll that I did because we lost a lot of points and ranks when TLF changed and well it seemed like we were out but, through vital members’ help, we kept it up.

What do you see as the strengths of your tribe at this point in time?

I believe our determination is probably the best quality.

What are your goals with your tribe?

Our goals are simply to protect ourselves, our allies and most importantly, our academy.

Do you have any wisdom that you have gained in your time here that you would wish to impart?

In earlier worlds and tribes, I believed that running a tribe would be easy, but I know now that running any tribe single-handedly is good, hard job even if I have help.

What do you see for the future of your tribe?

I really don’t know what is around the bend for us; I hope that we will be able to sort the academy, and tribe, minimums because its only about 10k to get in here.

Do you have any regrets in your tribe's decisions?

Sometimes I wish that I had tried to keep those close to me from quitting.

What did you think of the Coalition?

2 words: crushing failure.

What do you think of Shadow?

Pretty awesome; it takes something to get a tribe to rank 1 but with the margin that they’ve got over everyone, it is pretty amazing.

Will you be leading tribes in the future?

I will never leave Dawn, its legacy will live on.

[/spoil]

NOS
[spoil]
chickenhead7 neglected to comment.​
[/spoil]

Purge
[spoil]
Lost8505:

Would you care to outline how your tribe has come to this point?

3Reese3 and I didn't agree with some of the decisions being made by the leaders of our former tribe so we decided to start over and Purge was created. Our ‘war’ with Bella was an unfortunate result of some of those poor decisions; we have since resolved our differences and moved on to more important matters.

What do you see as the strengths of your tribe at this point in time?

We are fortunate in having several experienced players who are excellent at planning and organizing campaigns and getting our members where they are needed most. The experience and knowledge they provide to our younger members is invaluable.

What are your goals with your tribe?

I think our goals are the same as every tribe on W27. Take control of our territory and survive.

Do you have any wisdom that you have gained in your time here that you would wish to impart?

Be a sponge and soak up all the knowledge and game strategy you can. Take advantage of the experiences of the veterans in your tribe, they have a lot to teach you and will make your TW experience much more fun.

What do you see for the future of your tribe?

We will continue to grow and gain experience. I hope to see us as one of the top 5 eventually.

Do you have any regrets in your tribe's decisions?

The war with Bella was a mistake and waste of resources. Neither tribe was able to make significant gains against the other and it slowed both tribes’ growth.

What did you think of the Coalition?

It was a good idea but lacked the cohesiveness to be effective. If they could have gotten everyone involved and with someone coordinating their efforts, I think they could have given Shadow all it could handle.

What do you think of Shadow?

At this point Shadow is like a landslide, just continuing to gain more and more momentum taking out everything in it's path. It will take the combined efforts of all the remaining tribes to stop them. Unfortunately I don't see that happening anytime in the near future.

Will you be leading tribes in the future?

Don't know, leading the PACK and now Purge just sort of happened. It's good to just be one of the grunts sometimes. ;)

[/spoil]

Bella
[spoil]
Michaelprogers:

Would you care to outline how your tribe has come to this point?

Our tribe has slowly built up and now we have a tribe of players who are very loyal to each other, and would gladly do anything to help each other. That loyalty to each other just gets stronger every day.

Where did the name of your tribe come from?

Sweeney came up with the name of the tribe; it's from the Latin ‘bella’ meaning war.

What do you see as the strengths of your tribe at this point in time?

Our tribe has a lot of very experienced players; I myself have been playing since World 8.

What are your goals with your tribe?

We hope as a tribe that we will grow even bigger and stronger.

Do you have any wisdom that you have gained in your time here that you would wish to impart?

Too many players seem in a rush to grow as fast as possible, you should always take the time to plan where you want to expand and for what reason.

What do you see for the future of your tribe?

I believe our tribe will get bigger and stronger; we have a lot of highly talented players.

Do you have any regrets in your tribe's decisions?

You should never regret any decision that your tribe makes, never dwell in the past, it never achieves anything.

What do you think of Shadow?

I think shadow have done really well, good luck to them.

Will you be leading tribes in the future?

I've been the duke of tribes since World 15, and I'm sure I'll be leading tribes in the future.

[/spoil]

BIP
[spoil]
Joe the Elder was unavailable for comment.​
[/spoil]

ALLIES
[spoil]
sam.e118 neglected to comment.​
[/spoil]

WOLFS
[spoil]
scarlett-maiden:

Would you care to outline how your tribe has come to this point?

We started this world quite late, it was already well established when the tribe began. Rockafella aka jack107. is the founder of the tribe and my son. I joined him as a Duke when he first started the tribe, but he had to leave for a while shortly after starting the tribe, so it was handed to me.

White Wolfs was formed from mainly new players to this world and to tribal wars, myself included. I had played a little on world 21 at that point, but was still very much a novice. So it made it harder for us to get a good foothold.

I honestly do not believe we would have lasted as long as we have, without the help of a player that joined us after a month or so of us forming. Sokraps soon became our baron and my friend.

He was, is, a very experienced player and helped me a great deal in those early days. He knew my limitations at that time and spent a lot of time and patience helping me learn the basics and to develop a good understanding of this game, quickly. He is greatly missed. I owe him a lot.


Where did the name of your tribe come from?

The picture on our profile is a personal favourite of mine and has been for many years, its my screen saver on my pc, mobile etc and I am assuming my son was influenced by it when naming the tribe.

What do you see as the strengths of your tribe at this point in time?

My tribes strength has always been based on their loyalty. We had to make a tough decision regarding our top members last year and members who didnt want to leave, were being forced to, in order to safeguard the rest of us and themselves.

They did this willingly for the sake of us all, but it was a sad day for me, my worst ever playing this game, if I'm honest.

Rather than split my tribe, as SAM had clearly hoped to do, we grew stronger and when the NAP was broken by them, they then formed FOME and most of the members who had left returned to White Wolfs, it just secured our unity even more.

That btw, was my happiest day on tribal wars! :O)

Our strength, has become our defense, which is strictly due, ironically, to that situation we were put in. Strange isn't it, how negative things have a way of becoming positive in the end. Just have to hang in there.


What are your goals with your tribe?

My goals are realistic.

We are not going to win World 27, although my offer to Shadow to merge into White Wolfs is still negotiable! lol ;O)

I am delighted we made the top ten in all honesty. I would like now to just strengthen our existing members, there are areas I want to expand on and when this world eventually does come to an end for us, be able to leave knowing we did the best we could do.

I am already very happy with what we have been able to achieve against the odds.


Do you have any wisdom that you have gained in your time here that you would wish to impart?

One thing I learnt, was to not bring your real life frame of mind, into this game. Things that I would not agree to do in my every day life, I found myself being forced to agree to here, for the sake of the tribe.

At the time, certain decisions, that I felt cornered into making, with hindsight, was the right thing for us, as we are still here, although we have had many casualties along the way. But that is the nature of the game.


What do you see for the future of your tribe?

Thats a tough question to answer. I want all my tribe to become proficient at this game so when the world inevitably comes to an end for White Wolfs, as it will for all of us, if my members choose to continue in other worlds, they will have a good knowledge of the game and will thrive elsewhere with fond memories of world 27 and White Wolfs.

Do you have any regrets in your tribe's decisions?

Yes, is the instant gut reaction to that question; however, if we hadn’t taken the unstable path we were forced to move down last year, we would not be here now, I realise that, so in answer to your question, regrets, no.

What did you think of the Coalition?

Coalitions I dont personally believe will ever truly work. You need a lot of trust, co-operation from all your members, grudges have to be dropped between players in different tribes.

Ceasefires come into play, but in the back of your mind there is always that uncertainty of trusting a tribe that only last week you were warring with.


What do you think of Shadow?

I have a lot of respect for Shadow. They deserve to be where they are. They work hard, show a lot of skill and tenacity.

I wasnt here in the early days of world 27, so my knowledge of the state of play then and the other tribes that were around then is limited I'm afraid.


Will you be leading tribes in the future?

I’m not sure lol as I said, I play heavily in world 21. I am learning a great deal constantly from there, the level and style of the game for me personally, is very different to here, but, I am able to bring my knowledge from there to this tribe now, which heightens my enthusiasm for good growth.

We will see; never say never.


[/spoil]​

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

The rest of the world is not without its good humour, and certainly the distant reality of victory probably breeds that as a necessity. The striking sentiment, however, is the apathy among tribes at the time. By this point, the public forum was a largely barren land and the only sparks of life seemed to come from the two largest tribes. Most were keeping their heads down, teasing out their existence for as long as possible.

The second half of February heralded a rather poignant moment in the history of W27 conflict. NOS, having vacated their position on the world stage, redressed their absence with a merge into LIGHT. It is not the move itself that is highly significant, but rather the end of one of the fine pieces of ingenuity and boldness that momentarily lit up the rather banal stage of W27. I talk, of course, about the Coalition.

I wrote at the time about the demise of the Coalition, looking back with greater perspective on their successes and failures. Too easy it is, perhaps, to be an armchair general, but some conclusions could have been drawn from right from the beginning. I have included that commentary below, lightly adapted to avoid repetition.

[spoil]
Zarin said:
Last week we heard the news that much of NOS had merged into LIGHT, effectively removing NOS as a major entity on the world. I commented that NOS were in fact the last surviving member of the infamous Coalition and this week it seemed only right to look back on one of the most ambitious and ultimately disappointing episodes in this world’s history.

Indeed, so often it is, as I mentioned last week, that the enemy of one’s enemy is one’s friend. Justly demonstrated it was a few months ago with the formation of what was known as ‘The Coalition’. Having finally closed that chapter, tribute is owed methinks to those members who took it upon themselves to attempt to stop Shadow as a whole.

Shadow was the dominant power - that much is evident, but the combined strength of other tribes surpassed it (see stats for reference). To the North, Nstlk* and [IRON] were the greatest threats, and Shadow was still weak from so much conflict. Here too undeclared elements lurked. To the East, ex-Feb.13 and LA-G were on the horizon; to the South, FURY had surprised all predictions by joining too. On 3 sides, Shadow was surrounded by declared enemies, the front itself was huge and the tribe was only just recovering from the first phase of a bitter war against Nstlk*.

It is surprising at this time that one or two other opponents did not also decide to join. *TKP* were a notable abstention that, in hindsight, could have been a painful thorn for Shadow. In the South-East, SAM and GR*FM had also neglected to declare in what seemed a surprising move. Nevertheless, Shadow had plenty to be getting on with, and these other tribes may simply have been waiting for the right time.

Certainly, you see, it was an ambitious undertaking and one that this author lauds. The first question that needs to be answered is one of the necessity of the move and the nature of alternatives.

Now, we had seen already what Shadow could do to opponents, and by now the numerical disparity between Shadow and its closest opponents was growing. Crucially however, whilst no single tribe could oppose Shadow alone, their combined strength was still enough to prove a significant threat. This was the crux of the move, a recognition that concerted effort was necessary.

Yet, this does not compel the creation of a Coalition; it may simply have been the case that if any constituent had declared, then other tribes would have followed suit. But it is testament to the ambition of Coalition members that they decided to join together as one.

Had it not come to fruition, what then would have happened? Would we have seen Shadow turn its attention to each in turn, and would that renewed threat have proven a catalyst anyway for some sort of Coalition further down the line; or would each have simply succumbed in their isolation? Indeed would [IRON], for example, have taken their own stand to be followed by others (we can presume that Shadow would have simply turned to the next major threat)?

Well, it is said that a tribe is greater than the sum of its parts, and that in tandem, players are worth so much more. That, I aver, was the thinking behind this move - that a multilateral offensive was simply irresistible, rather than seeing each tribe fight alone, even if they were all fighting Shadow. This is the ambition that wanted to be fulfilled; this is the vision for the Coalition where weight of numbers would be used against Shadow for once. Considering how many players there were present, it was possible. Their massive numbers were a supreme advantage because of the sheer variety and the magnitude of assault possible.

Did it happen? It is tempting to come down with a firm negation here, but that would not in fact be fair. Some tribes did work together; [IRON] were strong in the North and even worked with NOS to take villages. There were hints here and there, but fundamentally, the tribes simply did not work well on their own, let alone in a group. Without dedicated and coherent leadership, the goal of the Coalition was quickly lost, and each tribe became isolated as it tried to fight Shadow alone.

Early successes did occur, but only in some areas. [IRON] famously took the lead in the North, but elsewhere the lack of experience and initiative was too grievous; losses were suffered. As the war went on, inactivity took hold, and even [IRON] dwindled; Coalition members drifted away and were reformed or remade, but it could not hide the losses: it was failing.

What’s most interesting perhaps is that none of the original members exist any longer. NOS did the maintain their membership in the Coalition when it was formed from TK, but LIGHT never theoretically declared, so NOS is/was the last one. Names like LA-G and TK are elusive memories to many who walk this world now, and it is a shame perhaps that such a brave endeavour is so easily forgotten. We can’t really put a date on its final demise; did it finish when the last founding members gave up? Is it still going because NOS lingers on as a shadow? Did it die as soon as it was constantly losing on every front?

That is perhaps not important beyond a historical point; it is about lessons learned and lessons taken forward. The Coalition may have failed, but at least they tried bravely. The idea was there, but ultimately it lacked the visionaries to see it through. Many of the more influential players fell into the trap of believing that all the members would be as well organised and experienced, and that it would be easy to coordinate; but we are talking hundreds of players, some of whom did not know what a 'fake' was. The resources were probably not there to start with, and I think that Shadow was fortunate to have so many of the experienced players, who also had solid experience in war; the Coalition lacked a large enough core of players to enact what needed to be done, and they failed to build momentum.

Ultimately, they were hurt by the apathy of other tribes who did not recognise the threat, and the tribes themselves did not always get along. You may see a vast area of players surrounding Shadow but how many were prepared to actually fight rather than flee at the first sign of trouble? Indeed would the Coalition have been better served by collecting up all of the best players into one tribe and hoping that the rest could be a meat shield?

I suppose we take away something about vision vs. reality. We take away an example of an idea that looked great on paper, but did not function and why this happened. We take away the state of the world and an interesting chapter in the world’s history, one that has drawn to a close. It was a brave dream, and I take my hat off to those who conceived it; but in the end, it could not be followed through.

So I leave you with a thought: what would have happened if Shadow had cracked first?

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

That leaves the history books to tidy up with the statistics of the war. More hopeful predictors might have wagered LIGHT to seize an initiative of sorts, but the story continued to flow as it had been written in prior weeks. Whether united as a single tribe, or a brave Coalition, Shadow’s enemies struggled to find any momentum at all.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. LIGHT: January 31 – February 7

Side 1: 88
Side 2: 3
Difference: 85

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

[spoil]

Shadow vs. LIGHT: February 7 - February 14

Side 1: 73
Side 2: 0
Difference: 73

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

The first half of February saw the war regain momentum in the North. The uneasiness of the turn of the year had given way to a clinical and professional dogma of warfare on Shadow's last remaining front. The rebuilding and consolidation movements in the South-East were little more than a distant distraction for many of the fighters who were grateful to be back on their natural frontier.

LIGHT's erratic existence and incongruity among its members was subverting any real attempts to fight Shadow. The demoralising descent of GR*FM and the improbable nature of victory were casting uncertain shadows over the integration of NOS members. Without a strong core or any significant momentum with which to withstand Shadow, holes were appearing, and a vicious cycle was beginning to lock LIGHT into a prison of defeat.

Positives remained in the frailties that GR*FM had exposed, but these meant nothing to a tribe wracked by inactivity. Sporadically did players fight, but often only when themselves struck by Shadow. Each was a target to be overcome with offensive fire power and then eradicated by conquest. Bereft of the functionality of a tribe, LIGHT was only making Shadow's task easier.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. LIGHT: February 14 - February 21

Side 1: 154
Side 2: 13
Difference: 141

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

[spoil]

Shadow vs. LIGHT: February 21 - February 28

Side 1: 149
Side 2: 8
Difference: 141

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

As February draws to a close, hope is on the horizon for the warriors of the Black Rose. W27’s unusual winter season of politicking bore unexpected fruit for its warriors, and they stood closer than ever to world domination. Their course was set, and nothing, it seemed, would stop them.

[spoil]Top Ten: February 28

Top Ten Tribes
1 Shadow 116.678.212 134.402.838 67 2.006.013 13658 9.841
2 LIGHT 31.012.185 35.691.876 80 446.148 3905 9.140
3 *TKP* 13.615.073 14.601.916 68 214.734 1801 8.108
4 Dawn 7.003.483 7.799.729 76 102.628 1105 7.059
5 Purge 4.195.735 4.195.735 40 104.893 625 6.713
6 BIP 2.404.350 2.404.350 30 80.145 318 7.561
7 WOLFS 1.536.551 1.536.551 40 38.414 316 4.863
8 NOS 1.031.635 1.031.635 22 46.893 164 6.290
9 ALLIES 812.032 812.032 39 20.821 200 4.060
10 +KN+ 725.735 742.813 62 11.981 165 4.502

Top Ten Players
1 gerick6 Shadow 5.874.595 571 10288
2 Zarin Shadow 5.353.017 524 10216
3 filphillip Shadow 4.921.918 498 9883
4 mikestuntz Shadow 4.823.677 480 10049
5 Mande1992 Shadow 4.748.647 477 9955
6 BrobFellshank Shadow 4.692.986 461 10180
7 sstarkey Shadow 4.678.025 473 9890
8 Deciphered Shadow 4.556.832 447 10194
9 ftw97 Shadow 4.402.637 447 9849
10 stampcoin Shadow 3.901.959 390 10005

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

[spoil]
Top Tribes: February 28

mapiooiphp.png

Shadow
LIGHT
*TKP*
Dawn
Purge


Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

The stats were looking similar to past weeks, though with a few newcomers to the tribe table. Quick risers Dawn were looking to profit from the demise of GR*FM and looked to have gathered major parts of FOME, as well as other members from all over the world. That demise and the shifting of other powers has put one or two more fresh names onto the bottom rungs, but these pale in comparison to those at the top

Shadow’s position is looking firmer than ever, but other tribes still have tendrils extending into its territory. LIGHT has lost significant ground in K33, but has gained large numbers of players to the East. Whether extending its front is beneficial remains to be seen. The other three tribes linger on the rim, recruiting whatever they can find, but their disunity and scattered natures are obvious.

February had seen alarming deviations from the predicted order of events. With all said and done, Shadow was rising to the top, and at the expense of an entire swathe of enemies. With such upheaval, commentaries on the future were being refined. As the March rain brought with it the promise of spring, who could say what turns W27 would take?

March - Fading of the LIGHT

By the time we enter March, the world is tentatively moving down the road to its end. Wars are still to be played out, and the trail has been as long as it has unpredictable. It would set in place the series of events that would over-Shadow the world for the rest of its existence. The real assault on LIGHT was beginning to take shape, even if the rest of the world trundled on without care or thought for its fate.

In many ways though, March was the quietest month of the world since the unedifying struggle of the first three. Despite the almost unique nature of the achievement which Shadow sought, some of the steps were more of a trudge than the jubilant dance of victory that might have been foreseen. Perhaps the most intriguing facet of March was its lack of events. The predictable nature of its happenings, coupled with the apathy from many quarters, locked the world entirely in Shadow’s favour. Quiet meant gains without incident, and that meant greater hope of victory.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. LIGHT: February 28 – March 7

Side 1: 92
Side 2: 1
Difference: 91

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

Indeed, the first week yielded exactly what Shadow was hoping for; an almost entirely clean sweep against LIGHT was excellent news and was fast becoming the leitmotif of the war. It also spelled a particularly alarming note for LIGHT, given that one of their main leaders, and original founder, metaldoc, went barb. Whilst it may not always be said that LIGHT was a success, he had embodied the light-hearted (no pun intended) and humorous spirit of that tribe, which both refused to concede defeat and found great happiness simply in being a part of the conflict.

Nonetheless, the machinery of the powerful does not stop for the setbacks of enemies, and it was another loss that LIGHT could not afford. Their activity, or lack thereof, hampered any that sought to counter the tide of conquest, and the occasional conquer here and there meant that retaliation was sporadic and confined only to those who could really be bothered.

By now, the experienced players of the world belonged almost entirely to Shadow, since they had always possessed a strong core of members and because they had seen the most warfare. However, both sides were teaching a valuable lesson to any observer in that only a minority of each tribe could be relied upon to produce results. For all its vastness, Shadow was little more than a dedicated band of members, relied upon constantly to heave the tribe to its objective. Whilst they could afford to do so, LIGHT could not.

Much of their gamble was on Shadow growing weary of the fight, but their enemy showed few signs of succumbing to inactivity. Admittedly, one probably needed only the fingers of both hands to count the majority of the contributors to the war, but the rest of its membership could at least be expected to stay green and keep the tribe’s imposing estate as a sea of blue.

I wrote that inactivity could predate heavily upon an unwary Shadow. When a tribe expands, the aggressive and active players end up moving the frontlines forward, and the rest of the tribe gets left behind, even trapped. Such a fate was evident in places now that the fighting could be said to occur several continents away from some players. When surrounded by enemies, and penetrated with tendrils of enemy villages, almost every player could find themselves close enough to be motivated to act; now that the war focused in the North, only those who had been consistently warring on that front had anything approaching a base from which to continue their work.

On the other hand, it was therefore evident that these were the most aggressive, experienced and largest of the Shadow players, simply because they were the ones who had been fighting for so long. The best had risen to the top; they were the ones looking for work, and as long as this continued, Shadow's advance was safe.

Commanding the fight as I was then, I sought something of a new strategy. Most of my directives were beginning to be confined only to the individuals whom I knew would actually undertake them. Trying to allow every player to get a piece of the action was as naïve as it was unviable.

Beyond the gains in the North, it was obvious that winning the world would require more than beating LIGHT. A whole myriad of other players still thrived in the arena of World 27, and they would likewise have to be nobled. Given this fact, the tribe began to branch out into other wars. The de facto state of enemy was conferred upon every tribe sometime around here, and many Shadow members were encouraged to noble neighbours, regardless of tribe.

This directive spelled a change in the machinations of warfare. At one time, the tribal wars had been insular affairs between two tribes; now the focus was on the insular Shadow against the rest of the world. Much attention was focused on complete continent dominance, with this event occurring twice in the second week of March. These were genuine feathers in the cap of world domination, or nails in the coffin of World 27. Uptake on the idea might initially have been slow, but the ideological shift was in place, and that was the last piece that needed to be moved.

The second and third weeks saw few changes to the statistics. Shadow’s push on the North was as firm and one-sided as it always had been. Its big guns, at least, were not yet getting bored.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. LIGHT: March 7 - March 14

Side 1: 117
Side 2: 1
Difference: 116

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

[spoil]

Shadow vs. LIGHT: March 14 - March 21

Side 1: 158
Side 2: 1
Difference: 157

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

Not content with finishing just one continent, Shadow came to dominance in both K53 and K56. A reminder of the real goal facing the tribe had done much to emphasise this pursuit, and it had been rewarded with a swift boon. Conquers up front weren’t suffering either, and everything was looking rosy.

The third week in particular spelled a low point for LIGHT. 158 villages in exchange for 1 is the sort of deficit any tribe would want to bury. As memory serves, it was one of the highest totals to date and few would later surpass it. Of course, that being said, one wonders if both sides could have done more. There weren’t a great deal of other targets, certainly very few that were being pursued with any prejudice, and thus the statistics do belie something of the reality.

Shadow could be expected to throw down perhaps 250-300 conquers every week. For its size, it represents an average of about 4 villages, per player, per week. Factoring in the world’s speed, and the development of Shadow, it’s not a particularly fantastic total; but it wasn’t bad either. It was consistently decent. Whether the other 100+ conquers were going elicits much of the state of things, since these were being spent mostly on barbs and a few other players. Whilst the stats put Shadow favourably in comparison to LIGHT, it wasn’t quite the powerhouse of aggression and nobling frenzy that one might expect.

Equally, LIGHT wasn’t completely inactive; players were still defending themselves, even if many of the engagements were more than a little unfair. Likewise, it was still conquering a not insignificant amount of villages, even if these, by now, could not replace those that were lost. Then again, is the only thing we need to take away that Shadow was growing and that LIGHT was shrinking?

Elsewhere in the world, there were a few other rumblings of business. The more intriguing is the fact that susurrations of world closure had been caught here and there. Let us not forget that W27 was still open to new arrivals and that closing the world would start to make each conquer and player defeated more valuable to Shadow. Shutting the world would cement the corner into which the rest of the world was backed.

Less intriguingly, *TKP* was back in the news. Having lost its core of players, the exuviae were struggling to make any real impact on proceedings. A score of 14-6 against Purge was their attempt to go some way in putting them back on the world’s stage. In reality, it was little more than a gimmick; they were only lingering because their past tribemates were unwilling to noble them.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. LIGHT: March 21 - March 28

Side 1: 106
Side 2: 4
Difference: 102

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

[spoil]
Top Tribes: March 28

untitledtoptribes.jpg

Shadow
LIGHT
*TKP*
Purge
Dawn


Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

As can be seen, things were looking both similar and different. The top tribes were still the same, if in a slightly different order. Shadow was still in control of the great mass to the South and much of the West. LIGHT was making its stand in the North, and *TKP*, Purge and Dawn could be found in their usual haunts.

The real gains had taken place in K33, K34, K35 and K36, all along the front with LIGHT. Plans to evict LIGHT from K33 had made significant progress, while work had begun again in K35 and K36 which had been so traditionally quiet. Dawn was suffering from Shadow’s new continent dominance drive, possessing as it did such a scattered array of players, and even *TKP* were beginning to be emaciated by the Shadow advance. High profile losses were costing the fight against Shadow, and not even they could truly be said not to feel the weight of inactivity.

With March at an end, the fate of the world had been pushed further along to its conclusion. The picture that the stats paint is bleak and unenviable with the colours of Shadow leaking across the W27 canvas and obscuring any work that had gone before. With an imperceptible certainty, every stroke was falling into place, writing the world's end upon the wall. Its unequivocal policy on other tribes was washing away any obstacles on the way to its victory. Like an inexorable juggernaut Shadow was conquering the world.

[spoil]Top Ten: March 28

Top Ten Tribes
1 Shadow 125.347.696 140.211.111 60 2.336.852 14198 9.875
2 LIGHT 28.550.185 31.920.883 80 399.011 3543 9.010
3 *TKP* 13.221.630 13.729.275 61 225.070 1706 8.048
4 Purge 4.879.627 4.923.589 56 87.921 767 6.419
5 Dawn 4.780.163 4.960.284 59 84.073 714 6.947
6 BIP 2.242.505 2.242.505 26 86.250 314 7.142
7 WOLFS 1.740.314 1.740.314 33 52.737 325 5.355
8 Dawn-A 1.233.151 1.267.117 76 16.673 268 4.728
9 UNME 1.165.256 1.165.256 4 291.314 119 9.792
10 LF 1.004.226 1.004.226 10 100.423 127 7.907

Top Ten Players
1 gerick6 Shadow 6.387.094 623 10252
2 Zarin Shadow 5.892.833 577 10213
3 mikestuntz Shadow 5.300.285 527 10057
4 Mande1992 Shadow 5.294.032 532 9951
5 BrobFellshank Shadow 5.153.107 507 10164
6 sstarkey Shadow 5.087.775 508 10015
7 filphillip Shadow 5.074.970 512 9912
8 Deciphered Shadow 4.791.652 469 10217
9 ftw97 Shadow 4.683.066 476 9838
10 winvarwen Shadow 4.244.425 427 9940

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]
 
Last edited by a moderator:

DeletedUser

Guest
April – Jack in the Boxer

April heralds the final epoch of the war against Shadow. Those knowing the final metamorphosis of LIGHT might well be amused by the tagline. Much of the reality of the month was beginning to shape up like March; the monotonous drive towards victory was sapping something of the enjoyment out of the world for all parties, and both sides in the war faced a largely unenviable task.

We begin with a retrospective look at the path of the 2010, posted at the time in the W27 Weekly:

[spoil]
Top Tribes: January 3

toptribesfornow.jpg


Top Tribes: March 28

untitledtoptribes.jpg

Zarin said:
We can clearly see that Shadow has advanced thoroughly through K33 and K34 and to a lesser extent in K35 and K36. Operations by Shadow have constantly extended the front and the cumulative effect is telling now that the fronts have been more securely join up. K33 and K34 had long been bastions of firstly Nstlk* and then LIGHT and the entire focus of LIGHT has been to K24 and K25.

Of particular note is the expansion even in K23 with a fierce operation on kinggong that has enabled Shadow to flank its opposition and will make the remaining K34 positions difficult to hold for LIGHT. Albadr, LIGHT’s largest player in K34 now finds himself to have an entire front occupied by Shadow and seems to be feeling their wrath in the recent conquers. With his position now so vulnerable, due to the presumed inactivity of helldad90, K34 could very soon crumble and follow K33 as a strong Shadow area.

On the other side, gains have been notoriously light (no pun intended) in K36 as it has always been well defended, even in the days of [IRON], but the relatively recent losses of Foulkey8 and WesleyT are already starting to tell on that front, even if Shadow’s gains have been tentative. K35 has certainly benefited from the increased action in K34 as well as some of the above losses and Shadow has capitalised here too, maintaining a reasonably straight front across K34, K35 and K36. Indeed some of the expansion here has been bold and seems to have paid off thus far.

The wildcard of Purge has since come to be a considerable force in the area and one that LIGHT can at least take some heart from, but they have faced worrying inactivity in recent months that has been the harbinger of the ease with which Shadow has strolled into these new areas. With the loss of experienced players, the fight is being brought to those who have had little taste of war on the frontline, whereas any Shadow player on the front is likely to be a hardened veteran. The line-up leading the charge in K33 and K34 features the top four players and this must surely be a worrying thought to any LIGHT player now that there meat shield has been compromised.

With the fight being brought to their home continents, the prospect of long distance support begins to dwindle and each is forced to look to their own. Shadow has a sea of blue from which to draw its defences, if it ever needs to do so and has a formidable ability to batter any opponent with constant nuking should the situation require it. Even so, many players are spread far from their home continents and each Shadow player has only a small cluster of villages in the warzone from which to push on ahead; a wily LIGHT general, whilst they have little they can do against heavy nuking, will be able to take advantage of the laggard Shadow support and noble back rather than defend outright. It was a tactic that worked well for GR*FM, and could be put to great effect once again.

It would seem that Shadow’s game is not difficult to interpret or misguide, which is a great strength and a great weakness. It will naturally have to pursue its opponents to the edges of the world and LIGHT will have to rely on them being worn and lethargic by that time. If, however, Shadow effectively commandeers the front before it pushes on too boldly, it could readily negate much of the impact of such significant expansion. They may be bulky on the offensive, but it can be a steamroller when effectively managed. LIGHT will have to be more resourceful or we will see another swathe of continents fall to Shadow as the maps show.

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

The real story of the month comes through the statistics, and it is interesting to note the cumulative figures for the contest against LIGHT, subject to the usual caveats of course.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. LIGHT: March 28 - April 4

Side 1: 58
Side 2: 2
Difference: 56

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

[spoil]

Shadow vs. LIGHT: November 1 - April 4

Side 1: 1,279
Side 2: 46
Difference: 1,233

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

The beginning of April was a comparatively slow week. It continued the sluggish theme of the end of March as the whims of the larger Shadow players, and of all manner of circumstances, were enacted. It conveys the inconstant and whimsical nature of the fighting where good and bad weeks could come close on each other's heels.

At this point, an author might be wary of describing the position of LIGHT as hopeless; yet they might be equally wary of chalking the greater parity in the statistics to a renewed vigour from LIGHT. It was the unprofessional, or perhaps arrogant, laziness and apathy of Shadow that could allow them to snatch defeat from the jaws of victory.

Inescapably, the really brazen picture of the situation is the total of the cumulative conquers against LIGHT. Better than anything that has been written thus far, it captures the frank and honest nature of the conflict and might put to rest any quibbles about Shadow’s lack of commitment.

Curiously enough, it would be the last tenable week of LIGHT’s existence. As was mentioned at the beginning, resistance to Shadow took on a new mantle - the aptly named ‘Shadow Boxer Mafia’.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. LIGHT: April 4 - April 11

Side 1: 56
Side 2: 2
Difference: 54

chart


Shadow vs. SBM: April 4 - April 11

Side 1: 32
Side 2: 5
Difference: 27

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

The real end to LIGHT had not yet come; it was the great survivor, like all the incarnations before it. Though an entirely new tribe had been formed, the membership was similar, without the dead weight of inactive players. The members of SBM were no longer part of a tribal identity per se, but an idealistic one – fighting Shadow. Renaming, or perhaps reinventing, a tribe is something that is too often overlooked. The cynical commentator can stress that little has changed, but the absolution of the renamed party can do great things for its confidence and morale.

Certainly, the membership of Shadow could not have been more unimpressed by the change, but the ominously large total from their opponents might have spoken otherwise. 32-5 might not be the material for winning the war, but the psychological shift should not be ignored. The slate was being wiped clean, and a new generation of their conflict was about to unfold.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. LIGHT: April 11 - April 18

Side 1: 54
Side 2: 1
Difference: 53

chart


Shadow vs. SBM: April 11 - April 18

Side 1: 58
Side 2: 8
Difference: 50

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

The commentary at the time might have come down hard on the cynical side, but the adjustments to the scope of the conflict were looking decidedly promising for SBM. Interestingly, they had elected to become an entirely separate tribe, leaving LIGHT to form the bin for any players unworthy to continue the fight. It was a move that would absolve their combat record and wring out the cream of the LIGHT crop. Comprising SBM also were neighbours Purge who likewise allowed their old tribe to slip into obscurity and defeat.

[spoil]
Zarin said:
As events in this world go, the formation of SBM was one that certainly took this author by surprise. Who might have thought that the next step in resisting Shadow was forming another tribe? Nevertheless what is done is done and it looks like a merge of Purge and LIGHT into a tribe that comprises much of the Northern front.

Now that the dust has settled, we can have a good look at this creation. As to the name, well in some ways there are no prizes and in some ways one is utterly foxed. I suppose you either like it or loathe it. Indeed, one’s first impression is that the coat of arms may well leave much to be desired, but then creativity never was considered a significant mandate when picking leaders. Let’s hope that they perform a little better than that ghastly thing.

Since its inception, it seems that the goal is to make the world more fun for those involved and such an enterprise cannot be condemned on those grounds. Indeed, it is a commendable attempt to keep morale against Shadow high and that should not be forgotten.

So, will it strengthen the tribes involved by bringing together the active elements into a compact and tougher tribe or simply divide their strength and leave them weaker than before?

Well firstly it should be noted that both Purge and LIGHT have become bins for inactives and would appear to be little more than an advertisement for free villages. Indeed, it is something of an ignoble end for both entities; Purge in particular had exceeded expectations in many cases and may have actually lived up to their points total, unlike LIGHT. As for them, we are closing the book it seems. With the loss, today, of Foulkey8, the tribe falls to 6th in the rankings and is only likely to slide further into obscurity and defeat.

If that was the bad and the ugly, then where can we find the good? Well, SBM is now of a significant size and despite its unenviable and seemingly eponymous duty to fight Shadow, we have seen the best week against Shadow for months. 58-8 won’t win any wars, but considering the totals that have been appearing in recent weeks, this propitious deviation from expectation could well be the preparation to usher in a new parity and resolve in the war from SBM.

Whilst LIGHT is abandoned to the dogs, SBM might yet just hold a little challenge for a Shadow that must be growing increasingly complacent. Yet, the cynical side of this author cannot help but reminisce about the formation of LIGHT and saying such similar things. If next week, Shadow’s attention is moved from LIGHT to SBM, we shall find a truer measure for the scope of this conflict. For now, let us hope that SBM is not put out for the count before it even begins.

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

The crux of the change was that it surrendered those players who were tipping the scales so heavily the direction of Shadow. Indeed, the greatest criticism of Shadow’s game was that it both lacked finesse and daring at the same time. It was an unwieldy sledgehammer that crushed the weaker opponents who had succumbed to inactivity or who had become separated from support. Larger and stronger enemies were ignored until either they too became inactive or else could be so effectively overwhelmed with numbers that resistance was impossible.

As a result, the inactives of LIGHT were the perfect targets that both kept the statistics squarely in Shadow’s favour and were fecund with new villages which would increase Shadow’s dominance. The great tragedy of LIGHT, and opponents before it, was that individuals who fought bravely were drowned by the ineptitude and inexperience of their comrades.

Shadow’s game at the time was almost predatory. Targets were identified by their weakness, battered and oppressed by every offensive resource to hand and then swept away as the owner rescinded control to the gnarled hands of inactivity. The refinements of meta-conflicts never materialised after the earliest wars, with things left mostly in the hands of newer players who had no knowledge of the sprawling battle lines and complex offensives of older worlds. They had forced the game to an equilibrium that allowed them to assert their dominance; whilst Shadow could afford to absorb any enemy threat, SBM could not. This familiar pattern of conflict would have to be averted, and every player engaged, if it was to stand any chance of victory.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. LIGHT: April 18 - April 25

Side 1: 20
Side 2: 0
Difference: 20

chart


Shadow vs. SBM: April 18 - April 25

Side 1: 117
Side 2: 9
Difference: 108

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

The last two weeks of April saw an interesting scope for the development of SBM. The crude totals of previous months were threatening to resurface, but their conquers against Shadow were a cause for hope and optimism now that they were genuinely starting to make moves against the enemy behemoth.

Shadow had seen off LIGHT, and in its place, a new opponent had emerged, more focused and wily than any previous incarnation. The transition was complete, and the final era of war was to be set in motion. LIGHT’s goals had never been in doubt, but it had lacked the activity or experience to compete them; it was another failed mission against Shadow, but its absence could yet throw the world into its greatest phase yet.

On the one hand, Shadow was still firmly ahead, pushing into new territory and secure in its membership; but on the other, SBM could not be written off prematurely, and it seemed an opponent was finally willing to show Shadow that it would not simply roll over and be destroyed. Relative to its size, SBM’s conquers made it more than a match for the warriors of the Black Rose; the conclusions of the next months could not yet be wagered easily.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. SBM: April 25 - May 2

Side 1: 67
Side 2: 7
Difference: 60

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

With April closed up, the world had bared its teeth at any potential conqueror. Spring had arrived in W27 with a new enemy, its rains dissolving the lamentable edifice of the predecessor, but failing to mask the unmistakable sounds of smithies roaring into action; Shadow had been surprised, and it was more afraid than it cared to admit.

April finishes with the standard dose of statistics, including something to put Shadow’s domination in perspective:

[spoil]
World Dominance: April 23

sdom2.jpg

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

[spoil]
Top Tribes: May 2

tribes0205.jpg


Continent Dominance (Tribe): May 2

tribesdom0205-1.jpg


Top Players: May 2

players0205-1.jpg

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

[spoil]Top Ten: May 2

Top Ten Tribes
1 Shadow 139.465.481 150.237.575 54 2.782.177 15146 9.919
2 SBM 27.922.550 31.169.311 79 394.548 3450 9.035
3 *TKP* 10.347.802 10.565.784 55 192.105 1397 7.563
4 Dawn 3.385.464 3.403.727 47 72.420 531 6.410
5 BIP 2.740.070 2.740.070 21 130.480 359 7.633
6 R2D 1.885.799 1.885.799 18 104.767 254 7.424
7 WOLFS 1.655.208 1.655.208 21 78.819 283 5.849
8 SKULL 892.875 952.903 71 13.421 219 4.351
9 Dawn-A 846.609 892.223 74 12.057 198 4.506
10 LIGHT 803.352 803.352 11 73.032 144 5.579

Top Ten Players
1 gerick6 Shadow 6.959.562 679 10250
2 Zarin Shadow 6.498.708 636 10218
3 sstarkey Shadow 5.832.345 583 10004
4 Deciphered Shadow 5.784.040 562 10292
5 mikestuntz Shadow 5.691.924 566 10056
6 Mande1992 Shadow 5.532.920 555 9969
7 filphillip Shadow 5.510.329 561 9822
8 BrobFellshank Shadow 5.489.322 537 10222
9 ftw97 Shadow 4.941.007 503 9823
10 Hale Storm Shadow 4.644.440 474 9798

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

The dominance of Shadow was rife, and the ailing membership of the world was fanning the flames of rumours about its closure. SBM had made strong early showings, but the maps were pointing to Shadow’s continued advance. Predicting the future was the intellectual commodity of the time, and the last word on April will be my thoughts from its final week.

[spoil]
Zarin said:
Last week saw a farewell to LIGHT from this publication and it was then that I was thinking about this world settling into its endgame. Gone for the moment is much of the uncertainty about the world; there are no tribes that could swing things left undeclared, or tenuous alliances waiting to be broken; gone too is much of the competition, relegated to smaller pockets of resistance where the players who can be bothered to fight on still reside.

Shadow lies on the 70% mark for the world’s points and about controls just over 60% of its villages. Does that mean that its victory is as certain as some would like to think? I can’t tell you how the future will be; I never would have predicted this when I started, not for me. And even when the pieces seem so set in place, endgames are a tricky business.

I am in part entrusted to see that notion through, to see Shadow conquer this world and realise its goal, no matter how long it takes. But how likely is it that Shadow can endure? Whilst I may have the fortune of holding some sway over this, the vagaries of real life call unexpectedly.

Gone are the grand schemes of warfare, and here we are, settled into the war of attrition. I remember a time when our frontlines were held by enemies, when continents we now hold were once a mass of enemies. But now that I can call those places home, does it mean that the next set will fall in the same manner? The number of players on the server trickles down, hinting at some sort of inexorable denouement, but will it be Shadow’s?

I remember the pessimism of some of those who went before, who said that Shadow would crumble, or fight itself. It’s still here, but so is the pessimism from commentators, as if it is not in our nature to win at this game. Here I am at the chessboard noting that a winning position is worth nothing if you have not the time to convert it. The objective hasn’t changed, but the enemy has.

You see, the greatest threat to Shadow is its own success. Some have noted that Shadow erodes its very raison d'être by destroying its enemies, that its very existence is entwined in having an enemy to fight. It’s seems almost paradoxical that following its goal means erasing its very reason for being. When its enemies fall asunder, the very motivation for its players begins to deteriorate and it is at this point that you get a true measure of tribal character.

The future is never certain; will I sit here one week and be explaining where it all went wrong, or will I see the 80% or even 90% figures creeping in and be writing an article about SBM as just a distant memory? It is often never clear whether it is the end of the beginning or the beginning of the end.

What can I be certain about? Well I know that there are enough in Shadow with an ethos to seeing this world through and that some of its players are bigger than almost all of the tribes in the world. But I do know that its enemies will not give in easily either and that we should expect the unexpected.

If you were to ask me where my money stands, I would tell you that I shall never give in. That has always been the reason that has given me the confidence to say that Shadow will endure. At its present rate, this world could be completely done in a year, but nothing is ever so simple.

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

May - The Nail in the Coffin

Lapsing already as we have into May, the scope of the story is beginning to become clearer. The unedifying, if necessary, devolution from LIGHT bore a newer opponent free from the psychological gulag of its predecessor. Shadow’s eyes were ever forward, looking to the horizon and beyond it; their contentment with ample conquest was waning, and an expectation for some new action on the part of the game was growing. We talk, of course, about the world’s closure.

Conquest without any guarantee of final reward is a recipe for bitterness and apathy. Surely striving without an objective, or without word that there is some final ending, is pointless. Retaining the world almost mocked Shadow’s resolve, and it certainly left a possibility for new enemies to spring up. The world was shrinking, but each village taken would be that much more valuable were it known that no more could join the world.

The powers that be were unmoved and rumours went away. Shadow was back to the grind. Despite a continued fall in world membership, W27 was to stay open for business. It was almost as if the game was not yet ready to acknowledge Shadow - it wasn’t the news that they wanted.

A key psychological onus on the winning tribe was clear. Obviously if the world is sealed, only a finite number of players have to be removed; enemies can be slowly checked off and eliminated. It brings a sense of gratification knowing each step is firmer on the road to victory or even that the road to victory goes where it should. Seeing extra players spawning on the edges of the world, in continents previously without enemies, detracts greatly from the sense of grinding out a victory. So much for the implacable march of the conqueror.

Shadow's attempts to dominate continents were a clear effort to combat this difficulty. Whilst its players might not have been able to control who came into the world, Shadow could at least content itself with checking off continents and forcing even the smallest enemies to the rim. Small victories perhaps, but wholly necessary ones.

The first half of May was when the last shreds of dignity or symmetry departed from the scoreline. SBM had looked unwilling to settle for being destroyed; resistance had been seen in places. The stage was set for the sort of glorious last stand and stubborn refusal of surrender that litters works on military fiction.

By their very nature, last stands don't work. Sun Tzu probably turns in his grave every time it is suggested, let alone enacted. Perhaps they are anachronisms from a time when death in battle was glorious and retreat was the sort of cowardice that earned decimation. They are a glorious denouement of bravery and pride, or the last vestige of an incompetent general.

Here there was no retreat, no chance to redeploy and fight the battle more advantageously elsewhere. It is the sort of setting where the true heroes take precedence. Each of SBM faced a choice: they could fight to their last village, their last warrior; or they could surrender and capitulate to the defeat that they knew was coming. To their credit, some chose the path of the warrior, but too many resigned before the enemy was even at their gates.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. SBM: May 2 - May 9

Side 1: 74
Side 2: 3
Difference: 71

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

[spoil]

Shadow vs. SBM: May 2 - May 9

Side 1: 98
Side 2: 1
Difference: 97

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

The early days of May were two weeks that put sizeable nails in W27’s coffin. They set the tone for the rest of the SBM story. At times, the impetus of the new tribe had looked threatening, but the tribe was too small, too inexperienced and morale was too low. While certain players strived for a worthy epitaph, their tribemates lost any taste for conflict amidst the fury of Shadow.

The time period also brought with it rare comment from beyond the stone curtain of SBM’s walls. Enclosed are two rather interesting comments from notable SBM players. Commentary on them might be a little redundant, and it is for the reader to interpret the mood of the tribe.

[spoil]
DarkDMize said:
I was shocked when I contacted “the great” Zarin (he will laugh, but he knows it’s true. lol) and found out that he had been seeking me for an interview. While my love and respect is infinite for this person I’d like call a friend, I have no desire to broadcast in any terms other than my ownat this point in time. So in light of many recent conversations and to reduce the number of times I have to repeat myself, here is what’s going on in the world of DarkDMize…

I’m trying to be reasonable here… Jumping back in, sending support, and trying to fix this account - and without premium on top of it because I’ve been considering hitting 'delete' or 'start over.' Although my irritations with this “new” tribe so far have been few, they have been serious enough to warrant my consideration of desertion. Simply put, I find many of the current members to be demanding, rude, and abrasive, as well as possessing a serious lack of tribal discipline and standards. It’s just a game, yes, but one where until lately, I’ve found a good league of players who can have fun, work together, and even on opposite sides of war, respect each other. Even Sweeney (you know I love ya) was a player in his day, and that should say something. lol

Let’s consider the player who was allowed to jump a claim made by my account. I made several attempts to make contact this person. They read my message and did not respond. Several times. When I scouted the village, it appeared he was going to let me take the claim. However, on the third trip, my noble died, as he’d stacked it with 6300 HC. This player has 1/5 of the villages that I do – I don’t NEED this village, and to be honest, I don’t even remember the coords – it’s the ethics of it, and the fact that it went unhandled. I’m then supposed to support this player and expect this player to support me?

I'd probably have simply overlooked this as a “newbie” error and not considered it a big deal if it was handled appropriately by either the player or the council… I mean, really… I'm losing points like crazy trying to fix this point-whorish mess that I came back to. Can I see a show of hands for those who noticed that he was tagging my villages by naming them with an (O) in them for offensive and an N for ones with a noble? omfg …I’m still trying to figure out what these other letters and symbols in the village names are… If anyone has a clue, please contact me in-game. lol A 12,335 point village holds no troops. I don’t care how many points you have, you need freaking troops to keep/get any points at all!

Anyway, I guess I’m just not seeing much worth staying for in W27, aside from the few individuals that I’ve very much enjoyed playing with. You can ask any of those same individuals about how difficult of a decision this has been - and how undecided I still am. I’ve been trying to consider all angles of how my next actions will affect this world, though none seem even remotely fair. Regardless, what choice I make will be made known within the next week… I suggest that each prepare for what this may mean to them, if anything. Not saying I'm a pivotal point in this war, but 288 villages is bound to make an impact somewhere.

Source: Public Forum

[/spoil]

[spoil]
Gunther Maplethorpe said:
I think all the "eternal optimists" are pretty much gone...the only ones left are the ones who are actually a bit insane to think that there will be any other outcome - and I say this as a long-standing member of SBM (formerly LIGHT, formerly [IRON], formerly...etc.).

There are very few of us left that were in the opening salvos of the Shadow war, and most (all?) of us have turtled out in one fashion or another. I, for one, am going to play it out to the end - I just want to be around when the world closes, no matter if it's on the winning or losing side. I think Shadow can do it if they keep up the aggressiveness that was once there - it seems that they've become fat and complacent with their abilities, and aren't really pushing it anymore...not that I blame them, really, because it's not as much fun crushing your enemies if you can't hear the lamentations of their women.

The breakup of any real resistance was some time ago, with the major players of IRON leaving the game. SBM is a piss-poor shadow of the good old IRON days; though the council means well, they don't really have the stones to pull anything off..

Source: Public Forum

[/spoil]

It might be unfair of me not to discuss the situation in Shadow at the time. Certainly, there was no small amount of restlessness, but some members could be relied upon to remain focused. As can be imagined, many players were apathetic on the Shadow side of things and the onus fell on those who could be relied upon to continue the war.

In many ways, Shadow was simply lucky that it had members who were willing to see out the world to the end. It had dragged itself through a year of constant war, and there was no end in sight. It took immense resilience on the part of those players still fighting to continue to uphold a tribe that was decadent and lazy in places.

Although Shadow was winning, that was never to say that the entirety of its membership was focused and determined. It was not even to say that the entirety of its membership deserved victory. As has been thematic in Shadow's gains, it was relying heavily on a small number of players to carry their victory through; the tragedy of SBM was that they did not have this element.

Were we to take the ten most active players in Shadow and put them in SBM, the war probably would have reached a decent stalemate. In fact, it probably would have turned the tide. It’s not even a problem unique to Shadow, but one that affects almost all tribes to a greater or lesser degree. They fall short of their potential because there are members who are simply not enamoured enough with the game to pursue it to the same degree as others.

All that being said, morale was high for Shadow. It was nobling reasonably well and was not facing problems in losing members or attacks from enemies. It had settled into its groove and was implacably pushing for victory. The push was by no means exhilarating or particularly noteworthy, but it was consistent. The tribe was functioning well and the relationships amongst its members were clearly faring better than those in SBM.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. SBM: May 16 - May 23

Side 1: 102
Side 2: 0
Difference: 102

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

[spoil]

Shadow vs. SBM: May 23 - May 30

Side 1: 182
Side 2: 9
Difference: 173

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

The second half of May closed the book on predictions for SBM. The handful on conquers in return might have been a welcome deviation from patterns, but Shadow had stepped up its game after some slow weeks. Inactives in SBM were being severely punished, and the loss of DarkDMize, who had been their biggest player (she quit following her comments on the forum), hit them hard.

In a time where SBM might have thought about trying to push on with their hopes, Shadow was delivering crushing blows. It would prove to be a time from which they would never recover, and their fate became sealed up with the rest of W27.

In other areas, smaller tribes were being predated upon. *TKP* had sunk drastically in the stats following Shadow pressure, and the quest for continent dominance was bringing tribes into conflict against Shadow that had no hope of resisting. Much of the central block of continents was a veritable Shadow fortress, and the loss of DarkDMize left K35 wide open for Shadow to extend their front. SBM had been forced back into their last major line of continents and the war was not about to stop.

[spoil]
Top Tribes: May 30

tribes3005-1.jpg


Continent Dominance (Tribe): May 30

tribesdom3005-1.jpg


Top Players: May 30

players3005-1.jpg

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

[spoil]Top Ten: May 30

Top Ten Tribes
1 Shadow 150.301.975 159.182.292 52 3.061.198 15990 9.955
2 SBM 24.165.401 28.090.925 79 355.581 3168 8.867
3 Dawn 8.066.672 8.228.146 56 146.931 1074 7.661
4 BIP 4.024.625 4.024.625 22 182.938 506 7.954
5 SKULL 3.292.400 3.393.527 65 52.208 522 6.501
6 *TKP* 2.658.178 2.658.178 24 110.757 371 7.165
7 WOLFS 1.670.412 1.670.412 17 98.260 280 5.966
8 Dawn-A 1.069.746 1.132.944 76 14.907 227 4.991
9 R2D 686.826 686.826 11 62.439 85 8.080
10 Nstlk* 568.771 568.771 2 284.386 86 6.614

Top Ten Players
1 gerick6 Shadow 7.622.861 743 10260
2 Zarin Shadow 7.005.295 686 10212
3 Deciphered Shadow 6.325.243 615 10285
4 sstarkey Shadow 6.322.071 634 9972
5 mikestuntz Shadow 6.146.372 611 10060
6 filphillip Shadow 5.843.353 592 9871
7 BrobFellshank Shadow 5.676.136 559 10154
8 Mande1992 Shadow 5.554.550 557 9972
9 SusieJean Shadow 5.054.263 513 9852
10 ftw97 Shadow 4.993.239 507 9849

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

The maps paint a vivid picture of the conquest underway in W27. The many tribes who resist it are forced to the edges of the map as the Shadow war machine lumbers onward. All the edges of the world are on the horizon for Shadow as SBM falters.

What caused the final death of SBM is difficult to say. For so long it had seemed as if they would not go the way of those whose mantle they assumed, that they would not be butchered with all the indignity of lambs to the slaughter. Yet, how can it be that May saw the end to hope of their improvement? How can it be that the fight suddenly left them? How can it be that Shadow was allowed to overcome its final great opponent without ceremony?

Perhaps it is a combination of factors. Cracks had appeared almost as soon as it had begun, and its past record was not in favour of a majestic counter. With each month that passed, Shadow had accrued more resources, and it was more threatening the larger it became. But, it was by no means at its best; by now, the mantle of warfare had fallen to only a few. The best players in SBM had seemingly ebbed away, and the game was resigned.

For all the months of conflict and rivalry, Shadow was concluding its game without incident. The straw had been found which had broken the camel's back, and it would never recover. It was as if all hope had faded, and from now on, the story was set in motion; it would not be shaken or undone by any enemy. June was approaching, and it would bring with it the final test of Shadow’s endgame

June – Darkest Before Dawn

The consternation of earlier months had settled by now. Resistance to Shadow was slowly ebbing away, and the advantage was being pressed. New fronts were about to be tested, and new players were thrust into the limelight; those previously tasked with supporting were now being supported, and those who thought the battles were a distant legend now found enemies at their gates.

As ever, June heralds the summer and brings with it many players who are freed from the shackles of their commitments for some sort of summer break. Activity tends to increase, and grander schemes are set in motion, even if most come to nothing by September. Consequently, the first week was seeing a large influx of new players. They came because W27 was among the oldest available worlds, little realising the state of affairs that had beset it. Those who sought the world’s closure groaned audibly as the red dots sprang up on the vestiges of continents.

Fortunately for them, it was to be Shadow that eschewed the bright sunshine outdoors for the sake of continuing their drive for victory. The gaping chasms in SBM could not be filled, and the weeks began to blur into each other as players were slowly ravaged, eliminated and forgotten. Victory was on the horizon and Shadow was looking unstoppable.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. SBM: May 30 - June 6

Side 1: 131
Side 2: 9
Difference: 122

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

[spoil]

Shadow vs. SBM: June 6 - June 13

Side 1: 101
Side 2: 4
Difference: 97

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

The story was rapidly being set in stone as SBM simply capitulated under the pressure. The world was reaching a bathetic and unenviable state as the real consolidation of power began. No longer was any true conflict being seen, aside perhaps from the occasional player offering some shreds of courage. The ease of conquest was both a blessing and a curse; the removal of any challenge from the world's affairs would surely expedite the world's closure, but simultaneously the seduction of a challenge was slowing being lost. Offering the world so easily was a poisoned chalice indeed.

Shadow’s goals were rapidly becoming far wider than simply destroying SBM. Indeed, this war seemed only to account for a third of their conquers, the rest being spent eliminating smaller tribes or consolidating positions. Its main concern now was to fuel its activity and to retain its relentless nature.

Perhaps the most interesting aspect of June was watching Shadow do entirely that. I mentioned the 'test' of an endgame, and this is where the true subtleties of world domination are found. The tribes that have won worlds have done so because they have persevered determinedly for that victory. Earlier worlds have seen colossal tribes shatter because they lose their spirit and interest in the game.

It is the actions of the largest and most influential players that can shake entire tribes. Shadow might have been a behemoth of a tribe compared to its trivial counterparts, but it too was awash with disparity. A mere handful of players was driving the tribe forward, and the success of Shadow had been entrusted to a perilously small band of players. Their mentality and perseverance were derived from each other, and were one of them to have withdrawn from the fighting, others could easily have followed. Maintaining their contributions was Shadow’s foremost priority.

As a tribe, it was beginning to understand the perils of coming so far, recognising the petty conflicts that could so easily arise. There was a palpable delirium with the continued conquest, and an equal friction between those who worked tirelessly for the tribe and those who could not, or would not, contribute any great amount.

The alluring impetus of SBM had largely evaporated; the world had once again settled into a monotonous routine. Shadow was bored. The growing demise of their enemies was surely a cause for celebration, but the inevitable mix of complacency and apathy that SBM had so briefly staved off was returning. Conquers were less frequent, activity was dying, and the desire for victory was shrinking. Its life was diminishing.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. SBM: June 13 - June 20

Side 1: 130
Side 2: 1
Difference: 129

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

[spoil]

Shadow vs. SBM: June 20 - June 27

Side 1: 104
Side 2: 4
Difference: 100

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

Although it still performed admirably against SBM, Shadow's conquers elsewhere were suffering. At the beginning of the month, and throughout May, it had been cementing some 300 conquers each week; but as June wore on, this number began to shrink alarmingly. Comparing the conquers against SBM with total conquers, we can see that whilst the holistic tribal effort began to wane, Shadow’s effort against SBM remained relatively constant:

[spoil]June
Week 1: Conquers vs. SBM - 131/Total Conquers - 297
Week 2: Conquers vs. SBM - 101/Total Conquers - 278
Week 3: Conquers vs. SBM - 130/Total Conquers - 238
Week 4: Conquers vs. SBM - 104/Total Conquers – 212

Source: W27 Weekly articles throughout June

[/spoil]

It shows that commitment and vigour were sorely lacking in the tribe. Those fighting SBM were the committed and determined players, while those fighting elsewhere were vagarious and capricious with their contributions. It ably demonstrates the dichotomy within the tribe and that maintaining its offensive against SBM was integral to Shadow's vitality.

Beyond this thought and with June coming to an end, Shadow needed a new impetus. Its previous conquest was admirable, but it could so easily come to nothing at the final hurdle. Suddenly the ignominy of sliding into defeat was not lost on the most observant. Without action, could Shadow's greatest enemy turn out to be itself?

June had provided an unwelcome truth in its test of Shadow’s endgame. Organised resistance might have been crumbling before them, but a truly leviathan obstacle could present itself were Shadow to fall. For so many months, the world’s situation had been stagnant, with no news of world closure or cheaper nobles forthcoming; Shadow was restless for its next challenge, its next enemy, not this meek and unedifying denouement.

The situation was deteriorating, and Shadow was undergoing one of the darkest periods in history. For once, it was truly threatened, not by the enemies far outside its lands, but by the very nature of its brilliance. From its landscape of hope manufactured in weeks gone by, it had fallen into a worrying state of decay. Its enemies had only to hope that this trend would continue, and predictions on the fate of the world would be rewritten entirely.

[spoil]Top Ten: June 27

Top Ten Tribes
1 Shadow 160.312.831 168.316.540 51 3.300.324 16865 9.980
2 SBM 21.131.025 23.451.310 69 339.874 2670 8.783
3 Dawn 9.301.361 9.484.390 59 160.752 1226 7.736
4 BIP 2.580.737 2.580.737 18 143.374 323 7.990
5 SKULL 2.510.142 2.611.733 53 49.278 444 5.882
6 Dawn-A 1.294.769 1.366.389 77 17.745 271 5.042
7 *TKP* 1.115.266 1.115.266 12 92.939 156 7.149
8 NOS2 992.556 992.556 2 496.278 112 8.862
9 *S.D.* 847.491 847.491 28 30.268 150 5.650
10 RUM 747.359 747.359 1 747.359 86 8.690

Top Ten Players
1 gerick6 Shadow 8.107.886 788 10289
2 Zarin Shadow 7.557.531 739 10227
3 sstarkey Shadow 6.789.231 675 10058
4 Deciphered Shadow 6.631.763 642 10330
5 mikestuntz Shadow 6.555.500 651 10070
6 BrobFellshank Shadow 6.122.519 605 10120
7 filphillip Shadow 6.000.824 609 9854
8 Mande1992 Shadow 5.837.561 587 9945
9 bloatedcherub Shadow 5.591.105 555 10074
10 SusieJean Shadow 5.466.361 551 9921

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]
 
Last edited by a moderator:

DeletedUser

Guest
July - Illumination

July began with renewed discussion about the closure of the world. It should be no secret that Shadow actively lobbied for this, given that it was a milestone which was likely to ensnare an ever greater possibility of victory. It was clear to the leadership at the time that the monotony of conquest was finally taking its toll, even on the most firmly set elements of the tribe. It was felt that closing the world, just to new arrivals, was the sort of acknowledgement from the powers that be which might convince players to press for a final victory. In doing so, it also finally made continent dominance a reality, rather than having it upset by randomly located new players.

The world at that time continued to assume its familiar shape. Resistance was perhaps a quarter of Shadow’s size, or to put it another way, Shadow owned around 80% of the world. That resistance comprised scattered clusters as well as the larger mass of SBM players to the North and assorted pockets within the very heart of Shadow’s territory.

[spoil]
Top Tribes: July 4

toptribes-2.png


Continent Dominance (Tribe): July 4

topktribes.png


Top Players: July 4

topplayers.png

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

The 20th parallel in the North was seeing the majority of the fighting. The North-West had yet again borne the greatest success, allowing Shadow to outflank SBM’s defences. K24 saw the toughest fighting of the moment, home to SBM veterans and the target of some of Shadow’s most aggressive combatants. K25 and K26 were already being sought for new offensives, while the rest of the North-West remained a harlequin of feuding tribes.

In the East, Shadow was pushing for the rim to neuter the growth of rim tribes in K37 and K47. To the South-East, elements of Dawn, as well as old enemies, refused to cede their lands to Shadow's advance; with the focus mostly on the North, enemies had been allowed to fester here too easily.

To the South, Shadow enjoyed its greatest achievements. It was easily within reach of the edge of the world, and its proprietors had proved industrious in their eradication of opponents. It was hampered most heavily by beginner protection and morale penalties. Likewise, in the South-West, the influx of new players had created a thin crust of enemies, enduring through the protection afforded by their novelty.

Over in the West, *TKP* had fragmented heavily into a plethora of new tribes, which, along with Shadow’s apathy in that area, was making its clearance a messy affair. More attractive and valuable targets to the North had left K52 and K42 sorely in need of cleansing.

For its part, Shadow’s sheer size made any measure of resistance almost unthinkable. Any targets not being nobled could so easily be suppressed by countless waves of nukes. Many of the OD scores on both sides are witness to this late game savagery as Shadow could quite conceivably nuke an entire tribe.

Indeed, despite the daunting prospect of another stretch of continents receding into the Northern mists, Shadow continued the offensive doggedly against SBM. Perhaps it was the taste of victory, or simply that the players that had come this far were not ready to give up yet, whatever the actions of the rest of the tribe.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. SBM: June 27 – July 4

Side 1: 99
Side 2: 4
Difference: 95

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

[spoil]

Shadow vs. SBM: July 4 - July 11

Side 1: 111
Side 2: 9
Difference: 102

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

Despite the holistic tribal effort waning, the war against SBM showed little sign of diminishing. Their players were creditably resisting, and the fighting did at times show glimpses of its former lustre. Now backed into a corner, the true peril of its position was becoming clear. Gone was any real notion of a support network or a frontline; SBM was the frontline. Every player was a reasonable target. It was obvious that the most effective way to defeat them was an implacable rain of nukes that would rip apart any of the larger players who still faced Shadow. Crushing their morale and suppressing any active elements was the path to victory.

When Shadow wanted to, it could brush aside any enemy with ease. If the whole tribe had united against a single target, the effect would have been devastating. Unfortunately, things are never so simple. The same players did the same jobs, fortunate that they were large enough by themselves to be a credible threat.

Heavy emphasis was on K25 and Rainbowbadger whose stalwart defence of the border epitomised the tragic impasse of the conflict. Regardless of her defensive skill and determination to prevent Shadow’s entry, no player can expect to undergo the barrage of nukes to which she was subjected. That such skill and courage should be relegated to so few words is precisely the reason that resistance was so rare - why fight if it will mean nothing?

Indeed, if SBM players resisted, they could expect to be pummelled and then nobled; it simply brought a greater challenge for Shadow. If they didn’t resist, whilst it might have been boring for Shadow, the villages were taken methodically. Either way, the sheer asymmetry of the conflict sapped it of contest. The ultimate irony was that stalwart defence simply made a player a priority target.

But credit is due to those who stood and fought. Too easy it is to resign when even a small amount of hope has faded, let alone when only glimmers remain. These last vestiges of resistance were not motivated necessarily by an expectation that the state of affairs could be changed; they were motivated by notions of pride, courage and dignity. A player could sidle away and waste no more time, or they could show the world that Shadow did not have the monopoly on greatness. They could show that skill existed beyond Shadow's reach and that it would bow out in a blaze of fire and glory. No hero goes meekly to their end.

By the middle of July, calls for the world’s closure had spilled out onto the forum. It was billed as beneficial for all, and it certainly expedited Shadow’s victory, keeping new players away from wasting their time. SBM showed themselves to be surprisingly magnanimous in their acceptance of it, agreeing that preventing the closure of the world was unlikely to save their cause. Perhaps this is the best demonstration of both sides' predictions for the fate of the world.

For such a monumental decision, it came swiftly. The world’s closure was announced for August 5, putting the date squarely on the horizon. Could it be that Shadow’s opus was finally coming to fruition? Was the world sealed into its endgame? Would it bring the hoped-for incentive to conquer?

[spoil]

Shadow vs. SBM: July 11 - July 18

Side 1: 146
Side 2: 6
Difference: 140

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

[spoil]

Shadow vs. SBM: July 18 - July 25

Side 1: 143
Side 2: 1
Difference: 142

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

What greater vindication is there for an idea than seeing it put perfectly into practice? With the impending closure of the world to spur them on, as if a tacit acknowledgement of their victory, Shadow flourished. Heavy conquers both against SBM and in general reflected their new energy, going so far as to make 345 conquers in the second of the above weeks.

The final week of July proved to be Shadow’s best against SBM. The dingy darkness of June had been shifted and quite literally illuminated with a vibrant energy. SBM was now truly imperilled and was proving little match for this new impetus. Other tribes kept to themselves, hoping that they would not be next.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. SBM: July 25 - August 1

Side 1: 152
Side 2: 0
Difference: 152

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

It was a final flourish to July that illustrated the state of affairs. Not only had SBM shrunk during the month, but Shadow could be expected to return with even greater force. The effect of putting steps to the world's closure was clearly intoxicating. Soon, it might even be able to afford to cast around for other targets.

In many ways, it was a lesson for both sides. I can say with some certainty that motivating players to repeat the same task is distinctly more viable when there is an end in sight. It is simply because there is an end in sight, simply because it means so much more. The feelings had the most in common with relief; it was not necessarily to excitement or happiness that the news was revealed. It is a simple fact, but one that surely enhances the view of the tribe at the time.

Before we round off July with some maps, a far greater comment can be made on the state of the war at the time:

[spoil]

Shadow vs. SBM: April 6 - August 1

Side 1: 1,848
Side 2: 77
Difference: 1,771

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

Whilst these sorts of statistics need to be taken with a pinch of salt, the sheer scale of the difference between the two tribes becomes unequivocally clear. Over the course of four months, Shadow had put its opponents to the sword with almost 2,000 conquers. It had received just 77 in return.

It's not necessarily fair to discredit SBM completely. Individuals had acquitted themsevles most admirably, but the tide of conquers was unbreakable and had drowned out any contributions from determined players. The sheer scale of the difference between the two sides almost predicts such a result. Organising the effort against Shadow had been a momentous task a year ago; by now it was beyond any of the world's players. The tone was set for the world's end.

[spoil]
Top Tribes: August 1

tribes0108.jpg


Continent Dominance (Tribe): August 1

tribesdom0108.jpg


Top Players: August 1

players0108.jpg

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

[spoil]Top Ten: August 1

Top Ten Tribes
1 Shadow 172.432.103 176.012.701 47 3.744.951 17642 9.977
2 SBM 17.802.672 18.290.868 58 315.360 2097 8.722
3 Dawn 7.379.590 7.521.572 53 141.916 993 7.575
4 SKULL 3.967.977 4.053.963 52 77.961 606 6.690
5 Nomad 3.327.351 3.515.706 74 47.510 525 6.697
6 BIP 2.328.332 2.328.332 8 291.042 250 9.313
7 Dawn-A 1.131.167 1.191.922 83 14.361 247 4.826
8 NOS2 898.250 898.250 2 449.125 104 8.637
9 SAM 523.975 523.975 6 87.329 75 6.986
10 *TKP* 423.056 423.056 2 211.528 62 6.823

Top Ten Players
1 gerick6 Shadow 8.796.142 852 10324
2 Zarin Shadow 8.208.078 805 10196
3 mikestuntz Shadow 7.371.132 733 10056
4 sstarkey Shadow 7.333.352 731 10032
5 Deciphered Shadow 7.062.675 690 10236
6 Mande1992 Shadow 6.514.381 655 9946
7 BrobFellshank Shadow 6.383.788 632 10101
8 SusieJean Shadow 6.146.999 620 9915
9 filphillip Shadow 6.122.573 626 9780
10 bloatedcherub Shadow 6.046.678 600 10078

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

August - Zwischenzug

The final pieces were being manoeuvred into position, sounding the death knell for all but Shadow. The world’s closure was an impending indictment of the state of W27’s affairs. It was the sort of incentive, or even vindication, that can enable a tribe to reach just that little further, and this was demonstrated to profound effect.

The closure of W27 to new applicants was to begin the countdown to the denouement, almost all now certain of its fate. It heralded a sense of the implacable, the irresistible and the inexorable. Where once the world had been a vibrant experiment into new ground for Tribal Wars, it was now long compelled into a single struggle to determine its final outcome. If the world were locked, that fate would be sealed in with it.

Ironically enough, August began with a focus elsewhere, beyond the bleak shores of W27 to DNY’s opus on W12. They too were on a similar road, albeit far further advanced than Shadow, and it was the sort of delightfully ambiguous omen that life often throws. On the one hand, here was living proof that the end could be reached, given that no tribe had yet won a world. On the other, it meant that a silver medal was all Shadow was likely to hope for.

At the time, winning a world had been something glimpsed in the past and almost successfully sought in the case of some older worlds, but challengers had always faded. Now two worlds were coming closer than ever before, and uncharted ground was being surveyed. The tantalising prospect of victory is always made worse by its capricious nature, and somehow it was never safe enough to bank on something so concrete. Despite the importance of the world's closure and the faint competition with W12, the first week of August was inauspiciously slow.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. SBM: August 1 - August 8

Side 1: 70
Side 2: 0
Difference: 70

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

Even so, Shadow could take much consolation from seeing a countdown to their victory commence. No longer was the rim prey to vagrant new players whose beginner protection frustrated every attempt to remove them. Indeed, Shadow’s efforts were beginning to take on a more holistic approach given the nature of this stage of the game, and tribes lower down the table from SBM were now being targeted quite actively. The game had changed.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. Dawn: August 8 - August 15

Side 1: 93
Side 2: 0
Difference: 93

chart


Shadow vs. SBM: August 8 - August 15

Side 1: 62
Side 2: 1
Difference: 61

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

Evidently, SBM was no longer the only target for Shadow; it had begun to branch out, to quite devastating effect. Dawn’s ubiquitous nature made it easy prey for Shadow now that SBM was holed up in the North. That rapidly diminishing front now only allowed a select few members to accomplish significant nobling, and Shadow was finally beginning to approach its objective from a tribe-wide standpoint.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. Dawn: August 15 - August 22

Side 1: 62
Side 2: 4
Difference: 58

chart


Shadow vs. SBM: August 15 - August 22

Side 1: 63
Side 2: 1
Difference: 62

chart


Shadow vs. SKULL: August 15 - August 22

Side 1: 21
Side 2: 0
Difference: 21

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

Another week saw another target enter the fray. An aggression and desire that had seemingly been dormant amidst Shadow’s ranks was rapidly being revealed. The push on SBM was being momentarily jostled to one side to allow a wider and less specific conflict to ensue. Shadow could finally be said to be assuming its mantle.

These were by no means new enemies, but Shadow had always allowed the fight to come to them (arguably one of their major faults throughout their history). Now at last, the closure of the world, or some other external force, had spurred them into action against any neighbour that could be found. It was finally beginning to look like the tribe it needed to be.

SKULL and Dawn were the third and fourth ranked tribes respectively, thrust into a new conflict that they had probably been hoping to avoid. There was little comment to be found on any of the tribes facing Shadow, a symptom of the uninspiring conclusion to events. It is therefore difficult to say with certainty how any of the larger tribes were reacting to this new style of warfare, or how the world was responding to being dragged into such a multifarious and indiscriminate conflict.

The pace of W27 was beginning to pick up. The world’s closure was finally allowing the world to haemorrhage players, and somewhere on the corpse-strewn battlefields, Shadow was finally taking command; at last it was putting the fate of the world beyond any doubt.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. BIP: August 22 - August 29

Side 1: 10
Side 2: 0
Difference: 10

chart


Shadow vs. Dawn: August 22 - August 29

Side 1: 50
Side 2: 1
Difference: 49

chart


Shadow vs. SBM: August 22 - August 29

Side 1: 98
Side 2: 3
Difference: 95

chart


Shadow vs. SKULL: August 22 - August 29

Side 1: 33
Side 2: 3
Difference: 30

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

Not content with engagements against three tribes, Shadow was taking on a fourth. Despite what were largely unremarkable weekly totals for the tribe, its focus and drive to banish its opponents was distinctly enviable. The sporadic and aimless conquest of past months on all but the Northern front had been replaced by a determined assault, dictated by objectives and the elimination of key enemy players.

When Shadow was looking least in need of a transformation, fate had chosen its moment. Suddenly the endgame had taken on quite a different image, with operations underway on every front. The sudden flourish of August, combined with a rapidly declining membership could mean only one conclusion. What’s more, hidden among the ashes of the rapid player exodus was the possibility of cheaper nobles: an unnecessarily final nail in the world’s coffin.

[spoil]
Top Tribes: August 29

tribes2908.jpg


Continent Dominance (Tribe): August 29

tribesdom2908.jpg


Top Players: August 29

players2908.jpg

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

[spoil]Top Ten: August 29

Top Ten Tribes

1 Shadow 179.998.755 182.857.423 46 3.975.161 18359 9.960
2 SBM 15.206.496 15.681.968 61 257.081 1842 8.514
3 SKULL 6.131.650 6.318.667 57 110.854 887 7.124
4 Dawn 5.744.666 5.745.126 48 119.690 754 7.620
5 BIP 2.468.775 2.468.775 9 274.308 344 7.177
6 SAM 984.585 984.585 13 75.737 145 6.790
7 NOS2 851.680 851.680 2 425.840 101 8.432
8 Dawn-A 672.693 713.336 71 10.047 171 4.172
9 *TKP* 297.335 297.335 2 148.668 47 6.326
10 +KN+ 234.275 235.024 47 5.001 72 3.264

Top Ten Players

1 gerick6 Shadow 9.380.930 908 10331
2 Zarin Shadow 8.789.164 860 10220
3 sstarkey Shadow 7.546.189 760 9929
4 mikestuntz Shadow 7.431.727 737 10084
5 Deciphered Shadow 7.371.051 718 10266
6 Mande1992 Shadow 7.033.240 713 9864
7 SusieJean Shadow 6.563.535 663 9900
8 BrobFellshank Shadow 6.520.829 645 10110
9 filphillip Shadow 6.226.741 634 9821
10 bloatedcherub Shadow 6.203.704 615 10087

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]
 
Last edited by a moderator:

DeletedUser

Guest
September - Half-Priced Hurt

With conflict raging on every front, Shadow’s victory march was gaining in momentum. Resistance to their nobling was conspicuous by its rarity. After all, what could the handful of active players do against an entire tribe?

Yet, despite the renewed impetus of August and the closure of the world on the horizon, Shadow was still a tribe divided. As had been the case for many preceding months, its gears were oiled only by a much smaller part of the total membership. This section of the membership, mostly those at the top, was dragging the rest of the tribe to its victory. The only question was whether it would last.

It was the case on both sides that the tiresome ubiquity of the game had taken its toll. Of the large players who remained active in the world, the vast majority were fighting for Shadow. Indeed, of the players in total that remained active, Shadow was again richly endowed. It was becoming clear that many of the accounts outside of Shadow lacked activity and experience. As long as a dedicated core remained in Shadow, it could afford its own share of inactivity and lethargy.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. BIP: August 29 - September 5

Side 1: 12
Side 2: 0
Difference: 12

chart


Shadow vs. Dawn: August 29 - September 5

Side 1: 45
Side 2: 0
Difference: 45

chart


Shadow vs. SBM: August 29 - September 5

Side 1: 58
Side 2: 0
Difference: 58

chart


Shadow vs. SKULL: August 29 - September 5

Side 1: 63
Side 2: 3
Difference: 60

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

The first week saw another unsurprising set of events in the war. With BIP being drawn into the war alongside SBM in the North, we could finally observe the plans of Shadow unfolding. The large number of conquers was yielding to advances on all fronts, but those numbers themselves belied a far greater prize for that week.

The closure of the world was significantly expediting the loss of players for the world, and it just so happened that this was to be the time when that number dropped below 1000. While many might have clamoured that Shadow needed no more advantages, the process of voting for cheaper nobles was not to be stopped. Indeed, with the months wearing on, both sides cared more about a swift end than winning or losing.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. BIP: September 5 - September 12

Side 1: 12
Side 2: 0
Difference: 12

chart


Shadow vs. Dawn: September 5 - September 12

Side 1: 33
Side 2: 1
Difference: 32

chart


Shadow vs. SBM: September 5 - September 12

Side 1: 61
Side 2: 1
Difference: 60

chart


Shadow vs. SKULL: September 5 - September 12

Side 1: 85
Side 2: 1
Difference: 84

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

The story of Shadow’s relentless march continued. Their main opponent, SBM, was now severely depleted of active players. The few who resisted only made themselves more likely targets. The gulf of experience, as well as size, left SBM bereft of any real means to counter. Coupled with the psychological impact of such unrelenting defeat over such a long stretch, SBM was crumbling.

Other tribes could fare little better. SKULL and Dawn boasted even fewer large or experienced players. Any sense of tribal cohesion or congruity was evaporating. Many players were simply waiting and growing for as long as possible before trying to face Shadow individually. The other opponent, BIP, was escaping largely unscathed. Despite an uninviting position on the frontline, Shadow still preferred to focus on enemies that posed a risk, instead of a tribe called ‘Blessed is the Peacemaker’. Given that nobles were still not overly plentiful, Shadow was content to be strategic with its efforts.

While a lack of coordination might have been problematic among its opponents, Shadow was free to allow players to engage as individuals. Given that it now possessed a string of players that dwarfed all but the largest two tribes in size, coordination was largely unnecessary. For those opposing it, any semblance of a last stand was only going to be rendered by a concerted, tribal effort. Many, it seemed, had already given up.

The vote for reducing the price of nobles came as predicted. Its result did not. This author is not about to offer his skills of persuasion in his speech on the forum for the reason why the vote was so unanimous, but rather the contemporary spirit of the world. Although maintaining the price of nobles and hence stringing out the end of the world was likely to have an infinitely better chance of defeating Shadow (by seeing its players grow tired and leave), it is testament to the spirit of the time and the character of the enemy that the reduction went through.

Many, both inside and outside of Shadow, felt that enough was enough. Every sign pointed to Shadow winning, and given the incredible perseverance its membership had already shown, there was no reason to believe that another few months extra would prevent them. But more importantly, many had enjoyed their time and were keen to see it out to the end, even if that meant defeat. Indeed, a great number showed themselves to be above the petty nature of stalling the vote, keen to see W27's end as one of intense combat, rather than slow emaciation.

Despite its obvious ramifications for the world, the vote passed with a final tally of 187-22. The full thread, with Shadow’s blatant enthusiasm, can be found here.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. BIP: September 12 - September 19

Side 1: 4
Side 2: 0
Difference: 4

chart


Shadow vs. Dawn: September 12 - September 19

Side 1: 32
Side 2: 0
Difference: 32

chart


Shadow vs. SBM: September 12 - September 19

Side 1: 59
Side 2: 0
Difference: 59

chart


Shadow vs. SKULL: September 12 - September 19

Side 1: 103
Side 2: 1
Difference: 102

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

The first week of stats with the cheaper nobles was a clear example of just how dangerous it could be to invigorate Shadow. Although conquers had not doubled, the increase was understandably significant for both sides. In fact, it not only allocated more ammunition to the most aggressive players, but also brought new life to many whose activity had dropped off during the relative ease of the summer months.

On the other hand, the early numbers don’t exactly presage the emphatic final push to victory. While halving the price of nobles does not necessarily promise doubling the conquers, a more significant increase than this would have been expected. Given the chance to sprint over the finish line, Shadow seemed content to saunter casually there.

Yet, what else was needed? Cheaper nobles are just as useful to those trying to mount a desperate counter, but nothing of the sort ever surfaced. That week, SBM lost their largest player (justme4), handing Shadow uncontested control of 39 out of the top 40 ranking spots. Both sides were disappointing overall, the difference being that Shadow could survive a bad week, whereas its opponents could not.

Elsewhere, it was SKULL rather than SBM suffering most heavily at the hands of Shadow. Curiously enough, the northern elements had settled into a rhythm from which they were reluctant to digress, whereas SKULL was all too tempting a target for those who had previously been quiet. The ending of the world and the cheapening of nobles had dealt SKULL a miserable hand in the final stages of the world.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. SBM: September 19 - September 26

Side 1: 132
Side 2: 1
Difference: 131

chart


Shadow vs. SKULL: September 19 - September 26

Side 1: 60
Side 2: 0
Difference: 60

chart


Shadow vs. Dawn: September 19 - September 26

Side 1: 40
Side 2: 0
Difference: 40

chart


Shadow vs. BIP: September 19 - September 26

Side 1: 22
Side 2: 0
Difference: 22

chart

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

Just when it seemed that Shadow was unmoved by its new advantage, it silenced its critics once again. Perhaps it took some time for the memo to find the players in the North. It was the first week in a long time to demonstrate that Shadow still had a desire to win the world. Hitting just shy of 400 conquers for the week, Shadow was moving back into the sort of frenzy that hadn't been seen for many months.

Interestingly enough, the target of choice for the week was not the exotic or tender fare of the newer tribes in the conflict who had sated its appetite earlier in the month, but rather the old favourite of SBM. Those fighting in the North, it seemed, were not to be outdone by last week’s push on SKULL. The story was the same on all fronts, with BIP even seeing some heavy action. With just a single conquer in return, the rest of the world was coming dangerously close to being overwhelmed completely.

But for all the euphoria over this new spate of noblings (and new direction for Shadow too perhaps), an all together different piece of news was breaking in the Shadow camps. Far away, in an older world, DNY had completed their domination of W12.

Seeing it come to fruition was a delightfully mixed message. Shadow now had a precedent, a genuine affirmation that winning a world was feasible. Yet it also would not be the first, and it was bitterly ironic to come second at coming first. It would not detract from Shadow’s achievement, but it might relegate them in the history books.

Whatever its feelings and however badly its pride was wounded, Shadow was not about to be deterred from its path. With another month drawing to a close, Shadow’s implacable advance continued to be the story, much to the chagrin of the rest of the world. With cheaper nobles and only mere hints of resistance, Shadow was comfortably in control.

October - Last Orders

[spoil]
Top Tribes: October 3

tribes0310-1.jpg


Continent Dominance (Tribe): October 3

tribesdom0310.jpg


Top Players: October 3

players0310-1.jpg

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

We begin October with another look at the state of the world. Shadow’s dominance of continents showed only 3 beyond its reach and a war that was nearing its end on almost every front. The few outposts of SBM in the North-East could be approached on multiple sides and the final offensive looked weeks away.

Enemy tribes were thinly spread, with numbers of villages in the hundreds, rather than thousands. Even then, the larger tribes like Dawn and SKULL were spread around the map, rather than having one stronghold to defend. Forced to the edges of the map, they formed an uneasy coating on a world wreathed in Shadow.

By now of course, Shadow players had begun to surpass all the other tribes in size. It possessed 5 players larger than SBM and more than 15 greater than any of the other tribes. Its top 2 players comprised almost as many points as the rest of the top 15 tribes. It was clear that Shadow only needed a handful of players to see off the competition.

The stats that came from the preceding week left the world in little doubt as to its direction. The full momentum of cheaper nobles and an active tribe was continuing to fuel a relentless charge to the edges of the map. None could stand in its way.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. BIP: September 26 - October 3

Side 1: 49
Side 2: 0
Difference: 49

chart


Shadow vs. Dawn: September 26 - October 3

Side 1: 15
Side 2: 0
Difference: 15

chart


Shadow vs. SBM: September 26 - October 3

Side 1: 129
Side 2: 2
Difference: 127

http://chart.apis.google.com/chart?chs=190x135&cht=bvs&chco=BB173E|1EBA24&chxt=x,r&chxl=0:|Side 1|Side 2|1:|0|129&chbh=60,20,20&chf=bg,s,F8F4E8&chtt=twstats.com&chts=000000,10&chd=t:129,2&chds=0,129&chxr=1,1,129[/img

[b][u]Shadow vs. SKULL: September 26 - October 3[/u][/b]

[b]Side 1:[/b] 73
[b]Side 2:[/b] 0
[b]Difference:[/b] 73

[img]http://chart.apis.google.com/chart?chs=190x135&cht=bvs&chco=BB173E|1EBA24&chxt=x,r&chxl=0:|Side 1|Side 2|1:|0|73&chbh=60,20,20&chf=bg,s,F8F4E8&chtt=twstats.com&chts=000000,10&chd=t:73,0&chds=0,73&chxr=1,1,73​

Source: W27 Weekly

[/spoil]

In the final week of the W27 Weekly, Shadow posted a total of 451. It was a total that outshone many, many previous weeks and was encouraging for all those who wanted to see the world finished. SBM were still the priority target, but their neighbour, Dawn, was passed over in favour of BIP. The semblance of structure or planning to the offensives was being discarded in favour of speed.

It is here that I pay a brief tribute to the W27 Weekly. Simply put, this history would not have been possible without it. It brought out many emotions, but I look back with pride on a wonderful achievement. I'd like to leave the words I wrote at the end of my time with it; they capture my feelings at the time most aptly:

[spoil]
Zarin said:
It is with a heavy heart that I must call an end to proceedings here. It has been a long and winding road in my time writing the Weekly, but it is one I have enjoyed immensely. I'd like to thank all those who read it, shared it, added to it, edited it, supported it, acknowledged it and generally allowed me to make something I am proud of. It means a great deal to me to look back on all I have written and understand the commitment, time and care it took to compile. It remains something close to my heart and something that I shall take with me in life.

From informing the world, to improving my written English, to aiding my world history, to getting me noticed on the world stage, it has served many purposes over its time. Now that I am here, looking back, I guess I never realised in the Sunday rush how important it was to me. It's been a real pleasure to compile the issues, to interview, to research, to comment, to try to think up something vaguely witty to say. It threatened with insanity at times, and has stressed me on many occasions, but it fills me with a deep happiness and fulfilment to know that I stuck at it.

As I close this chapter on my life, and move onto the bright lights of real blogging, I should like to once again thank all those who supported this; all those who put up with my bias, arrogance and wayward thinking; and all those who encouraged me to keep at it. I met a lot of people doing the interviews and learnt a lot about the world, the game and life in general from it. I do not exaggerate when I say that it has changed my life and I wanted to write something here to share that with you all. When I came here, I never intended to be a writer, and yet I find myself pulled in that direction; who knows what will become of it?

For the last time, as editor of the W27 Weekly, I wish you all well and thank you once again,
Zarin

Source: W27 Weekly Thread

[/spoil]

The next week would usher in the W27 Blog as opposed to the W27 Weekly. Much of the source work for this history comes from the W27 Weekly, but no longer. The bright lights of the Blog were too much to resist, as was the promise of a larger audience, and thus the Weekly was to continue in a new form. With its modernity and fresh appearance, it conjured a new style of panache and humour. Started way back in the early days of the world, but abandoned, the W27 Blog would have its time again.

For all this author’s off-beat humour and frenzied sarcasm, the Blog did report on one or two crucial moments in the midst of October. The first week of the month saw the disbandment of BIP, pressured as they had been in preceding weeks into quitting. For the first week, stories elsewhere were mostly unremarkable.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. Dawn: October 3 - October 10

Side 1: 85
Side 2: 1
Difference: 84

chart


Shadow vs. SBM: October 3 - October 10

Side 1: 62
Side 2: 0
Difference: 62

chart


Shadow vs. SKULL: October 3 - October 10

Side 1: 64
Side 2: 2
Difference: 62

chart

Source: W27 Blog

[/spoil]

Despite the demise of BIP, northern operations seemed to be taking a polite break from conquest. It was left to other sectors to fill the void. And fill the void they did. Despite finally pulling together the courage to attack Shadow back, both SKULL and Dawn suffered terribly on the battlefield. Few, if any, seemed to be safe; and all of it was tied together with a pleasing parity on all fronts.

Yet, for all its ostensible martial prowess and dominance of W27’s affairs, more bad news would reach Shadow ears. Yet another world was to be closing, and it wasn’t 27. Shadow had to get moving, or it would be overtaken again – this time by W18.

And if that was not sufficient; if settling bronze were not a bitter enough pill to swallow, W7 was up for closure shortly afterwards. Shadow was slipping dangerously in the only contest it had left. Its totals against enemies, while laudable, were simply not enough. New impetus and new focus were needed if Shadow wanted anything at all to be proud of.

At the time, all was up in the air. Shadow’s tenuous mix of aggression and apathy continued to prolong the charade as it dithered amidst the colourful morass of enemies. *TKP* was climbing up the rankings! It was sign that the world was in a strange place, and whether Shadow would have a podium finish, let alone be home by Christmas, remained to be seen.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. Dawn: October 10 - October 17

Side 1: 15
Side 2: 1
Difference: 14

chart


Shadow vs. SBM: October 10 - October 17

Side 1: 49
Side 2: 0
Difference: 49

chart


Shadow vs. SKULL: October 10 - October 17

Side 1: 83
Side 2: 0
Difference: 83

chart

Source: W27 Blog

[/spoil]

While its opponents might have been bereft of activity, Shadow too was beginning to look dangerously average again. Despite expecting to be overtaken at least once by other worlds, Shadow moved as ever at its own pace.

Dawn recovered well from the uneven contest of the previous week, still willing to take back a village on occasion. Their score was the best any had seen in a very, very long time. Flashes of resistance were present, if fleeting and sporadic. SBM too was continuing to recover, even if only by sustaining fewer losses. The week was only rescued for Shadow by the new offensive on SKULL.

As always, it was a tale of two sides. On the one hand, Shadow was still largely underpinned by a much smaller group of large players who continue to grow and take villages while the rest of the tribe was largely left to hold down its dominance in territory and points. A week of 330 conquers corresponds to little more than one conquer per player per day. For a tribe of its size, this late in the game, Shadow should have been expecting to push a significant way beyond that.

On the other hand, the reality of the game is far removed from the theoretical side. Shadow was beset by activity problems as every tribe is, the difference being that its prominent position and lack of enemy pressure prevented them from being revealed. Indeed, given the reality of most tribes, maintaining 300+ conquers each week is nothing to be sniffed at.

Perhaps, Shadow did not embarrass itself; but it did not sell itself either. The rest of the world was out of options; the membership of enemy tribes was largely despondent. The world was there for the taking, and it was in two minds as to how it was going to finish. Few cared, and it suited everyone down to the ground.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. Dawn: October 17 - October 24

Side 1: 23
Side 2: 2
Difference: 21

chart


Shadow vs. [OBL]: October 17 - October 24

Side 1: 9
Side 2: 0
Difference: 9

chart


Shadow vs. SBM: October 17 - October 24

Side 1: 60
Side 2: 1
Difference: 59

chart

Source: W27 Blog

[/spoil]

Not content with its specious showings in recent weeks, Shadow was back on the decline. Despite the disbandment of SKULL and its rearrangement into various other tribes (partly [OBL]), Shadow’s reluctance to seize the initiative was plain again. With Dawn finally finding its feet too, the war was looking more and more like cutting deep into the future.

Fortunately for Shadow, the industrious faction that had largely carried its advance continued to fuel the fires of war, even if less enthusiastically than this time last month. It should not be underestimated that a scarcity of targets was causing problems as was the increasingly dispersed nature of enemy villages. As some fronts were coming to an end, players were suddenly finding themselves without a reliable supply of targets. Whatever the case, a scarcity of nobles could not be blamed.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. Dawn: October 24 - October 31

Side 1: 76
Side 2: 1
Difference: 75

chart


Shadow vs. [OBL]: October 24 - October 31

Side 1: 55
Side 2: 1
Difference: 54

chart


Shadow vs. SBM: October 24 - October 31

Side 1: 75
Side 2: 3
Difference: 72

chart

Source: W27 Blog

[/spoil]

Halloween chose to bring a most unusual of weeks to the fore. Yet again when the world seemed content to slide into apathy and obscurity, it is rejuvenated. How long ago did every tribe take villages from Shadow?

As October finished, positives could be found on both sides. Shadow’s previous reluctance to conquer was being blasted from the field in another blitzkrieg on all fronts. But that should not hide the fact that its enemies could still be determined and successful if they wanted to be.

But for all Shadow’s unpredictable activity, the likes of SBM, Dawn and [OBL] needed more than consolation conquers. For all the changes to the world, for all the new names and faces, it was the same story a year ago. Against an avalanche of conquers, it was too little too late.
 
Last edited by a moderator:

DeletedUser

Guest
November - Endgame

[spoil]

Top Tribes
[spoil]
topktribes-nov-7.png
[/spoil]

[spoil]
toptribes-nov-7.png
[/spoil]

Top Players
[spoil]
topplayers-nov-7.png
[/spoil]

Source: W27 Blog

[/spoil]

Shadow was evidently in control. Only the North-East could string together any semblance of enemy territory. Shadow’s armies numbered untold millions, bent on the destruction of its enemies. Hope for the rest of the world had long since evaporated. It was at this time that the endgame began.

The first week of November, while the world was being locked into the endgame, saw another surge against closest rivals SBM. Despite growing unpredictability in the Shadow camp over its willingness to sprint for victory, it prevailed.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. SBM, Dawn, [OBL]: October 31 – November 7

Zarin said:
Shadow vs. SBM

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 163
Side 2: 0
Difference: 163

chart


Shadow vs. Dawn

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 74
Side 2: 0
Difference: 74

chart


Shadow vs. [OBL]

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 42
Side 2: 0
Difference: 42

chart

Source: W27 Blog

[/spoil]

Even without the anticipated price reduction on nobles and removal of restarts, Shadow was finally waking up to its goal. Emphatic gains on every front, coupled with its maintenance of cohesion and loyalty was all the evidence needed to press Shadow into the final stage of the game.

Following this successful week, Shadow was to be locked into the endgame scenario. To claim complete victory, it had three months to conquer the remaining 1500 or so villages on the map, or else claim lesser victory at the end of that period. Its only means of defeat, barring some truly eleventh hour riposte from enemy tribes, was conflict from within. The threat of internal strife is never to be ignored.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. SBM, Dawn, [OBL]: November 7 – November 14

Zarin said:
Shadow vs. SBM

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 231
Side 2: 0
Difference: 231

chart


Shadow vs. Dawn

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 85
Side 2: 0
Difference: 85

chart


Shadow vs. [OBL]

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 77
Side 2: 2
Difference: 75

chart

Source: W27 Blog

[/spoil]

But if any were to put their faith in Shadow succumbing to an unprecedented civil war, they were to be gravely mistaken, perhaps almost literally. It is one of those strange ironies that we play a game to escape the trappings of real life, only to concern ourselves with speeding its end so that we can return to the machinations of reality. Perhaps all were now so sick of the end of the world being constantly predicted and deferred that they truly wanted to be done with it.

Whatever the case, Shadow’s opus looked set to be coming to an end. Another week of monumental totals, including the largest single total against SBM and the largest holistic tribe total in Shadow’s history, was the sort of fitting denouement many in the tribe had hoped for. Cheaper nobles and the possibility of victory were all the encouragements it needed.

Beyond the frontier, in the lands of its enemies, things were looking rather different. The unexpected patience and perseverance of those arrayed against Shadow was not to waver, whether out of some deep resentment of loss or perhaps a more magnanimous willingness, not only to bring the world to a fitting end, but also to uphold proudly the names of so many who fought against the Shadow. Regardless of the almost comedic asymmetry between the two sides, some at least would go to their ends with swords in their hands and heads held high.

Nevertheless, the most effective result of this new take on the world was the prevention of restarts. Shadow’s inability to completely eradicate enemies was to be swiftly amended, and many of the most important conquers centred on eliminating smaller players. For too long had small players either hidden under the safety of morale or else taken to restarting whenever they were eliminated.

With Shadow now free to move against the many smaller thorns in its side, particularly those who had prevented a complete eradication of resistance on certain fronts (notably the South and South-West), it moved that week to dominate every continent on the map. All that remained to do was to seek and destroy each and every enemy village on the map; there would be no relenting or respite. Two years since its inception, almost to the day, W27 was looking a very different place.

[spoil]

Shadow vs. SBM, Dawn, [OBL]: November 14 – November 21

Zarin said:
Shadow vs. SBM

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 154
Side 2: 2
Difference: 152

chart


Shadow vs. Dawn

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 87
Side 2: 0
Difference: 87

chart


Shadow vs. [OBL]

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 132
Side 2: 0
Difference: 132

chart

Source: W27 Blog

[/spoil]

[spoil]

Shadow vs. SBM, Dawn, [OBL]: November 21 – November 28

Zarin said:
Shadow vs. SBM

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 80
Side 2: 0
Difference: 80

chart


Shadow vs. Dawn

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 44
Side 2: 1
Difference: 43

chart


Shadow vs. [OBL]

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 123
Side 2: 0
Difference: 123

chart

Source: W27 Blog

[/spoil]

The last half of November saw the story continue in more impressive displays of nobling. While veterans SBM put up the fiercest fight, [OBL] enjoyed a most torrid of finishes to the world. The final stage of the world had galvanised Shadow, but had utterly failed to incite its enemies. Shadow's victory was inches from completion.

My final words on November, offering a slightly different and contemporary insight, will be those from the blog on November 28:

[spoil]

Zarin said:
There are few words able to sum up the W27 situation that are not featured in ‘Urban Dictionary’. When you realise that only 10 tribes remain, and that those opposing the world leaders, Shadow, total some 1,500,000 points, you realise that the world is in dire trouble. It does mean that we are rather close to the end; and that means I can treat you to a juicy issue of the W27 Blog in what could well be one of my last.

Picture the scene if you will: Shadow enjoys massive dominance across every continent of the world. Isolated pockets of resistance are all that remain. Players hang onto their last village desperately, hoping in vain that they might be spared by some miracle. Shadow stutters at the last hurdle with selfish claiming and laziness.

The usual apathy surrounding W27 is evident once again as the public forum is less active than any, despite the impending victory here. Is that because there is no debate? Is that because it has been done once and now the novelty has worn off?

Certainly, the victory in W27 might come as more of a surprise than the one in W12 ever did. Whilst hopes for finishing before the end of November might be dashed, W27 should certainly not drag on beyond mid-December.

The most recent week has proved that when united with purpose, Shadow can be a far more formidable machine. It’s ironic that only when the battle is won do we see some of the most endemic activity and nobling from Shadow.

It’s perhaps not surprising that, only now, are we seeing the best in them. I remember well the apathy and laziness that was an inherent part of many conflicts. Indeed, any tribe leader will know that it can be very difficult to keep an entire tribe motivated, regardless of the situation. Even while Shadow enjoyed a dominant position for the last year, it has spent much time resting, at least in part, on its laurels.

Ignoring the reduction in the price of nobles, the increase in nobling has been substantial. It has been the psychological impetus of impending victory that has really expedited events on W27. I honestly thought that a 2010 finish was out of the question, but throw in the knowledge that victory looms, and the tribe is transformed.

A cynical commentator would make a great deal of this. Does it really take a genius to ascertain that most players are therefore in it for themselves? Tribal Wars is a massive commitment, and giving every day is an exceptional thing. Every tribe has its core of players that can be relied upon to do this, but the throng of other players is a capricious and protean beast.

As a result, whilst certain players give continuously for the entirety of the lifetime of a tribe, others add their contribution as and when it suits them. Tribes hinge not on the core, but the state of the rest of the membership. If these can be persuaded, encouraged or coerced into action, a tribe’s impact can grow exponentially. This is exactly what we have observed.

Whilst its veterans have merely been augmented by packet cost reductions (see nobling for last 30 days), others have been encouraged to rise the occasion. It wasn’t the availability of nobles, since apathetic play would have yielded masses of packets anyway; no, it was the incentive of victory.

As a duke, I think that it has been an interesting experience in psychology to watch the shift in ethos at the behest of announcements of impending victory. I don’t lament this new vigour, and indeed I applaud it, but much like my cynicism towards ‘Christmas spirit’, I ask where it was the rest of the time.

Source: W27 Blog

[/spoil]

And just in case you can’t quite picture the scene, here are some images that speak volumes about the state of the world:

[spoil]

Top Tribes
[spoil]
ak-dom-28.9.png
[/spoil]

[spoil]
atribedom29.8.png
[/spoil]

Top Players
[spoil]
aplayerdom29.11.png
[/spoil]

[/spoil]


December - Victory

The tale of December is a short and predictable one. The inevitably which had gripped the world was finally brought to its end by Shadow’s victory. For all the waiting and twists and turns on the path to victory, the last days were oddly unremarkable. With few targets, much of the tribe was consigned to waiting as the final bastions of enemy resistance were sought and conquered, or also trying to finish with style as they hauled in ever-increasing numbers of barbarian villages.

As of 07:01:32 server time on December 14, the last enemy village was nobled by Shadow, fittingly enough by its duchess Ephette from SBM and the hands of orvil58. The world was closed the following day.

A few final rankings (following the extra nobles on the last day) and extra pieces of information are thus:

[spoil]

1 Shadow 235,387,960 239,152,264 44 5,435,279 24,726 9,672

1 gerick6 Shadow 13,706,930 1,250 10,966
2 Zarin Shadow 13,177,427 1,307 10,082
3 sstarkey Shadow 12,339,222 1,244 9,919
4 mikestuntz Shadow 11,890,832 1,208 9,843
5 lord trader Shadow 11,309,873 1,168 9,683
6 foghorn66 Shadow 9,676,265 1,031 9,385
7 SusieJean Shadow 9,419,251 967 9,741
8 kfoo Shadow 8,691,076 869 10,001
9 Mande1992 Shadow 8,554,901 980 8,729
10 Deciphered Shadow 8,172,568 810 10,090
11 bloatedcherub Shadow 7,644,542 795 9,616
12 BrobFellshank Shadow 6,951,730 728 9,549
13 stampcoin Shadow 6,571,859 717 9,166
14 filphillip Shadow 6,354,694 650 9,776
15 woodman14 Shadow 6,259,372 652 9,600
16 CSLincoln Shadow 5,982,710 589 10,157
17 Hale Storm Shadow 5,850,285 597 9,799
18 winvarwen Shadow 5,731,675 577 9,934
19 ftw97 Shadow 5,021,951 510 9,847
20 Warehouse Ghost Shadow 4,958,936 506 9,800
21 Sir Achilleus Shadow 4,835,622 487 9,929
22 Ephette Shadow 4,790,486 493 9,717
23 kennyd69 Shadow 4,587,510 452 10,149
24 pallysrange Shadow 4,433,091 471 9,412
25 braxtongold Shadow 4,424,701 531 8,333
26 soccergiant Shadow 4,136,803 420 9,850
27 JuanmaPerren Shadow 4,039,123 529 7,635
28 hamish83 Shadow 3,859,407 403 9,577
29 pietr Shadow 3,666,945 371 9,884
30 gmdobb Shadow 3,308,714 363 9,115
31 kdog4864 Shadow 3,204,871 326 9,831
32 wangro3 Shadow 3,123,382 313 9,979
33 Badio Shadow 2,903,335 285 10,187
34 JamTheIceman Shadow 2,812,549 313 8,986
35 kip69 Shadow 2,717,975 288 9,437
36 henry88 Shadow 2,498,778 252 9,916
37 raptors1970 Shadow 2,323,059 243 9,560
38 Eldrek Shadow 2,055,416 236 8,709
39 toby7304 Shadow 1,750,086 220 7,955
40 Shaneanigans Shadow 1,650,008 173 9,538
41 Ed the Killer Shadow 1,414,705 141 10,033
42 widgrenk Shadow 1,145,565 116 9,876
43 DDragon12 Shadow 756,381 72 10,505
44 mrpickle99 Shadow 447,653 73 6,132

Source: TW Stats

About World 27:

World 27 was announced along with World 28 on the 10th of November 2008, and started on the 13th. It shared a registration constraint with world 28.

The world featured very unique settings, with each joining player being randomly put in one of 200 tribes. During the first three months of the world it was not possible to leave a tribe or for it to be disbanded. As soon as a tribe reached 100 members a duke was elected via vote in the forums.

10,587 players joined on opening day, with that total rising to 35,113 after a week. Sadly 35,113 was also the peak number of players we saw on the world.

In terms of ennoblement activity the world peaked during week 2 of 2009, during which there were 198 village captures every day.

The world has 107,414 villages, has seen 86,642 village captures and TW Stats has tracked 108,528 tribe changes, making the world the 'quietest' world we have at tribalwars.net.

The world was closed to new registrations on the 5th of August 2010.

Source: W27 Forum

[/spoil]

Some 762 days after its inception, World 27 was ended. Shadow would become the second tribe to win a world, after W12’s DNY. Its story was over.
 
Last edited by a moderator:

DeletedUser

Guest
Epilogue

It is only now that I appreciate what went on here. Sometimes we are so wrapped in the machinations, the intricacies that we forget the bigger picture. The victory is a testament to Shadow, but the world itself is far more than a single tribe. It is the way it is because of all those who made it, not just those who finished it.

Unsurprisingly, people often ask why Shadow won this world. The history written here goes some way to answering the question, but I have only hinted at the final answer until now. I want to offer some responses from many others before I put forward my own.

I'll be putting in some interview pieces here

The final word on this falls to me. Shadow is not the greatest tribe to have ever graced this game; it is the greatest tribe to have graced this world. That's why it won. World 27 is unique; no secret has been made of that. As such, a unique tribe was always going to win.

The reasons for its victory are many. The first point is that ATTACK/Shadow was set on victory from its inception. Its drive has always been to dominate the world. There was never any notion that the tribe would settle for anything less than the best. In most worlds, such a thing is difficult to instigate; you can never know who to invite or how big to make the tribe. Do you risk inviting players over a small area, but potentially set yourself up for being dwarfed by another tribe; or do you expand far and wide, but risk becoming overstretched? World 27 offered a unique experience where tribes could only be built three months in. Leaders had a chance to plan and construct their strategies.

I have likened the early ATTACK to a massive pre-made because that's exactly what it was. It knew which players it wanted and it snapped them up. It expanded more widely than other tribes, intent on world domination, but got this expansion right. It read the world and it saw its opportunity. These manoeuvres, overseen by the leadership, laid the foundations for greatness.

Secondly, in its early months after the Tribe Lock, ATTACK/Shadow built on its experience. It had recruited a good number of experienced players and it shared this knowledge around. Its war machine learned quickly, and its members worked hard for each other. It stuck to its ethos, and it had the confidence and aggression to seize early victories.

Moreover, it never gave up. Whilst Shadow's toughest test arguably came in Nstlk*, that does not mean that it ever stagnated or rested on its laurels. The tribe always remained fixed on its goals. At times, it worked as a coherent whole, at others parts worked independently of each other. Sometimes individuals had to lead by example, or even haul the tribe up single-handedly. But Shadow never gave in, despite all the tests it went through, all the time it took.

Indeed, Shadow has always had the right leaders for the right time. Ephette had the early vision to get the ball rolling and to keep the goal of world domination perpetually on the tribe's horizon. OjibweMan was the glue that kept the early tribe together, the quiet power behind ATTACK's relentless rise. albrew5 may have divided opinion, but there is no doubt that he was the war leader that the tribe needed; he led by example and taught many their trade. Mande1992 was calming influence that steered the tribe in uncertain times. A fine example to the members, he carefully guided the tribe from its early successes to its later dominance. As for me, I don't quite know what to put. Perhaps my history is an indictment of my commitment to world and the tribe. I have been described as many things, from untenably pompous to a master tactician. I expect many will remember me as a mix of the other leaders' styles, sometimes a war-leader, sometimes just trying to hold the tribe together for the finish.

My final point is of course that Shadow was home to many fine individuals. Some did not make it to the end, but many more grew admirably throughout the course of the world and rose to the occasion. Fortunate in its own right to possess some fantastic players, its members were the bedrock on which victory was built. United in their focus and determination, I can think of no more fitting tribute than their fine legacy which is inscribed here.

Simply put, Shadow had a remarkable succession of leaders who utilised a fantastic range of individuals to achieve its aims. It may not be the biggest or the strongest; it may not have faced as many tests as others; it may not have been part of the largest or most frenzied world; but it was a pleasure and an honour to serve. It shows what can be achieved when a tribe sticks to an ethos, when it has the extraordinary individuals that can realise that vision. It shows that focus, dedication and persistence, seeded with experience and direction, can grow into success.

I do not doubt that many things could have come to pass, that many mistakes were made by Shadow and its enemies alike that changed the way the world played out. I do not doubt that a little luck fell its way. I do not doubt that Shadow was a unique tribe built for a unique world. Yet amidst all of that, amidst all the what ifs and the qualifications, amidst all the possible criticisms, I will say simply that in an uncertain world, it was Shadow's focus, vision and ethos that brought it victory.

And so, this is a final word from me. I don't know how far anyone can go to truly answering the question of why. Sometimes it is nothing more than the luck of the random placement in the world that put certain individuals on certain sides of war. Sometimes it is the holistic brilliance of an entire tribe. You may make your own judgements.

Whatever the case, I know that to many Tribal Wars was, and is, more than just a game. W27 was many things to many people, some of which were wholly unexpected, but you do not give yourself to something for two years and end up poorer for the experience. Some things change people profoundly.

In some ways this work is a tribute to that. It is an acknowledgement of all the good times and all the bad that shaped those involved. It is a jaunt down the paths of nostalgia, as well as a reminder of the way things have been. It is a string of facts in a piece of fiction.

Does it matter that none of it is real? Are the experiences and the changes wrought any weaker because the world in which they exist is the vestige of an illusion? Where is the line that divides a person from themselves and their persona; are they not part of the same thing? Are they not the same?

The real history, the real lasting impact of the world is not in the bytes of data that hold numbers to names, but rather in the hearts and minds of those involved. Maybe that is the real message in all of this: it doesn’t matter who wins or loses, but what you gained and learned from the experience. After all, Tribal Wars is just a game.

To all those who played here, who had some hand in this experience, I truly thank you. To all those that read this, I hope you enjoyed it and learned something along the way. To all those who changed me for the better, I only hope I had the chance to do the same for you.

Acknowledgements

A great deal of work went into this document that was not due to me. As I said at the beginning, I have merely sought to pull everything together into a single narrative, but the commentary and events extend far beyond the confines of my mind. Be it written, spoken, illustrated or whatever, there is much tied within the flow of the work that is a product of the community at large.

Often have I included ideas and conceptions that have been shaped by my interactions with the other players here. It would impossible to pin down whence a great many of my ideas came, but I think it is fair to acknowledge that this work would not have been possible without so many allowing me to pick their brains. The depth of information is phenomenal and it is thanks to the community as a whole.

I am of course indebted to Shadow simply for allowing me to be a part of the tribe and for providing an experience which I felt was worthy to pen in this document. Noteworthy too are the number of extra materials and comments that they have provided, particularly in discussions beyond what I have written which shaped my ideas on the world.

Indeed, all the tribes and players of this world who have something to their name in this document are worthy of note. Without each and every piece of information, this history would not be the tale it is today. Rightly do the readers want to hear about the entire world, and it is gladly that I can point to the scope of comment concerning the entire world.

The forum community, eclectic thought it was, also deserves a mention. I know that the membership was small, but it was sufficient to encourage the continuation of the Weekly and the production of the History itself.

I'd like to make a few special mentions too here. My first is to those who helped with the Weekly, from those who set it up in the first place before I took to the reins (BlazeStar, XsaphiraX, Dartship), to those who contributed to and helped with its many issues (sweeney2kaii8, Deciphered, pallysrange, stampcoin, TribalHugsBrat). I'd also like to mention Silverwolf and Lord of Bones here for their numerous contributions and help off-stage with the Weekly.

I'd also like to mention Maccano1 for doing his own blog and chronicle which filled in a great many of the holes in my knowledge.

Finally, there is one more person worthy of mention: you, the reader. On many occasions have I been accused of being wordy/pleonastic/repetitive/monotonous etc. and it is therefore justifiably that I acknowledge you for coming to the end of what I hope has been an enjoyable read. If you have anything you wish to add or comment upon, please do not be afraid to take the time to message me via the forum. Thank you all.
 
Last edited by a moderator:

DeletedUser

Guest
Appendix: Tribal Histories

The following are brief summaries of the major tribes of the world to act as a reference for the above work. They are written largely from a Shadow perspective, given that I had no access to the inner workings of these tribes, but some tribes have submitted their own work to complement my summaries. They are listed in alphabetical order:

~AOW~

[spoil]

Name: Angels of War

Profile: ~AOW~

Best Rank: 3

Notable Players: Mande1992, Obey The Cat, stampcoin, Zarin

Summary
Started at the beginning of the world, ~AOW~ survived from the Tribe Lock. It grew quickly in an otherwise unremarkable corner of the map and slowly moved up the rankings as other tribes were destroyed in the larger early wars.

It was not without combat itself, seeing off smaller neighbouring tribes very successfully and assimilating any useful players to further swell it ranks. Under strong leadership and able diplomacy, it flourished and enjoyed relative peace from larger neighbours who might otherwise have thought it a tempting target.

Despite these early conflicts against smaller tribes, ~AOW~ only really came to prominence during the war between ATTACK and Nstlk*. By this time, it was the next most highly ranked tribe in the game, and allied to both sides; it had the ability to sway the war either way. Given also that it was well positioned on the flank of both tribes, its impact would be significant.

Following diplomatic proceedings and dialogue with both sides, the tribe eventually decided to retain its alliance with ATTACK and discard an already frail alliance with Nstlk*. This move would quickly result in the merge with ATTACK to create Shadow.​

[/spoil]

ATTACK

[spoil]

Name: All The Things A Conqueror Knows

Profile: ATTACK

Best Rank: 1

Notable Players: albrew5, Ephette , OjibweMan

Summary
The precursor to Shadow, ATTACK, began on the first day of the Tribe Lock and quickly established its intent to control the entire world from February 13 onwards. With eyes on complete world domination, it was in talks about recruitment with players far and wide.

When the end of the Tribe Lock did come, ATTACK quickly rocketed to the top of the rankings and began an unpopular mass recruitment of many strong players. Many criticisms of the tribe centred on its immense size that had come through such recruitment. In particular, it was felt that it stole away a great proportion of the world's strongest players, leaving other tribes stricken.

However, when early tensions with LA-G spawned a war between the tribes, ATTACK proved that its position at the top of the rankings was merited. Its subsequent destruction of LA-G did much to dispel critics, but its tangles with Feb.13 and a simultaneous war with them brought much scrutiny.

Despite no significant numerical superiority, ATTACK quickly began to overrun Feb.13 and declared victory. Its removal of many players was halted by tensions with Nstlk* who were looking to capitalise on the opportunity, and many Feb.13 players were not completely destroyed until months later.

Its war with Nstlk* proved to be its toughest test, but the addition of ~AOW~ players gave it the impetus to overcome Nstlk* and cement its strong position. ~AOW~ merged into ATTACK, and the name of the tribe was changed to Shadow, effectively making Shadow a continuation of the same tribe.​

[/spoil]

BIP

[spoil]

Name: Blessed Is the Peacemaker

Profile: BIP

Best Rank: 4

Notable Players: Joe the Elder

Summary
One of the more unusual tribes to grace W27, it remained true to its name, eschewing combat in favour of peace. Although it started out as a reasonably sizable tribe, members seemed to melt away by the time war with Shadow came, effectively leaving the tribe as little more than its leader and largest player: Joe the Elder.

Its lack of experience in combat showed easily in its tangles with Shadow, but it was not without competence in defence. Discounted as justifiably unthreatening, Shadow pursued it only very slowly as a target, preferring more active and dangerous enemies as priority targets.

Towards the end of the world it was disbanded and many members either quit or jumped to other tribes.​

[/spoil]

Dawn

[spoil]

Name: Dawn of the fallen

Profile: Dawn

Best Rank: 3

Notable Players: rosyka, pride1

Summary
Begun shortly before the time of the Coalition War, Dawn grew quietly as a small, scattered rim tribe. Almost famous for its willingness to accept any and all into its ranks, Dawn was represented all over the world.

Conspicuous also by its number of tribe changes, Dawn boasted a massive turnover of members during its time, making any real history of its beginnings difficult to discern. It seems to have accepted in the remnants of numerous refugees from other tribes as well as any decent rim players. With other tribes busy against Shadow, it was free to advance up the rankings before coming onto Shadow’s radar.

It appeared often in the later conquers of Shadow when many tribes were being targeted and seems to have lacked any real coherence due to its scattered positioning and lack of leadership. Many players seemed only to have joined for the illusory protection of being in a big tribe, but were not saved when Shadow came for them.

Lasting until the very last days of the world, it fell shortly before SBM.​

[/spoil]

Feb.13

[spoil]

Name: February 13, 2009

Profile: Feb.13

Best Rank: 1

Notable Players: Deciphered, filphillip, Grimlock-, LordKhal, Not For Sale, puccagb06

Summary
A tribe named to humour the Tribe Lock itself, Feb.13 enjoyed a strong start to the recruiting phase, establishing a strong base and challenging ATTACK for the top spot in the rankings. Their quiet nature belied a strong and experienced core of members, but a lack of warriors and poor leadership cost them in times of war.

Recognising ATTACK’s vulnerability while it was engaged with LA-G, Feb.13 knew that it would have no better chance of seizing a dominant position once and for all. However, LA-G presented almost no challenge at all to ATTACK and Feb.13’s lack of experienced warriors, poor leadership and difficult fighting position brought early defeat.

Although not completely eradicated, the tribe later split into several entities, some of whom continued to fight ATTACK/Shadow, while other members joined their conquerors and further swelled its ranks. It was not until the end of the Coalition war that all the remnant tribes of Feb.13 were defeated.​

[/spoil]

FOME

[spoil]

Name: Fishers Of Men Eternal

Profile: FOME

Best Rank: 3

Notable Players: Styv

Summary
A tribe famed for its unusual approach to the game, FOME’s Christian dogma and enigmatic leader were cause for many feelings in other tribes. Some were amused, while others were perplexed. It was a tribe like no other.

Born out of the ashes of SAM (that’s Scythian Allied Militia), it had enjoyed a relatively quiet existence on the rim. Despite being preyed upon by neighbours, its passive nature reminiscent of Gandhi seemed to win out.

The early wars in W27 had passed it by, and this did not prove to be to its detriment. With *TKP*’s merge into Shadow, it rose impressively to third, despite engaging in almost no warfare or conflict.

Of course, when war did finally come, FOME was woefully ill-prepared. Its entire membership lacked experience and the quirks of its leader were little defence against the armies of Shadow. Its decision to merge into GR*FM was a move out of necessity with the inactivity of its duke and would mark the end of FOME.

A history of SAM, FOME’s early guise had been kindly submitted by Styv. I have added to the end:

[spoil]

Styv said:
Feb 13th was a frightening day for the little players on the rim in K67. All of the big tribes were to the north and west. Our little cluster of n00bs had no tribe to protect us. Many were summarily dismissed simply because we were in the 80s and 90s for points. The fact that most of us joined the world in December and January made no difference.

So, alone and vulnerable, we did what we could. The big players like the Great Lord Trader, the evil one MooMix1, and the T-GR warriors, preyed upon us with impunity. Luckily for us, the Great Lord Trader and MooMix1 only wanted villages with at least 3000 points. JamTheIceMan, I.F.G, and others dodged and dodged. We obviously couldn't fight back against a warrior with 30-40 villages. It forced us into a Grand N00b alliance!

After repeated attacks from K66 and K57, the little n00b tribes in K67 were starting to disintegrate. Many disbanded. Others watched impotently as their fellow warriors were mowed down by the giants from T-GR and other large tribes. Styv, the Grand n00b, knew it was time to take action, else K67 would be taken over. He contacted several of the small tribes, looking for a merger that could save all of them. In the process, he found a calling to counsel and share with his new TW warrior friends. Friendships that last to this day.

Negotiations were difficult to say the least. All of the n00b Dukes wanted to keep their power more than their tribes. It took quite a while, but two tribes merged into =S= (Sanctuary - formed by styv when RIM, gave him up for their other clusters). More negotiations led =S=, ~BS~, and two other tribes to merge into a new ~BS~, now named the Black Scorpion Sanctuary. Styv stepped down as Duke and relegated himself to a simple villager. The Duke of ~BS~ became leader and the other Dukes became Barons. The little group of tribes were now united and the largest tribe in K67! The forums were filled with optimism and courage. Everyone wanted to get back at those giants. Everyone felt that we could defend ourselves and rid K67 of the alien giants!

Soon; however, it was realized that bigger did not mean better. A bunch of n00bs, no matter how big, were still n00bs. :(

The new tribe struggled mightily in leadership. The Duke did not participate in the forums, nor did he coordinate any defense or retaliation against the alien giants. The tribe was still being decimated from K57, K66 and now K67 since they were taking our northern and western villages. Desperate for some sort of action, Styv and JamTheIceMan decided to take matters into their own hands. They led several warriors on an Op to discourage those that wished us harm.

Styv, Jam , and a few others decided to hit back against the giants. A spy had turned his back on our tribe and joined with our enemy. He took our plans with him. Not knowing until too late, our first volleys were easily dodged and counters came in. Styv had just lost his first village (5k) and sustained nukes against his two others (3k and 1.5k). He had managed to dodge the attacks on two and three and wanted to exact a penalty on the ruthless barbarians that took his village, especially the little spy from "Hell" (his village names). The little group of n00bs coordinated an attack on styv's v1 and several of the marauder's other villages. Styv sent a n00b nuke to v1 and another villages, while Jam sent a n00b train to v1. Jam took the cleared village! Two other villages were cleared by styv, i.f.g and other warriors. We took the other two villages and sent the little snoop to the rim and finally off world completely. Our little band of n00bs had finally fought back and won!

The forum was really alive now. Everyone wanted to join in our success. But our Duke continued to ignore us. Styv led several other ops, but not having leadership or even access to hidden forums made things unbearable. The tribe was falling apart from the top down and it looked like nothing could be done. Styv mailed the Duke many times asking him to lead, to no avail. Because of the strife in the tribe from those that wanted to fight back and those that were content to sit back and hope they were not the next to get rimmed, Styv "dismissed" himself, left the tribe and formed the Scythian Allied Militia (SAM), which stands today (but not without its own failures).

When styv formed the Scythian Allied Militia, he took the lessons he learned from the ~BS~ failure with him. He developed the 5 Core Principles based on honor, integrity, mercy, strategy and tribal governance. He also chose NOT to recruit, but to form relationships which would then grown into entrance into the tribe.

SAM started out and stayed small in number but big in hope! Elk2 and Styv had become friends during their ~BS~ days. Elk2 quickly joined SAM, along with BamBamSam1997, Jam, i.f.g and a few others. SAM was small, quiet, but strong in value and direction. It's strategic goals were to be #1 in K67 and to defend the honor of the east. Growing numbers was not in the strategic plan, growing troops and territory was!

Relationships between ~BS~ and SAM were difficult. The larger tribes to the north (joker, TK), along with T-GR and LA-G, were making in-roads into the south east. SAM was willing to fight back, ~BS~ was not. SAM wrote ~BS~ off and focused on the southern flank of K67 and leaving ~BS~ to get eaten in the north. That strategy left styv and jam a little vulnerable in the north, but every tribe had to have borders. The Duke of ~BS~, for some reason unknown to anyone, disbanded and joined LA-G. SAM offered a home to several of the warriors, added a couple from other tribes, one of which was kennyd69 - and became the largest tribe in K67! Our first goal attained, we chose to move south and west into K77 and K76.

Very soon after, the ex ~BS! Duke attacked one of SAM's villages. LA-G was formidable, but we let them know that we were not allowing that to go unpunished. Several of our warriors, led by i.f.g, took many of his villages. At that point, he quit. SAM had again defended honor in the east. Now as the largest and strongest tribe in K67, SAM took more of a leadership role, mentoring and helping other tribes to grow along side us (as long as they did not threaten our territory).

As SAM began its move south into K77 and southern K66, Styv met up with two fiercely independent Amazons - perfect for SAM who needed more intense warriors. He noticed that neither were in tribes and, as he had in the past, began talking to them in hopes of forming alliances or retaining them as recruits. Neither one were interested in anything Styv had to say at first, but over time, their relationships grew to friendship. After a month, misa joined SAM and became their "Baroness of the West". With support and coordination with SAM, she quickly began to clear most of the smaller tribes in southern K66.

At the same time, Styv made no headway with the other lioness - TarynAshley. She had been the duchess of a top 10 tribe on world 10 and was steadfast in not wanting to join a tribe. Styv never gave up and was summarily dismissed many times. But he and TarynAshley began to look talk more, slowly but surely. Styv insisted that she join SAM and she insisted that Styv go join himself. Both knew that SAM was growing and though TarynAshley did not fear SAM nor anyone else, they did choose to coordinate territory with her staying in north K66 and SAM staying to the south. Over time, TarynAshley and Styv became closer and truly wanted to make things work between their "tribes". They had times of great collaboration and times of great dismissal. With any friendship - good times and bad. Over all, though, their commitment to each other always outweighed their commitment to anger. The tribes had a good alliance, one that stayed until the end. Not even war with Shadow, whether asked for or not, would separate their tribes. Not even the "opportunity" to survive would break their loyalty to each other.

SAM, with the addition of misa, began a time of spit personality. misa was a warrior and wanted SAM to be a war tribe. Styv was a diplomat and wanted SAM to grow to a point where odds were heavily in their favor before they fought. Styv was definitely not against war, he was against slaughter - of SAM. The split personality was stable for quite some time. SAM grew to be quite large, but not really strong. When TK and LA-G decided to move into southern K66, misa was beyond angry. She wanted blood. Styv agreed, as long as we did not cause a war with both tribes, as both were at least 3 times bigger than SAM. misa led several moves on LA-G and TK. Success was limited but again showed that SAM could fight. Styv calmed the other tribes and misa so that it did not grow into all out war.

One of SAM's Core Principles was Democracy. Styv had stepped down as Duke (a second time) to allow others to be elected. misa and several others became leaders. The tribe, under misa's leadership had indeed become a war tribe and was making many in the tribe uncomfortable. And also many outside the tribe, like GR*FM, SoD, FURY, TK and LA-G. Overall, LA-G and TK left the area. Small victories, but now SAM had their eyes on K76. Then, misa made a move that could not be accepted, she attacked a former SAM warrior who move to GR*FM. This brought a great rift in the tribe. Soon, styv would decide to leave his favorite tribe. But not only for the rift. Styv also had other ideas for a new kind of tribe.

SAM would now transform almost entirely into FOME, a new tribe with Styv’s strong Christian agenda. It was an intriguing mix and the tribe proved popular among the active members of SAM who followed Styv there. It rebuilt ties with neighbours GR*FM and grew steadily.

All was changed when the ultimatum came from Shadow. Both FOME and GR*FM decided that they would attack Shadow instead of fighting amongst themselves for its favour. GR*FM even attempted to train their less experienced counterparts, but to no avail.

When the fighting did begin, FOME’s lack of both experience and aggression was painfully obvious. It was quickly overrun and the loss of its duke left it stricken within the first days of the war. The merge into GR*FM ended FOME’s existence.[/spoil]​

[/spoil]

FURY

[spoil]

Name: FURY

Profile: FURY

Best Rank: 7

Notable Players:

Summary
Billed as a largely unremarkable tribe in its early development, FURY had almost nothing to speak of going into the war with Shadow. It had grown very quietly on the rim, having formed later in the game that most other tribes. Discounted as a threat due to its small size, there was a great deal of surprise when it joined the Coalition to fight Shadow.

Unabashed, Shadow’s southern members would receive their own piece of the action. And yet, despite the painfully obvious difference in size, FURY often acquitted themselves most admirably. Their dogged defence of many villages frustrated a far larger opponent.

Admittedly, it is easy to be critical of their warfare. With almost no experience to speak of, a poor and largely absent leadership, and a lack of large players, FURY struggled to make any gains in return against Shadow. Whilst it refused to haemorrhage villages like some of its Coalition counterparts, it showed few signs of taking any back.

Gradually the tribe was emaciated by successive Shadow incursions. It outlasted many of its counterparts, though only by the benefits of morale and beginner protection.​

[/spoil]

GR*FM

[spoil]

Name: Grim Freedom

Profile: GR*FM

Best Rank: 3

Notable Players: Sboh, TarynAshley

Summary
GR*FM began as a relatively unremarkable rim tribe that grew slowly in size, unmolested by neighbours busy with other enemies. Significant numbers of the tribe had avoided much, if not all, of the Tribe Lock, marking GR*FM as a relatively young tribe. At face value, it was a reasonably sized tribe, but one that was inexperienced and lacked many large players.

Early appraisals proved to be flawed. When war with Shadow did ensue (following a botched political foray by Shadow), they showed great spirit and determination, catching Shadow by surprise and putting up a strong defence. Led by its talismanic duchess TarynAshley, it proved an unexpected and difficult thorn for Shadow, but the weakness in size and experience of large portions of its players allowed Shadow to quickly turn the tables and isolate troublesome opponents.

The late merge with FOME, or rather perhaps the acceptance of a great deal of FOME refugees late in the war, proved disastrous for the war statistics and concealed the tenacity of its great players. Shortly afterwards, the tribe elected to almost completely disband itself. Some days later, the area was filled with barbs.

A more in depth history has kindly been submitted by TarynAshley:

[spoil]It was in January 2009 and after 15 months of playing and mostly warring on W10, Neo Raven and TarynAshley (name was different on W10) decided to stop playing TW. For 3 months they no longer logged onto the computer to play TW on a daily basis. However, Pallysminime, one of their tribe members, on W10, would not let TA rest. He was playing in W27 and insisted she come to W27 and just be his “warehouse”, just so they would not lose touch. Finally, she gave in and started a new account in W27, landing in K66, on March 8, 2009. She was too far from Pallysrange (his W27 name) to assist him with resources, but they did chat daily.

For several months she did the minimum. She started nobling some barbs at the end of April. She was surrounded by a massive amount of 500 point barbs, which was a new experience because they did not exist on W10 at that time. Every village you took there, you had to fight someone for it. At that time, Neo Raven decided to join W27 as well and his village started in K67. TA and NR each had separate tribes entitled Freedom and Grim Surrender, respectively. They had no plans to have anyone in their tribes, but did discuss a possible merger between the two of them at some point in the future. They each decided to just noble barbs, not bring any attention to their villages, and just grow slowly towards each other.

TA decided she was going to be a “turtle” and continued to noble in a tight cluster, but it was not until July that she started getting serious about growing. She stayed to herself and was not aware of any details about the world. She never knew or cared about the tribe lock, who the larger tribes or players were, and only talked to Pallysrange. There were four decent size tribes with large players in her area. SAM was to her east, LA-G and TK. were north and west, and FURY was west and south of her cluster. She kept her eyes on them, but did nothing to contact them. As she grew, she did begin to start nobling them, especially the inactive ones, but for the most part, she was left alone.

Styv, the duke of SAM, continually contacted TA urging her to join his tribe, but she refused. She repeatedly made it clear that she was not here to lead or be a team player and wanted to be left alone. In his fashion he would lecture her about how she was wrong and should lend her knowledge to players that needed direction. The players surrounding the tribe were relatively inexperienced, and though TA and NR appeared to be noobs, they brought a great deal of fighting experience with them from W10. However, this was not discussed or made apparent to anyone.

Misaothegreat was a player in SAM, that shared the leadership, and TA befriended her and saw that she did have some experience in the game. She was frustrated with Styv, but for the moment stayed fairly quiet about it. TA agreed to grow to the north and west, so she would not crowd SAM. An uneasy agreement was made between the two tribes, but Styv never stopped communicating.

On 5/31, Styv left SAM, rejoined, and then left again and formed his own non-violent tribe, FOME. His sole purpose was not to fight, but to operate a Christian tribe and “save” other players in need of spiritual help. TA respected him, but felt there was no room for such a tribe in TW. Misaothegreat took over SAM and the alliance remained.

NR befriended a tribe, SOD, south of TA’s cluster in K67. They experienced leadership problems as well and eventually split with the players in K67 becoming A.W.S.

In July, TA and NR merged into Grim Freedom (GR*FM). Another large player just north of TA asked to join the tribe. Sboh was a member of TK. His leaving there and joining GR*FM caused some turmoil between the tribes. A war may have ensued, but there was discussion of a coalition to stop the growing #1 tribe, Shadow, and TK. was taking the lead in this endeavor. They could not afford another war with GR*FM, so they let it go. Another large player of theirs joined GR*FM on August 1st, but by then their sights were set elsewhere.

A few players that were close to TA’s cluster joined the tribe, and for several months the small tribe grew and stayed to themselves. All of the tribes around GR*FM, except SAM, joined the Coalition, and prepared to fight Shadow. GR*FM was contacted numerous times to join the Coalition, but refused to do so. For the time being, we were just growing in the SE tip of the world and had no beef with Shadow. In fact, many of the members of the tribe were good friends with Shadow players and helped some of the Shadow players in their battle against the Coalition tribes. We made arrangements with the local Shadow players to take some of the Coalition tribe members’ villages that were within our cluster. In return, we cleared villages that were outside of our tribe’s cluster for Shadow. The arrangement worked well.

In September, Sboh decided he needed to leave TW and NR agreed to take over his much larger account. This was done, and the new Sboh nobled NR’s villages and he gave up his old account. During September we noticed that SAM, led by Misaothegreat, was looking to expand. She had made A.W.S. an offer they could not refuse. This addition to SAM would leave GR*FM surrounded by the new and improved SAM on 3 sides, and therefore quite vulnerable to attack and restricted to further expansion. By now A.W.S. were allies with GR*FM and wanted to merge with GR*FM. TA and Sboh made the decision to do this and thereby protect GR*FM, on 10/20/09 and the tribe grew substantially.

This action angered Misaothegreat and they attacked a former SAM player that had defected to GR*FM at the same time that the merger between GR*FM and A.W.S. occurred. The action also caused SAM to disband and many of the members moved back to FOME, abandoning Misaothegreat and a few other members that stayed with her as they formed a new tribe called JAWS. The new and improved GR*FM nobled all of the JAWS’ villages over the first two weeks of November. The merger was extremely successful and all the members got along very well. The tribe was very active and grew rapidly.

SAM had basically become FOME now and Styv again requested an alliance with GR*FM. It was granted, although there were several members in GR*FM that wanted to take out the FOME players. We all were aware that they were simply a defensive tribe with no fighting ability. A few of the larger players from FURY joined GR*FM as well, even though they were technically at war with Shadow. For the most part, the tribe was happy and gave little notice to the woes of the Coalition and their pointless struggle against Shadow. They had tried to form one entity to fight Shadow unsuccessfully due to poor leadership and organization problems. Many of the dukes of the Coalition tribes had abandoned their members as well, creating even more despair. New tribes created from the merging of the Coalition tribes popped up as well, only to succumb to Shadow.

FOME and GR*FM settled in as the 4th and 5th ranked tribes of the world. TA found it amusing actually. She had never intended to grow individually or as a tribe, yet here she was again. Personally, she was in reach of the rank of 20th, with nearly 2 million points. The top 20 positions were held by Shadow members. And then everything changed, when an arrogant Duchess of Shadow decided to play God and issued an ultimatum to GR*FM and FOME. In a nutshell, they were to fight each other so that one tribe would be victorious and thus, be welcomed into Shadow. The problem with this was that TA was in possession of correspondence previously written by Ephette to a Shadow player that said Shadow will just let the smaller tribes fight among themselves and then the morale will be more favorable for Shadow (when they fight the winner). TA felt that she might invite a few of the top players, but the rest will burn. Afterall, this is what they had just done to TKP. TA had also butted heads with Ephette on another diplomatic conflict, so Ephette was rather angry with her and she knew that she would never receive an invite into Shadow no matter what the result. It was a moot issue because TA and Sboh would have never left GR*FM anyway.

TA decided the decision was not hers to make, however. So, Sboh posted a poll on the FOME/GR*FM joint forum whether to fight each other or fight Shadow. With the exception of one vote, everyone wanted to fight Shadow. They knew that Shadow was going to eventually noble each one of them and this way, they could go out on their own terms. The plan was perhaps devious, but it was a matter of survival. Shadow would be told that we would fight each other and then we would initiate a surprise attack against Shadow during the Christmas break.

Hours were spent training FOME, with no success. Sboh actually joined their tribe for two weeks to train them more effectively. Everyone was given premium and scripts so that they could fight on a more even basis. The members of GF*FM learned quickly, but FOME just did not get it. Still, since GR*FM would be a meat shield for FOME; we set up noble villages that FOME would defend. The plan was to take all the Shadow villages within our cluster, form a fortress, and not let any Shadow player inside. We would have FOME defend and GR*FM would attack. TA knew she would be doing the most attacking, followed by Sboh and slim01, so plans were made where other members would noble cleared villages. All members were given a minimum of two villages they would noble even if the larger players cleared the villages for them. The attacks would hit on 12/27/09. Those that were nobling were told exact times when their trains should arrive. FOME members were suppose to send support, as soon as possible, to secure the villages.

TA had discussed the plan with select members of LIGHT in hopes that they would accept her knowledge of warfare and use this opportunity as a means to attack Shadow from the north. She had hoped this would re-solidify LIGHT and make them stronger again. However, like in all other cases, LIGHT’s only response was to merge, thinking that quantity of players was more important than quality and strategy. Every time TA tried to help, they would not listen and just say we should merge…*sigh*

There is no question that GR*FM would ultimately lose. However, if FOME had played their role as planned, it would have taken far longer. Attacks hit on 12/27/09. Shadow was surprised and unprepared and as a result, GR*FM took many of its targets. FOME did nothing….. After the break, and at the start of the New Year, Shadow had regrouped and supported the nearby villages. Styv announced that he had health problems and abandoned us all. His members were scared and had no idea what to do. GR*FM ended up merging with them in hopes they would follow our leadership and support the villages we told them to. Two players did and they others just ignored us. We dismissed them from the tribe after a few weeks because they were just dead weight.

Sboh went down quickly because he was north of the main cluster and more vulnerable. Other members were attacked, but the focus was on TA. Understandably, Shadow felt if TA went down, then GR*FM would fall. Certainly it was a correct assumption. TA started dodging, to save her troops, and never stopped. Attacks were tagged (even when the incoming exceeded 10,000), and noble trains were either sniped or lost villages were nobled back. TA allowed a few of her villages to be nobled by other members, for the only important thing was that the villages remained with GR*FM.

After an initial onslaught, TA thought she was finished, but Shadow then stopped attacking for two weeks. She was allowed to completely rebuild and start again. Ultimately all the walls and farms of her villages were destroyed. The other members suffered losses and the old FOME players, or those dismissed, were being nobled by Shadow rapidly, allowing Shadow to be able to surround GR*FM (which was basically TA’s cluster) on 3 sides.

In the end, all of the Shadow villages within the GR*FM cluster were nobled by GR*FM. A second attack against Shadow during the time when TA was able to rebuild, assured this. So GR*FM did set out to what they had said they would. TA had sent all of her troops out and very few went to waste. So when the support in her noble villages could no longer be maintained, she discussed disbanding and deleting with the remaining members of the tribe. They had lasted about 7 weeks against a tribe that was 11 times their size. No other tribe in recent months had given Shadow a reasonable challenge. TA had actually grown in size, and only lost 2 villages that were outside of her cluster. She was proud of her tribe and on Feb. 2nd, 2010, the tribe was disbanded and the majority of the members deleted their accounts. They all left, filled with lots more experience, and many moved on to other worlds.

It would have been interesting to see the results and how events would have transpired had FOME and LIGHT pulled their weight at the same time and with the same fervor as what GR*FM had. Again, Shadow would have come out on top perhaps, but the battle would have been far more devastating for them. Even tiny GR*FM caused them to struggle for a short period of time. Shadow’s vast amount of resources and depth of active players was what allowed them to achieve victory. Had the gap in size between the two tribes been smaller, the outcome could have been very interesting.[/spoil]​

[/spoil]

[IRON]

[spoil]

Name: Imperial Republic of the North

Profile: [IRON]

Best Rank: 2

Notable Players: metaldoc, Synister Zero, WesleyT, willettskillz

Summary
Formed from the merge of SORRY! and K25PG, [IRON] was a tribe best known for its laudable defiance of Shadow and its significant strength despite its formation from rim tribes. It went on to be a major player in the Coalition and provided the best hope for those fighting against Shadow.

After the decisive victory over *epic, the two tribes decided to merge to form [IRON]. As the name suggests, the tribe was concerned with the North, though North-East is probably a more accurate description. It also featured players who had been part of LA-G, YGI? and Nstlk*, presenting it with some more experienced veterans to supplement its strength.

Supposedly integral in the formation of the Coalition, [IRON] proved to be its strongest member. When Shadow’s northern cluster was left to deal with it, forecasts had underestimated the quality of leadership in the tribe. It scored significant early victories and was responsible for a great deal of doubt in the Shadow camp. It even managed to grow significantly as a tribe during the early stages of the war, something that few had managed.

Praise was due for its deceptively shrewd and experienced leadership, as well as early enthusiasm for the war, which was no doubt compounded by successive victories against Shadow. It proved organised on the offensive and support could be seen on the defensive, indicating that it was not completely bereft of competence or structure.

Critics however cite its rapid decline after Shadow stabilised the front. When its victories dried up and the conquers began to turn against them, [IRON]’s membership proved far less apt to continue. The successful subversion of its command structure through targeting its leaders showed its lack of resilience and over-reliance on a select few.

In many ways it epitomised the struggle of the tribes against Shadow. It lacked the strength in depth that Shadow possessed; while it could put up a strong early showing, the elimination of key players proved disastrous for the tribe. As always, enthusiasm and bravado proved a poor substitute for experience.

Following Shadow’s continued gains in the war and internal strife, the tribe quickly fragmented and was remade into its successor, LIGHT.​

[/spoil]

LA-G

[spoil]

Name: Lux Aeternam Glory

Profile: LA-G

Best Rank: 3

Notable Players: ashiwwru12, crystalball

Summary
Another tribe kept around from the Tribe Lock, LA-G is mostly famous for its lack of popularity and being the first tribe to spark a war. Many also recall its endemic ineptitude in both combat and diplomacy, citing the overestimation of its fighting ability coupled with its scattered location and the incompetence of its diplomats respectively.

Its early growth was strong in the recruitment phase after the Tribe Lock, and it rose to a strong position. However, this was at the expense of the tribe’s positioning which was scattered around the map, while the core of the tribe was hemmed in by neighbouring tribes. It quickly ran into diplomatic trouble with ATTACK and was punished severely in the ensuing war.

Despite this setback, it continued to grow after ATTACK relinquished its offensive. Establishing a new base of operations, it once again grew to a respectable size before once again being decisively beaten in the Shadow/Coaltion War.​

[/spoil]

LIGHT

[spoil]

Name: LIGHT

Profile: LIGHT

Best Rank: 2

Notable Players: helldad90, loonman, metaldoc, RedKomandir, Synister Zero, theSleepwalker, Umbada, WesleyT

Summary
The continuation of [IRON], Nstlk* and REF, LIGHT was the world's answer to Shadow in the later stages of the game. Formed from the ashes of several tribes, it was intended to rectify the growing apathy and incoherence that characterised conflicts against Shadow at the time.

It was the last member of the Coalition and the last tribe to present any real threat to Shadow. Given the significant difference in size and growing disparity in experience, LIGHT faced an unenviable task in combating Shadow. Noting also that it had few new names to add to the mix, its task was almost doomed from the start.

Given the ground lost by earlier incarnations of the tribe, LIGHT surprised few when the same downward spiral continued. Many of the players were already beaten, and it mattered which tribe's tag they fought under. Equally, Shadow's momentum was intense by this period and without any time to reform, LIGHT struggled under the weight of the assault. After a consistent and sustained period of losses, LIGHT was finally abandoned and reformed as SBM.

Critics point often to the significant losses of the tribe and its almost complete lack of victories. Although it was the right idea, much of the spirit and resilience of the world had already evaporated. It's something of a shame that a tribe which deserved recognition on its own merits will most likely be judged by its successive defeats.​

[/spoil]

NOS

[spoil]

Name: Nerves Of Steel

Profile: NOS

Best Rank: 4

Notable Players: CarltonFisk, chickenhead7, Nordlinder

Summary
Essentially a reheating of TK, NOS was part of the later Coalition with LIGHT and FURY. When TK dissolved, its members in the East mostly formed NOS as a new threat to counter Shadow. Of course, many of the members were exactly the same and it broke little new ground as a result.

Aided by Shadow’s attention on GR*FM and FOME, NOS was spared complete humiliation due to the intermittent nature of its conflicts with Shadow, and some members survived for quite some time.

Commentators will inevitably point to its lacklustre performance against Shadow as being systematic with respect to its membership; with little new blood, it was unlikely to triumph. There are few positives for the tribe noting also that its leadership was unclear and largely absent, and that its members failed to act coherently.​

[/spoil]

Nstlk*

[spoil]

Name: The Night Stalkers

Profile: Nstlk*

Best Rank: 2

Notable Players: KingOfTribal, olafSchlief, Sparkosss, tacops, tresorro

Summary
Famous for their war with ATTACK/Shadow, Nstlk* took some time to come to prominence after the Tribe Lock. Their recruitment was generally careful, championing localised firepower over the scattered strength of their rivals. Led by a strong band of several notable players, they built a firm North-Western foothold and looked set to capitalise on the growing instability in the core.

However, diplomatic tensions with YGI? thrust them into their first major war. Spectators lined up for an interesting and exciting prospect, but both tribes lacked ambition or any killer instinct. The war faded quickly, unfazed by the strength or ostensibly aggressive natures of both sides, resulting in an uninspiring merge. The one pleasing corollary for both sides was that it catapulted them to rank two, sitting just behind ATTACK. They had a strong position in the world, and ATTACK was still busying itself with Feb.13.

An alliance with both ATTACK and ~AOW~ left their next move a difficult one. Seeing the capitulation of Feb.13 and the might of ATTACK beginning to surface, they knew that war with ATTACK was the best option if they wanted to stand any chance of surviving, particularly as it was still vulnerable following successive wars.

Allies ~AOW~ and T-GR were courted heavily for assistance, not fancying their chances alone. Unfortunately, relations with ~AOW~ had become strained with rumours that Nstlk* had intended to attack ~AOW~ earlier on, and that they could be expected to backstab them once ATTACK was defeated. They were forced to settle instead for T-GR, and only parts of the tribe at that.

Nstlk* pursued the war regardless, making significant gains from a surprised ATTACK. Some T-GR members joined the tribe, but other large members continued in their own relative peace. The Stalkers proved to be strong on the offensive and a much sterner test than Feb.13. Victory on all fronts put the Stalkers momentarily ahead.

However, when ATTACK regathered itself, their isolated new recruits were the favoured targets in early exchanges and the stats began to turn against them. Despite outperforming ATTACK on the frontline, the overall picture was looking undecided. The war began to slow, and both sides dug in for the long haul, but the sudden and consecutive loss of several of its largest players crippled Nstlk*.

The tribe was slowly forced back, but lingered on for a long time, refusing to be beaten. Although it found new recruits later in the world, players eventually dispersed to other anti-Shadow tribes and Nstlk* themselves were largely destroyed. One or two kept the tribe going, it had finished as a dominant force.​

[/spoil]

[OBL]

[spoil]

Name: .:: OBLIVION ::.

Profile: [OBL]

Best Rank: 3

Notable Players:

Summary
Started as late in the game as SBM’s decline, [OBL] is the youngest tribe on the list. Effectively a sanctuary for various refugees and tribe-hoppers as well as the remnants of older tribes, [OBL]’s history is not a particularly illustrious one.

Given the immense relative size of Shadow at the end of the world and the apathy which had permeated all levels of the world, [OBL] boasted few victories against their enemy. Resistance from select members was more a reflection on the individual rather than the tribe.

Lasting until the final weeks of the game, [OBL] was the end of the line for many.​

[/spoil]

REF

[spoil]

Name: Reformation

Profile: REF

Best Rank: 2

Notable Players: maccano1, theSleepwalker

Summary
Billed as a promising reinvigoration of YGI? and built on an ethos of aggression, activity and enthusiasm, many expected REF to present a true beacon of hope to a world being consumed by Shadow.

Although they possessed great promise and a small number of strong players, REF was built from many who had already lost that war once as part of Nstlk*. It had little new impetus and could bring little that was new to the table. While commentators might have welcomed a tribe that was compact and aggressive, they knew that it probably wouldn’t deliver.

This was the case. Early showings against Shadow confirmed the continuing story of the world, though one or two players did put up an admirable fight. They were eventually overrun in many sections and disbanded just two months after their inception.​

[/spoil]

SBM

[spoil]

Name: Shadow Boxer Mafia

Profile: SBM

Best Rank: 2

Notable Players: Albadr, buffness, DarkDMize, Gunther MAplethorpe, helldad90, justme4, Onyx Knight, Rainbowbadger

Summary
At the time of its inception, the world was already sliding into defeat at the hands of Shadow. It was one last attempt to cobble together anyone who would resist them and fight for the world. That was the principle at least.

Dogged by inactivity, apathy and inexperience, SBM faced a most difficult task in even staying alive. Couple this with the massive difference in size between its rival and SBM faced an almost impossible situation. While some members did resist bravely and put up a worthy fight, many others simply capitulated at the first sign of trouble.

Put together from the remnants of other old Coalition tribes (mostly LIGHT), many of its players were not new enemies of Shadow. This meant that it had few new resources with which to carry out its eponymous duty. Assembled from tribes already in retreat, it had little hope from the beginning.

It was praised for its intent to continue the fight, even if this was not carried out. Criticisms centred on its ubiquitously poor showings against Shadow, its apathy and its immature nature. It did last for the remainder of the game, laying claim to the world's last Shadow-free village.​

[/spoil]

Shadow

[spoil]

Name: Shadow of the Black Rose

Profile: Shadow

Best Rank: 1

Notable Players: Ephette, gerick6, Lord of Bones, Mande1992, mikestuntz, Obey The Cat, sstarkey, winvarwen, Zarin

Summary
The major story of W27 started out under a different name, as ATTACK. Following ATTACK's merge with ~AOW~, Shadow was born. Tested heavily by constant warfare throughout its history, Shadow proved to be too strong for its rivals and gradually distanced itself from the competition through successive victories until it attained an unassailable position.

Unpopular for the merge that created it, much of Shadow's success can be attributed to the vision of its early leaders and the wealth of experience among its membership that eclipsed any other tribes' capabilities. Its players learned quickly in the early wars and this superior knowledge, coupled with its growing numerical strength, was easily enough to overcome weaker, less experienced tribes. Crucially, its membership was categorised by both strength and depth, while no other tribe possessed both after the destruction of Nstlk*. Coupled with strong and single-minded leadership, Shadow flourished.

It was criticised for avoiding wars by merging (both in its creation and with *TKP*) and for inviting players instead of fighting in its early days. Although these criticisms were inapplicable later in the game, many pointed to ATTACK/Shadow's early inviting as the core of its success, putting together a tribe that exceeded any other in terms of strength and experience.

However, this was largely due to a focus on the goal of dominating the entire world from the beginning, rather than mere continents or areas. It selected players carefully and many in the tribe would maintain that this was a shrewd early strategy rather than a cheap tactic to secure victory. The lack of world membership contributed to a drought of experience in rim tribes and once it had secured victory over larger rivals in the core, it had few problems in seeing off the rest of the world's tribes.

After its early wars, its next test in the form of a tribal coalition failed to live up to expectations and was mostly brushed aside after some lethargy at the beginning. The stern test of GR*FM was overwhelmed by Shadow's immense size and later opposition lacked any real experience or cohesion.

Critics of the tribe point out a lack of real tests in terms of warfare and cite the small size of the world as a factor in the success of the tribe. Its arrogant approach to politics and perceived bullying of other tribes has come under scrutiny too, as has its later monopoly on the forum. It should also be mentioned that the final tribe was a disparate mix of abilities, sizes and experience where many felt that some had coasted undeservedly to victory on the back of the tribe.

In the final stages, impressive leadership and a strong core of members prevented the tribe succumbing to apathy and Shadow ran out as eventual W27 winners in a little over two years.​

[/spoil]

SKULL/~R.B~

[spoil]

Name: SKULL/Re-Born

Profile: SKULL/~R.B~

Best Rank: 3

Notable Players: Gaxxxx, pride1

Summary
Although the tribe actually began under the name SKULL and fought entirely under that name against Shadow, the tribe changed its name at the last moment to Re-Born, making things slightly complicated. The history has detailed all conquers as against SKULL which was wholly accurate at the time, but their profile can only be found under ~R.B~.

One of the younger of the major tribes in the game, SKULL suffered from the same rapid turnover of members as Dawn. It seems that some members even passed between the two tribes, even while fighting the same enemy.

It grew alongside the wars of the later Coalition and SBM, easily taking a high rank due to the lack of other major tribes at the time, but therein also becoming a viable target for Shadow. It showings in that war were almost universally poor, containing as it did many who had fought Shadow on previous occasions, or else fled from its advance.

The tribe was overcome by successive defeats and members were either nobled or departed for another, ostensibly safer, tribe. Many members comprised the membership of the later tribe [OBL].

Sometime in the last month of the world, the tribe was renamed to ~R.B~.​

[/spoil]

TK

[spoil]

Name: True Kings

Profile: TK

Best Rank: 3

Notable Players: CarltonFisk, Daihatsuman

Summary
If [IRON] was the tribe that gave the Coalition hope, TK was the tribe that took it away. Regardless of its significant size and some impressive members, TK never looked like living up to its task. Unquestionably, it did make great gains against Shadow; yet these always seemed to come at great cost to the tribe. It lost village after village to the onslaught.

Beginning under various guises, TK came to fill a relative vacuum in the map that had not been filled by another large tribe. Its eastern stronghold was well placed to work against a tribe that had often been busier everywhere else.

Perhaps the unwillingness of neighbours SAM and GR*FM to join the war left it stranded against a much larger force. Also, with FURY afforded very little attention from Shadow, many players were easily able to turn their attentions to the tribe.

Whatever the case, TK was bruised more than most in the early exchanges. It quickly joined Nstlk* in having slews of villages conquered each week, while making little reply. The longevity of its survival was afforded by its considerable size, but left the war early.

Much of TK was later repackaged into NOS, as well as splintering off into other smaller tribes.

(You may note that the later official tag of the tribe is TK.. It seems to me that it was only ever TK for the majority of the world and that this is a much later change. Whatever the case, it is referred to as TK for ease of reading.)​

[/spoil]

*TKP*

[spoil]

Name: The Killer Penguins

Profile: *TKP*

Best Rank: 3

Notable Players: mrpickle99

Summary
Home to some notable alumni during the Tribe Lock (Carthon II and OjibweMan), *TKP* was one of the few tribes to survive from the beginning of the game, enjoying a largely unremarkable beginning in its early months. It established a strong base to the West and grew quietly during the early wars of larger tribes, patiently moving up the ranks. It gained a reputation for the quirky and irreverent nature both of the duke and the tribe, having more character than most.

But it also proved to be immensely resourceful, managing to be overlooked as a target for conquest due to its perceived lack of threat, and in doing so, it became a force to be reckoned with. Led by mrpickle99, *TKP* proved to be shrewd in its decision making and deeply popular with its members who were themselves enthusiastic and friendly, if largely inexperienced. In many ways, it was a remarkable success story.

Following the merge of its active players into Shadow, the tribe never recovered. Those left quickly fell into obscurity. Later players would comment that *TKP* proved to be a more friendly tribe than most, but that it lacked any war mentality. It was both criticised and praised for its pursuit of fun and comradeship over achievement within the game.​

[/spoil]

YGI?

[spoil]

Name: You Got Incoming?

Profile: YGI?

Best Rank: 3

Notable Players: Calinor, DirkLerxst, maccano1, theSleepwalker , XsaphiraX

Summary
In a world of tribes criticised for their size and recruitment policies, YGI? was conspicuous by its size and ethos. Intended originally as a powerful and compact tribe, many commentators had very hopes for the tribe. Backed too by some strong players and solid activity, it looked like an opponent that should not be underestimated.

It was to great surprise that their war with Nstlk* was so unremarkable as to have left many confused. For all their promise, they had decided to fall in steps with the masses and merge two strong tribes together to create one that might have a shot at dominance.

Members defended this decision by citing the loss of parts of the leadership and the improbable nature of either tribe standing up to ATTACK when the world was done. What could have been a great tribe became a name largely forgotten.​

[/spoil]​
 
Last edited by a moderator:

DeletedUser

Guest
Em, rules say you can't have more than 2 posts in a row :icon_neutral:
Poor Zarin is going to get banned :icon_biggrin:

But yeah, I am saving this read for later :)
 

DeletedUser

Guest
no you can't for certain things, stuff like this will be overlooked

Zar, do you really want me to help with the Horsemen stuff? You forgot every mention of that incident, which was a heavy influence on the world of the day back then, and showed how tribes could function against a much larger alliance.
 

DeletedUser

Guest
Have just spent the last couple of hours reading through this, skipped a few of the spoilers but will go back through and read later.

Zarin a very very big thankyou for taking the time to do this, its been a fantastic read (I've read it first time simply for the pleasure of looking back on the History of the world) Its certainly been an interesting journey for all who were involved here, and this is a great way to look back on the events that have made this world what its is.
 

styv

Well-Known Member
Reaction score
28
The little people in the east

Feb 13th was a frightening day for the little players on the rim in K67. All of the big tribes were to the north and west. Our little cluster of n00bs had no tribe to protect us. Many were summarily dismissed simply because we were in the 80s and 90s for points. The fact that most of us joined the world in December and January made no difference.

So, alone and vulnerable, we did what we could. The big players like the Great Lord Trader, the evil one MooMix1, and the T-GR warriors, preyed upon us with impunity. Luckily for us, the Great Lord Trader and MooMix1 only wanted villages with at least 3000 points. JamTheIceMan, I.F.G, and others dodged and dodged. We obviously couldn't fight back against a warrior with 30-40 villages. It forced us into a Grand N00b alliance!
 

styv

Well-Known Member
Reaction score
28
The K67 Grand Alliance

The K67 Grand Alliance

After repeated attacks from K66 and K57, the little n00b tribes in K67 were starting to disintegrate. Many disbanded. Others watched impotently as their fellow warriors were mowed down by the giants from T-GR and other large tribes. Styv, the Grand n00b, knew it was time to take action, else K67 would be taken over. He contacted several of the small tribes, looking for a merger that could save all of them. In the process, he found a calling to counsel and share with his new TW warrior friends. Friendships that last to this day.

Negotiations were difficult to say the least. All of the n00b Dukes wanted to keep their power more than their tribes. It took quite a while, but two tribes merged into =S= (Sanctuary - formed by styv when RIM, gave him up for their other clusters). More negotiations led =S=, ~BS~, and two other tribes to merge into a new ~BS~, now named the Black Scorpion Sanctuary. Styv stepped down as Duke and relegated himself to a simple villager. The Duke of ~BS~ became leader and the other Dukes became Barons. The little group of tribes were now united and the largest tribe in K67! The forums were filled with optimism and courage. Everyone wanted to get back at those giants. Everyone felt that we could defend ourselves and rid K67 of the alien giants!

Soon; however, it was realized that bigger did not mean better. A bunch of n00bs, no matter how big, were still n00bs. :(
The new tribe struggled mightily in leadership. The Duke did not participate in the forums, nor did he coordinate any defense or retaliation against the alien giants. The tribe was still being decimated from K57, K66 and now K67 since they were taking our northern and western villages. Desperate for some sort of action, Styv and JamTheIceMan decided to take matters into their own hands. They led several warriors on an Op to discourage those that wished us harm.

Next: The First Counter and the Last of ~BS~
 

styv

Well-Known Member
Reaction score
28
The n00b Revolt

The n00b Revolt

Styv, Jam , and a few others decided to hit back against the giants. A spy had turned his back on our tribe and joined with our enemy. He took our plans with him. Not knowing until too late, our first volleys were easily dodged and counters came in. Styv had just lost his first village (5k) and sustained nukes against his two others (3k and 1.5k). He had managed to dodge the attacks on two and three and wanted to exact a penalty on the ruthless barbarians that took his village, especially the little spy from "Hell" (his village names). The little group of n00bs coordinated an attack on styv's v1 and several of the marauder's other villages. Styv sent a n00b nuke to v1 and another villages, while Jam sent a n00b train to v1. Jam took the cleared village! Two other villages were cleared by styv, i.f.g and other warriors. We took the other two villages and sent the little snoop to the rim and finally off world completely. Our little band of n00bs had finally fought back and won!

The forum was really alive now. Everyone wanted to join in our success. But our Duke continued to ignore us. Styv led several other ops, but not having leadership or even access to hidden forums made things unbearable. The tribe was falling apart from the top down and it looked like nothing could be done. Styv mailed the Duke many times asking him to lead, to no avail. Because of the strife in the tribe from those that wanted to fight back and those that were content to sit back and hope they were not the next to get rimmed, Styv "dismissed" himself, left the tribe and formed the Scythian Allied Militia (SAM), which stands today (but not without its own failures).

Next: The Militia takes K67; ~BS~ dissolves, with SAM's help.
 

styv

Well-Known Member
Reaction score
28
SAM's First Golden Age

When styv formed the Scythian Allied Militia, he took the lessons he learned from the ~BS~ failure with him. He developed the 5 Core Principles based on honor, integrity, mercy, strategy and tribal governance. He also chose NOT to recruit, but to form relationships which would then grown into entrance into the tribe.

SAM started out and stayed small in number but big in hope! Elk2 and Styv had become friends during their ~BS~ days. Elk2 quickly joined SAM, along with BamBamSam1997, Jam, i.f.g and a few others. SAM was small, quiet, but strong in value and direction. It's strategic goals were to be #1 in K67 and to defend the honor of the east. Growing numbers was not in the strategic plan, growing troops and territory was!

Relationships between ~BS~ and SAM were difficult. The larger tribes to the north (joker, TK), along with T-GR and LA-G, were making in-roads into the south east. SAM was willing to fight back, ~BS~ was not. SAM wrote ~BS~ off and focused on the southern flank of K67 and leaving ~BS~ to get eaten in the north. That strategy left styv and jam a little vulnerable in the north, but every tribe had to have borders. The Duke of ~BS~, for some reason unknown to anyone, disbanded and joined LA-G. SAM offered a home to several of the warriors, added a couple from other tribes, one of which was kennyd69 - and became the largest tribe in K67! Our first goal attained, we chose to move south and west into K77 and K76.

Very soon after, the ex ~BS! Duke attacked one of SAM's villages. LA-G was formidable, but we let them know that we were not allowing that to go unpunished. Several of our warriors, led by i.f.g, took many of his villages. At that point, he quit. SAM had again defended honor in the east. Now as the largest and strongest tribe in K67, SAM took more of a leadership role, mentoring and helping other tribes to grow along side us (as long as they did not threaten our territory).

Next, SAM and GR*FM
 
Top